P375_Ranger_English_2018_TKD_OM_ASEAN_JB3B19A321CKA.v1

FORD RANGER Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.

Part Number: JB3B 19A321 CKA 201803 20180306203121
Table of Contents
Introduction MyKey™
About This Manual ..........................................7 Principle of Operation ..................................33
Symbols Glossary ............................................7 Creating a MyKey ...........................................34
Data Recording .................................................9 Clearing All MyKeys ......................................35
Replacement Parts Recommendation Checking MyKey System Status ..............36
...........................................................................10 MyKey Troubleshooting ...............................37
Special Notices ...............................................10
Mobile Communications Equipment Doors and Locks
.............................................................................11
Locking and Unlocking ................................38
At a Glance
Security
Instrument Panel Overview ........................12
Passive Anti-Theft System .........................41
Anti-Theft Alarm ............................................41
Child Safety
Installing Child Restraints ...........................15
Steering Wheel
Child Restraint Positioning .........................18
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...................43
Child Safety Locks ..........................................21
Audio Control ..................................................43
Voice Control ..................................................44
Seatbelts
Cruise Control .................................................44
Principle of Operation ..................................22
Information Display Control .....................44
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................22
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................23
Wipers and Washers
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................24
Windshield Wipers .......................................46
Autowipers ......................................................46
Supplementary Restraints
System Windshield Washers .....................................47
Principle of Operation ..................................25
Lighting
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................25
General Information ....................................48
Side Airbags ....................................................26
Lighting Control .............................................48
Side Curtain Airbags .....................................27
Autolamps .......................................................49
Keys and Remote Controls Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................49
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................50
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................28 Daytime Running Lamps ...........................50
Remote Control .............................................28 Automatic High Beam Control ................50
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control Front Fog Lamps ...........................................52
...........................................................................32 Rear Fog Lamps .............................................52
Passive Key Backup Position ....................32 Headlamp Leveling .......................................52
Direction Indicators ......................................53
Interior Lamps ................................................53
Ranger (TKD) Vehicles Built From: 21-05-2018, JB3B 19A321 CKA enPHI, Edition date: 201803, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Ambient Lighting ...........................................54 Storage Compartments

Cargo Lamps ...................................................55 Glove Box ..........................................................111
Center Console ...............................................111
Windows and Mirrors Overhead Console .........................................111
Power Windows ............................................56 Cool Box ...........................................................112
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................59 Under Seat Storage ......................................112
Interior Mirror ..................................................60
Sun Visors .........................................................61 Starting and Stopping the
Engine
Instrument Cluster General Information ....................................113
Gauges ..............................................................62 Keyless Starting .............................................113
Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............64 Ignition Switch ...............................................114
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............68 Steering Wheel Lock ...................................114
Starting a Diesel Engine .............................115
Information Displays Switching Off the Engine ...........................115
General Information .....................................70
Trip Computer .................................................81 Unique Driving Characteristics
Personalized Settings ...................................81
Information Messages .................................82 Auto-Start-Stop - Automatic
Transmission ..............................................116
Climate Control Auto-Start-Stop - Manual Transmission
..........................................................................117
Manual Climate Control .............................94
Automatic Climate Control .......................95
Fuel and Refueling
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
..........................................................................98 Safety Precautions .......................................119
Heated Rear Window ................................100 Fuel Quality .....................................................119
Heated Exterior Mirrors .............................100 Running Out of Fuel ...................................120
Cabin Air Filter ..............................................100 Refueling ..........................................................121
Fuel Consumption .......................................123
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position .................102 Transmission
Head Restraints ...........................................102 Manual Transmission .................................125
Manual Seats ................................................103 Automatic Transmission ...........................125
Power Seats ..................................................105
Rear Seats ......................................................106 Four-Wheel Drive
Rear Seat Armrest ......................................108 Principle of Operation .................................131
Using Four-Wheel Drive .............................131
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ..............................109 Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential ............................135
Table of Contents
Electronic Locking Differential ................135 Traffic Sign Recognition ............................173

Steering ...........................................................174
Brakes Pre-Collision Assist .....................................175
General Information ...................................136
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes Load Carrying
.........................................................................137 General Information ...................................179
Parking Brake .................................................137 Luggage Covers ............................................179
Hill Start Assist .............................................137 Roof Racks and Load Carriers .................181
Load Retaining Fixtures .............................182
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ...............................140 Tailgate
Using Traction Control ..............................140 Manual Tailgate ...........................................186
Stability Control Towing

Principle of Operation .................................141 Towing a Trailer .............................................187
Using Stability Control ...............................142 Trailer Sway Control ....................................187
Recommended Towing Weights ...........188
Hill Descent Control Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......190
Principle of Operation ................................144
Using Hill Descent Control .......................144 Driving Hints
Breaking-In ......................................................191
Parking Aids Reduced Engine Performance .................191
Principle of Operation ...............................146 Cold Weather Precautions ........................191
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................146 Off-Road Driving ...........................................191
Front Parking Aid ..........................................147 Driving Through Water ...............................193
Active Park Assist ........................................148 Floor Mats ......................................................194
Rear View Camera .......................................152
Roadside Emergencies
Cruise Control Hazard Flashers ...........................................196
Principle of Operation ................................156 Warning Triangle .........................................196
Using Cruise Control ...................................156 Fuel Shutoff ...................................................197
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ................157 Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................197
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................199
Driving Aids Towing Points ..............................................200
Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control .........................................................163
Fuses
Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control ...........................................165 Fuse Box Locations .....................................201
Driver Alert ......................................................167 Fuse Specification Chart .........................202
Lane Keeping System ................................169 Changing a Fuse ...........................................214
Table of Contents
Maintenance Wheels and Tires

General Information ...................................216 General Information ..................................239
Opening and Closing the Hood ..............216 Tire Care .........................................................239
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L TDCi Using Snow Chains ....................................244
Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN) Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........244
/2.0L TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS)
(YM) ..............................................................217 Changing a Road Wheel ..........................248
Under Hood Overview - 2.2L Diesel ......218 Technical Specifications ..........................255
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Diesel ......219
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L TDCi Bi-Turbo Capacities and Specifications
Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN) /2.0L
TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS) (YM) Engine Specifications - 2.0L TDCi Diesel
.........................................................................221 (132 kW/180 PS) (YM) .........................257
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Diesel/3.2L Engine Specifications - 2.0L TDCi
Diesel ............................................................221 Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN)
Engine Oil Check ..........................................221 ........................................................................258
Engine Coolant Check ...............................222 Engine Specifications - 2.2L Diesel ......259
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check ................223 Engine Specifications - 3.2L Diesel ......260
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................223 Vehicle Dimensions - Double Cab/Single
Washer Fluid Check ...................................223 Cab/Super Cab ........................................261
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 2.0L Vehicle Dimensions - Short Wheelbase,
TDCi Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) Chassis Cab ..............................................265
(YN) /2.0L TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 Vehicle Identification Plate .....................266
PS) (YM) ....................................................223 Vehicle Identification Number ..............266
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 2.2L Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
Diesel/3.2L Diesel ...................................224 TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS) (YM)
Charging the 12V Battery ..........................225 ........................................................................267
Changing the 12V Battery ........................225 Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
Checking the Wiper Blades .....................227 TDCi Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS)
(YN) ...........................................................269
Changing the Wiper Blades .....................227
Capacities and Specifications - 2.2L
Removing a Headlamp .............................228 Diesel ............................................................271
Changing a Bulb ..........................................228 Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L
Diesel ...........................................................274
Vehicle Care Bulb Specification Chart ..........................276
Cleaning the Exterior .................................233
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades Audio System
........................................................................234 General Information ..................................279
Cleaning the Interior ..................................234 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/Aux
Cleaning Leather Seats ............................235 In/USB/Bluetooth .................................280
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............236 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC ...........................................................282
Cleaning the Wheels .................................236
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Vehicle Storage ............................................237 SYNC/Touchscreen Display ...............285
Table of Contents
Radio ................................................................287
Compact Disc Player - Vehicles With:
AM/FM/Aux In/USB/Bluetooth ........287
Audio Input Jack ...........................................291
USB Port ........................................................292
Media Hub .....................................................292
Audio Troubleshooting .............................292
SYNC™
General Information ..................................294
Using Voice Recognition ..........................296
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ...........298
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......309
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
.........................................................................316
SYNC™ Troubleshooting .........................325
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................335
Home Screen ...............................................339
Using Voice Recognition ...........................341
Entertainment .............................................346
Climate ............................................................351
Phone ..............................................................355
Navigation .....................................................360
Apps ................................................................363
Settings ..........................................................364
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................376
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............390
End User License Agreement .................392
Type Approvals ............................................418
6
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and E154903
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any A Right-hand side.
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe B Left-hand side.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable These are some of the symbols you may
local laws that may affect the use of see on your vehicle.
electronic devices while driving. Safety Alert
Note: This manual describes product

features and options available throughout See Owner's Manual
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the Air conditioning system
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this E162384
manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Battery
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
Battery acid
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Introduction
Brake system Explosive gas
Cabin air filter Fan warning
Check engine Fasten seatbelt

E71880
Check fuel cap Front airbag

E67017
Child safety door lock Front fog lamps
Child safety door unlock Fuse compartment
Child seat lower anchor Hazard flashers
Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window
Cruise control Heated windshield
E71340
Do not open when hot Windshield defroster
Electronic power steering Interior luggage compartment

malfunction release
Engine air filter Jack
Engine coolant Lighting control
Engine coolant temperature Lock rear window
Engine oil Low tire pressure warning
Introduction
Maintain correct fluid level DATA RECORDING

A large number of electronic components
Panic alarm of your vehicle contain data storage
modules temporarily or permanently
storing technical data about the condition
Parking aid of the vehicle, events and malfunctions.
In general, this technical information
E139213
documents the condition of parts,
Power window lockout modules, systems or the environment:
• Operating conditions of system
components (e.g. filling levels).
Power windows
• Status messages of the vehicle and its
individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/rotational speed,
Service engine soon deceleration, lateral acceleration).
• Malfunctions and defects in important
Side airbag system components (e.g. lighting and
brake system).
• Vehicle reactions in particular driving
Stability control situations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,
activation of the stability regulation
E138639 system).
Windshield wash and wipe • Environmental conditions (e.g.
temperature).
These data are exclusively technical and
Keep out of reach of children help identification and correction of
malfunctions as well as optimisation of
E161353
vehicle functions. Motion profiles indicating
Recyclable product travelled routes cannot be created with
these data.
E161307
If services are used (e.g. repair works,
Do not dispose of in the trash
service processes, warranty cases, quality
because the material contains
assurance), employees of the service
E161354 lead
network (including manufacturers) are
Use safety glasses when able to read out this technical information
handling from the event and malfunction data
E161305 storage modules using special diagnostic
devices. If required, you will receive further
information. After a malfunction has been
corrected, these data are deleted from the
malfunction storage module or they are
constantly overwritten.
Introduction
When using the vehicle, situations may Collision Repairs

occur in which these technical data related
to other information (accident report, We hope that you never experience a
damages on the vehicle, witness collision, but accidents do happen.
statements, etc.) may be associated with Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
a specific person - possibly, with the meet our stringent requirements for fit,
assistance of an expert. finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
Additional functions contractually agreed vehicle development we validate that
upon with the client (e.g. vehicle location these parts deliver the intended level of
in emergency cases) allow the protection as a whole system. A great way
transmission of particular vehicle data to know for sure you are getting this level
from the vehicle. of protection is to use genuine Ford
Note: Do not connect wireless plug-in replacement collision parts.
devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain access Warranty on Replacement Parts
to vehicle data and impair the performance Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
of safety related systems. Only allow repair parts are the only replacement parts that
facilities that follow our service and repair benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
instructions to connect their equipment to Warranty may not cover damage caused
the data link connector. to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
REPLACEMENT PARTS refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest SPECIAL NOTICES
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of If converting or modifying your vehicle from
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts production specification, please see your
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled authorised Ford dealer.
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
10
Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
loss of vehicle control, crash and
you use extreme caution when using any
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
while driving and encourage the use of
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
11
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Right-hand drive
E266454
A Air vents. F Cruise control switches. See

Cruise Control (page 44).
B Multi-function display. See
General Information (page G Direction indicators. See
294). Direction Indicators (page 53).
C Windshield wipers. See Wipers H Lighting control. See Lighting
and Washers (page 46). Control (page 48).
D Audio control. See Audio I Hood release lever. See
Control (page 43). Voice Opening and Closing the
control. See Voice Control Hood (page 216).
(page 44). J Ignition switch. See Ignition
E Instrument cluster. See Switch (page 114).
Instrument Cluster (page 62).
12
At a Glance
K Steering wheel adjustment lever. L Horn.

See Adjusting the Steering M Climate control. See Climate
Wheel (page 43). Control (page 94).
Left-hand drive
E266455
A Air vents. E Instrument cluster. See

Instrument Cluster (page 62).
B Multi-function display. See
General Information (page F Cruise control switches. See
294). Cruise Control (page 44).
C Windshield wipers. See Wipers G Direction indicators. See
and Washers (page 46). Direction Indicators (page 53).
D Audio control. See Audio H Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 43). Voice Control (page 48).
control. See Voice Control I Hood release lever. See
(page 44). Opening and Closing the
Hood (page 216).
13
At a Glance
J Ignition switch. See Ignition

Switch (page 114).
K Steering wheel adjustment lever.
See Adjusting the Steering
Wheel (page 43).
L Horn.
M Climate control. See Climate
Control (page 94).
14
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD WARNINGS

RESTRAINTS Do not hold a child on your lap when
your vehicle is moving.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the child restraints
checked.
E161855 Note: Mandatory use of child seats varies

from country to country.
Only child seats certified to ECE-R129 or
ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested
and approved for use in your vehicle. A
choice of these are available from an
authorized dealer.
Child Seats for Different Mass

Groups
Use the correct child seat as follows:
Baby Safety Seat
E68916
WARNINGS
Use an approved child restraint to
secure children less than 150 cm tall
on the rear seat.
Extreme Hazard! Never use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an active airbag in
front of it. Death or serious injury to the
child can occur.
Read and follow the manufacturer's E68918
instructions when you are installing
a child restraint. Secure children that weigh less than 13 kg
in a rearward facing baby safety seat
Do not modify child restraints in any (Group 0+) on the rear seat.
way.
15
Child Safety
Child Safety Seat WARNING

You must reinstall the head restraint
following the removal of the child
restraint.
See Head Restraints (page 102).

Note: When using a child restraint on a
front seat, the following seat positioning
guidelines should be followed. The child
must not be in contact with the instrument
panel. The passenger seat should be
positioned as far rearward as possible by
E68920 having a seatbelt routing (from B-pillar ring
to child restraint) in a forward direction. If it
Secure children that weigh between 13 kg
proves difficult to tighten the lap section of
and 18 kg in a child safety seat (Group 1)
the seatbelt without slack remaining, adjust
on the rear seat.
the seatback to the fully upright position
Booster Seats and raise the height of the seat.
Note: When using a child seat on a rear
WARNINGS seat, adjust the front seat in a position to
Do not install a booster seat or a prevent contact with the rear passenger,
booster cushion with only the lap child feet or child legs.
strap of the seatbelt.
Booster Seat (Group 2)
Do not install a booster seat or a
booster cushion with a seatbelt that
is slack or twisted.
Do not put the seatbelt under your
child's arm or behind its back.
Do not use pillows, books or towels
to boost your child's height.
Make sure that your children sit in an
upright position.
When using a child restraint on a rear
seat, the child restraint must rest E70710
tightly against the vehicle seat. It
must not touch the head restraint. If Secure children that weigh more than 15 kg
necessary remove the head restraint. but are less than 150 cm tall in a booster
seat or a booster cushion.
16
Child Safety
We recommend that you use a booster

seat that combines a cushion with a
backrest instead of a booster cushion only.
The raised seating position will allow you
to position the shoulder strap of the adult
seatbelt over the center of your child’s
shoulder and the lap strap tightly across
its hips.
Booster Cushion (Group 3)
E213581
Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that

accommodate universally approved
ISOFIX child restraints.
The ISOFIX system comprises two rigid
attachment arms on the child restraint that
E68924 attach to anchor points on the outboard
2nd row seats, where the cushion and
ISOFIX Anchor Points backrest meet. Tether anchor points are
behind the outboard 2nd row seats for
WARNING child restraints with a top tether.
Use an anti-rotation device when
using the ISOFIX system. We Top Tether Anchor Points (If
recommend the use of a top tether Equipped)
or support leg.
Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX

seat, make sure that you know the correct
mass group and ISOFIX size class for the
intended seating locations. See Child
Restraint Positioning (page 18).
E212688
There are two child restraint anchor points

on the second row seats, one for each rear
seating positions.
17
Child Safety
Attaching a Child Restraint with 2. Push the child restraint back firmly to
Top Tethers engage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.
3. Tighten the tether strap in line with the
WARNINGS child restraint manufacturer's
Do not attach a tether strap to instructions.
anything other than the correct
tether anchor point.
CHILD RESTRAINT
Make sure that the top tether strap
is not slack or twisted and is properly POSITIONING
located on the anchor point.
WARNINGS
Note: Where applicable, remove the EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a
luggage cover to ease installation. rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an airbag in front
1. Route the tether strap to the anchor of it!
point.
If you use a child restraint and a
seatbelt, make sure that the seatbelt
is not slack or twisted.
Make sure the child restraint rests
tightly against the vehicle seat. If
necessary, adjust the seat backrest
to an upright position. It may also be
necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint.

Note: See an authorized dealer for the
latest details relating to our recommended
child restraints.
E87145
18
Child Safety
Mass Group Categories
Seating Positions 0 0+ 1 2 3
0–10 kg 0–13 kg 9–18 kg 15–25 kg 22–36 kg

Front passenger seat
X X UF¹ UF¹ UF¹
with airbag ON
Front passenger seat
U¹ U¹ U¹ U¹ U¹
with airbag OFF
Rear seats U U U U U
Single cab center seat X X X X X
X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

U Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.
U¹ Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.
However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child
restraint, on the rear seat.
UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use in this
mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved
child restraint, on the rear seat.
Note: When using a child restraint on a

front seat, always adjust the front passenger
seat to its fully rearward position. If it proves
difficult to tighten the lap section of the
seatbelt without slack remaining, adjust the
seat backrest to the fully upright position
and raise the height of the seat. See Seats
(page 102).
ISOFIX Child Restraints

0+ 1
Seating Positions
Rear facing Forward facing
0–13 kg 9–18 kg
Front seat Size class
Not ISOFIX equipped
Seat type
Rear outermost seat ISOFIX Size class C, D, E
1
A, B, B1, C, D
1
19
Child Safety
0+ 1
Seating Positions
Rear facing Forward facing
0–13 kg 9–18 kg
Seat type IL
2
IL, IUF
3
Rear center seat Size class

Not ISOFIX equipped
Seat type
IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems of the semi-universal category.
Please consult child restraint systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.
IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraint systems of universal category
approved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.
1
The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraint systems is
defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIX
child restraint.
2
At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax
Romer Baby Safe. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our
recommended child restraints.
3
At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax Romer
Duo. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended child
restraints.
20
Child Safety
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNING
You cannot open the rear doors from
inside if you have put the child safety
locks on.
E132612
The childproof locks are on the rear edge

of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
21
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Status After a Crash
WARNING
WARNINGS
Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficient Seatbelts subjected to strain, as a
distance between yourself and the result of an accident, should be
steering wheel. Only when you use renewed and the anchorages
the seatbelt correctly, can it hold you in a checked by a properly trained technician.
position that allows the airbag to achieve
its optimum effect. Failure to adhere to Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death. WARNING
Never use a seatbelt for more than Position the seatbelt correctly for
one person. It is dangerous to put a your safety and that of your unborn
belt around a child being carried on child. Do not use only the lap strap
the occupant's lap. or the shoulder strap.
Use the correct buckle for each
seatbelt.
Do not use a seatbelt that is slack or
twisted.
Do not wear thick clothing. The
seatbelt must fit tightly around your
body to achieve its optimum effect.
Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt

over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your E68587
hips.
Pregnant women should always wear their
When you use them properly, the seat,
seatbelt. Position the lap strap
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags
comfortably across your hips and low
provide optimum protection in the event
beneath your pregnant abdomen. Position
of a crash.
the shoulder strap between your breasts,
Seatbelt Pretensioners above and to the side of your pregnant
abdomen.
The driver and front passenger seatbelt
systems are fitted with a seatbelt
pretensioner. FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Seatbelt pretensioners have a lower WARNING
deployment threshold than the airbags.
Insert the tongue into the buckle until
During minor collisions, it is possible that you hear a distinct click. You have
only the seatbelt pretensioners will deploy. not fastened the seatbelt properly if
you do not hear a click.
22
Seatbelts
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the seatbelt height adjuster
so that the seatbelt rests across the
middle of your shoulder. Failure to
adjust the seatbelt correctly could reduce
its effectiveness and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
E74124
E131388
To adjust the shoulder belt height:

1. Pull the locking button and slide the
height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on the
E85817
height adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if you
pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.
Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt. Let it retract completely
and smoothly.
23
Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not sit on top of a fastened
seatbelt to prevent the seatbelt
reminder from coming on. The
occupant protection system will only
provide optimum protection when you use
the seatbelt properly.
Your vehicle may have a seatbelt

reminder warning lamp that
E71880 appears in the instrument
cluster.
The seatbelt reminder warning lamp may

be activated in the following situations:
• The seatbelt reminder warning lamp
illuminates for six seconds when you
switch the ignition on to remind the
driver to fasten the seatbelt.
illuminates at any time when the driver
seatbelt is not fastened.
illuminates and an audible warning
sounds if the driver or front passenger
seatbelt has not been fastened and the
vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed.
It also illuminates if either of the
seatbelts is unfastened when the
vehicle is moving. The audible warning
goes off after five minutes, but the
seatbelt reminder warning lamp
remains on until you fasten the
seatbelt.
Turning the Seatbelt Reminder Off

Contact an authorized dealer.
24
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

Do not use accessory seat covers.
WARNINGS The use of accessory seat covers
Extreme Hazard! Never use a may prevent the deployment of the
rearward facing child restraint on a side airbags and increase the risk of injury
seat protected by an active airbag in in an accident.
front of it. Death or serious injury to the
child can occur. Note: A loud bang sounds and there is a
Do not modify the front of your cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
vehicle in any way. This could airbag deploys. This is normal.
adversely affect deployment of the Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning cloth.
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficient
distance between yourself and the AIRBAGS
steering wheel. Only when you use
the seatbelt correctly, can it hold you in a
position that allows the airbag to achieve
its optimum effect. Failure to adhere to
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Repairs to the steering wheel,
steering column, seats, airbags and
seatbelts must be carried out by an
authorized dealer. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in serious personal
injury or death.
E151127
Keep the areas in front of the airbags
free from obstruction. Do not affix The airbags deploy during significant
anything to or over the airbag covers. frontal crashes. The airbags inflate within
Objects could become projectiles during a few thousandths of a second and deflate
airbag deployment. Failure to follow this on contact with the occupants, thus
instruction could result in personal injury cushioning forward body movement.
or death. During minor frontal crashes, overturns,
Do not poke sharp objects into areas rear crashes and side crashes, the airbags
where airbags are fitted. This could will not deploy.
damage and adversely affect
deployment of the airbags. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
25
SIDE AIRBAGS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback. E72658
Do not use accessory seat covers. The side airbags are on the outermost side
The use of accessory seat covers of each front seat backrest. There is a label
may prevent the deployment of the attached to the side of each backrest to
side airbags and increase the risk of injury indicate this.
in an accident.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury E152533
or death.
The side airbags are designed to inflate
between the door panel and the occupant
to enhance the protection in certain
crashes.
The airbag is designed to deploy during a
significant lateral crash. It might also
deploy during a significant frontal crash.
The airbag is not designed to deploy during
a minor lateral or frontal crash, rear crash
or a vehicle rollover.
26
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (If

Equipped)
WARNING
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
E75004
The airbags are above the front and rear

side windows.
The airbag is designed to deploy during a
significant lateral or frontal angled crash.
The airbag is not designed to deploy during
a minor lateral and frontal crash, rear crash
or a vehicle rollover.
27
Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON REMOTE CONTROL

RADIO FREQUENCIES
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Note: Changes or modifications not Equipped)
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
authority to operate the equipment. unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
The typical operating range for your transmitter functions as a programmed
transmitter is approximately 10 m. ignition key that operates all the locks and
A decrease in operating range could be starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
caused by: control.
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the E191532
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can Press the button to release the key blade.
lock and unlock the doors with the key. Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked
before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a

security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
28
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)

Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
E258629
Press the release button and pull the key

blade out.
E258628
The intelligent access keys operate the

power locks. The key must be in your
vehicle to use the push button start.
Removable Key Blade

The intelligent access key also contains a E151795
removable key blade that you can use to
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
unlock your vehicle.
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery

Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
29
A message appears in the information

display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
70).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter

The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E191533
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.

6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Key

The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
30
E258629
1. Push the release button and pull the

key blade out.
E218401
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden

behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
31
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 41).
PASSIVE KEY BACKUP

POSITION
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
E272540
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key Place the passive key in the position
blade. shown, with the buttons facing upward.
Make sure that you place the key fob in the
Car Finder center of the cup holder.
Press the button twice within The top or bottom end of the key must be
three seconds. The horn sounds pointing towards the front or rear of the
E138623 and the direction indicators vehicle.
flash.
With the key in this position, press the
brake or clutch pedal, then press the start
Sounding a Panic Alarm (If Equipped) button to switch on your vehicle.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
E138624 switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
32
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • Driver assist features, if equipped on

your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
MyKey allows you to program keys with blind spot information system (BLIS),
restricted driving modes to promote good cross traffic alert, lane departure
driving habits. All but one of the keys warning and forward collision warning
programmed to the vehicle can be system.
activated with these restricted modes. • Satellite radio adult content
Any keys that have not been programmed restrictions (available only in some
are referred to as administrator keys or markets).
admin keys. They can be used to: Note: When you switch lane departure
• Create a MyKey. warning off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features. Configurable Settings
When you have programmed a MyKey, you With an admin key, you can configure
can access the following information using certain MyKey settings when you first
the information display: create a MyKey and before you recycle the
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are key or restart the vehicle. You can also
programmed to your vehicle. change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey. • A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the followed by an audible tone when your
same settings. You cannot program them vehicle reaches the set speed. You
individually. cannot override the set speed by fully
Note: For vehicles equipped with a depressing the accelerator pedal or by
push-button start switch: When both a setting cruise control.
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes WARNING
the admin key only. Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
Non-configurable Settings driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
The following settings cannot be changed
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
by an admin key user:
always responsible to drive in accordance
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder. with local laws and prevailing conditions.
You cannot disable this feature. The Failure to do so could result in accident or
audio system will mute when the front injury.
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
33
• Various vehicle speed reminders so you 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or

know when your vehicle approaches Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is
the limits. Warnings appear in the equipped with these features).
information display and an audible
warning sounds when you exceed the
limit. CREATING A MYKEY
• Audio system maximum volume of Use the information display to create a
45%. A message will be shown in the MyKey:
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the 1. Insert the key you want to program into
speed-sensitive or compensated the ignition.
automatic volume control will be 2. Switch the ignition on.
disabled.
3. Access the main menu on the
• Always on setting. When this is information display controls. Use the
selected, you will not be able to turn arrow keys to get to the following menu
off Advance Trac or traction control, selections:
Message Action and Description
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
Create MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
When prompted, hold the OK button until Programming/Changing

you see a message informing you to label Configurable Settings
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start. Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
the admin keys. key or remote control.
You can also program configurable 2. Access the main menu on the
settings for the key(s). See information display controls. Use the
Programming/Changing Configurable arrow keys to get to the following menu
Settings. selections:
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
34
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you You can clear or change your MyKey
have switched the vehicle off, however, you settings using the information display
will need an admin key to change or clear control on the steering wheel. See
your MyKey settings. Information Displays (page 70).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow button.
Clear MyKey Press and hold the OK button until the instrument cluster
displays the following message.
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
35
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM You can find information on programmed

MyKey(s) using the information display
STATUS control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 70).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to

access the main menu and scroll to:
Message Description
Settings Press the OK button.

MyKey Press the OK button.
Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
{0} MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
36
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable • The key or transmitter used to start your
settings. vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 34).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. • The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 34).
I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.
I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 41).
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
37
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Locking the Doors

Press the button to lock all the
Power Door Locks doors. The direction indicators
The power door lock control is on the driver
E138623 flash.
and front passenger door panels. Note: If any door or the luggage
compartment is not closed, or if the hood is
not closed on vehicles that have an
anti-theft alarm, the direction indicators do
not flash.
Using Passive Entry (If Equipped)

General Information
E138628 You can unlock and lock the vehicle

without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your passive key is within
A Unlock.
1 m of your vehicle. Passive entry uses a
B Lock. sensor on the back of the front door handle
for unlocking and a separate sensor on the
Remote Control face of each door handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running. See Remote • The vehicle battery has no charge.
Control (page 28). • The key battery has no charge.
Unlocking the Doors • The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system is available on the front
Press the button to unlock all doors only.
doors. The direction indicators
flash. Note: The system may not function if the
key is close to metal objects or electronic
Note: You can unlock the driver's door with devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
the key. Use the key when the remote
control is not functioning. Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
Note: When you leave your vehicle locked vehicle. See Remote Control (page 28).
for several weeks, the remote control turns
off. Your vehicle must be unlocked with the Note: The system also unlock and lock the
key and started. Unlocking and starting your luggage compartment.
vehicle enables the remote control.
Unlocking Using Passive Entry
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function
You can reprogram the unlocking function
so that only the driver door is unlocked.
See Remote Control (page 28).
E248555
38
Doors and Locks
With your passive key within 1 m of your Autounlock

vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the
back of the door handle for a brief period Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
and then pull on the door handle to unlock, • The ignition is on, all the doors are
being careful to not touch the lock sensor closed, and your vehicle has been
at the same time or pulling the door handle moving at a speed greater than
too quickly. The system requires a brief 20 km/h.
delay to authenticate your passive key. • Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
Locking Using Passive Entry
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
E248556
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
With your passive key within 1 m of your the driver door.
vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock
sensor for approximately one second to Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
lock, being careful to not touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle at You can enable or disable the autounlock
the same time. After locking, you can feature in the information display or an
immediately pull on the door handle to authorized dealer can do it for you. See
confirm locking occurred without General Information (page 70).
inadvertently unlocking. Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Note: Do not use the outside door handle with the Key
as a roof cargo strap.
Locking with the Key
Autolock (If Equipped)
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
Autolock locks all the doors when: your vehicle.
• All doors are closed. Unlocking with the Key
• The ignition is on.
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
• You shift into any gear putting your your vehicle.
vehicle in motion.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater you pull the interior handle, you only turn off
than 20 km/h. the emergency locking, not the child safety
Autolock repeats when: lock. You can only open the doors using the
• You open then close any door while the external door handle.
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
15 km/h or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 20 km/h.
39
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking the Doors

with the Key - Vehicles with
Central Locking
E131448
Locking
If the central locking function fails to
operate, lock the doors individually by
inserting the key into the exterior door
handle key slot and rotating it.
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Unlocking
If the central locking function fails to
operate, unlock the driver door and then
unlock all other doors individually by
pulling the interior door handles.
Note: If the doors have been unlocked using
this method, the doors must be locked
individually until the central locking function
has been repaired.
40
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)

SYSTEM
Alarm System
Principle of Operation Your vehicle may have one or more of the
The system prevents someone from following alarm systems:
starting the engine with an incorrectly • Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.
coded key. • Perimeter alarm with interior sensors
Coded Keys and battery back-up sounder.
• Inclination or motion sensor to set off
If you lose a key, you can purchase a the alarm if the vehicle is moved or
replacement from an authorized dealer. If raised.
possible, provide them with the key
number from the tag provided with the Perimeter Alarm
original keys. You can also obtain extra
keys from an authorized dealer. The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle
Note: Have all of your remaining keys through the doors, luggage compartment
erased and recoded if you lose a key. Have and the hood.
replacement keys coded together with
recoding your remaining keys. See an Panic Alarm (If Equipped)
authorized dealer for further information.
The alarm can be activated using the
Note: Do not shield your keys with metal remote control.
objects. This may prevent the receiver from
recognizing a coded key. Interior Sensors
Arming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition off the engine
immobilizer will arm automatically after a
short time.
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition on the engine
immobilizer will disarm automatically if a E133698
correctly coded key is used.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
If you are unable to start the engine with a
unauthorized access by sensing any
correctly coded key, have your vehicle
movement within your vehicle.
checked by an authorized dealer.
Arming the alarm turns on the interior
sensors.
Note: Do not cover the interior lamp
scanning sensors.
41
Security
Note: Do not arm the alarm with full guard Reduced Guard
if passengers, animals or other moving
objects are inside your vehicle, as this could In reduced guard, the interior sensors are
trigger the alarm. off when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not leave the glasses holder open. Note: You can set the alarm to reduce
guard for the current ignition cycle only.
Note: To permanently switch off the interior
motion sensor, see an authorized dealer. Selecting Full or Reduced Guard
Note: Fuel fired heater may trigger false Full guard is the standard setting.
alarms.
You can switch this feature on or off and
Inclination or Motion Sensor adjust the settings using the information
display.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
elevation of your vehicle. Note: You can set the alarm to reduced
guard for the current ignition cycle only.
Triggering the Alarm Note: The alarm resets to full guard the
next time you unlock and then relock the
• If someone opens a door or the hood
vehicle with the remote control.
without a valid key or remote control.
• If you switch the ignition on without a Arming the Alarm
valid key.
Press the lock button once to lock your
• If the interior sensors detect movement vehicle and arm the alarm.
within your vehicle.
• On vehicles with a battery back-up Disarming the Alarm
sounder, if someone disconnects your
vehicle battery or the battery back-up Disarm the alarm by any of the following
sounder itself. actions:
If the alarm sounds, the alarm horn sounds • Unlock the doors with the key and
for 30 seconds and the hazard warning switch the ignition on with a correctly
lamps flash for five minutes. coded key within 12 seconds.
• Unlock the doors or luggage
Any further attempts to carry out one of compartment using the remote control.
the above will sound the alarm again.
Full and Reduced Guard

Full Guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior sensors are on
when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not arm the alarm with full guard
if passengers, animals or other moving
objects are inside your vehicle or if you are
transporting the vehicle as this could trigger
the alarm.
42
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 102).
2
3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
1
E176972
1. Unlock the steering column. A

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired C
position.
E
B
D
E199065
A Volume up.
B Seek down or previous.
C Seek up or next.
43
Steering Wheel
Type Two
D Mute.
E Volume down.
VOICE CONTROL
C
E248386
B See Using Adaptive Cruise Control

(page 157).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
E200787
CONTROL
A Voice recognition.
B Answer phone call.
C End phone call.
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type One
E205893
E201284
See Using Cruise Control (page 156).
E201420
44
Steering Wheel
Use the controls to adjust the information

display. Navigate through the screen and
press OK to select. See General
Information (page 70).
45
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Intermittent Wipe
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before

you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper E173729
motor to burn out. Always use the

windshield washers before wiping a dry A Shortest wipe interval.
windshield. B Intermittent wipe.
C Longest wipe interval.
Use the rotary control to adjust the

intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers

When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)

E173728
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
A Single wipe. you switch the windshield wipers on.
B Intermittent wipe. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
C Normal wipe.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
D High speed wipe. windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
46
Wipers and Washers
The feature uses a rain sensor that is in the In these conditions, you can do the
area around the interior mirror. The rain following:
sensor monitors the amount of moisture • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
on the windshield and turns on the wipers. to reduce the amount of smearing on
It adjusts the wiper speed by the amount the windshield.
of moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield. You can switch this feature on • Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
and off in the information display. See • Switch autowipers off.
Information Displays (page 70).
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E173730
A Highest sensitivity. E168042
B On. Note: Do not operate the washers when

C Lowest sensitivity. the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
Use the rotary control to adjust the Pull the lever toward you to operate the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you windshield washers. When you release the
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate lever, wiping continues for a short period
when the sensor detects a large amount of time.
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
47
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist E142449
can form on the interior of the lens. The

fine mist eventually clears and exits A Lamps off.
through the vents during normal operation. B Parking lamps, instrument panel
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours lamps, license plate lamps and
under dry weather conditions. tail lamps.
Examples of acceptable condensation are: C Headlamps.
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets). Headlamp High Beam
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E162679
Push the lever away from you to

switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the

lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
48
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
E162680 headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
Slightly pull the lever toward you and approximately 60 seconds after you switch
release it to flash the headlamps. the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped) wipers:
• During a single wipe.
WARNING • When using the windshield washers.
The system does not relieve you of • If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
your responsibility to drive with due
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
care and attention. You may need to
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
override the system if it does not turn the
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
headlamps on in low visibility conditions,
for example daytime fog.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: When disconnecting the battery or
when it runs out of charge, the illuminated
components turn to the maximum setting.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the

autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.
49
Lighting
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY

After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If

Equipped)
E231828
WARNING
Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level. The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions.
Make sure you switch the headlamps on,
A B as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight

conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to any position except
headlamps.
E165366
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
A Press repeatedly or press and CONTROL (If Equipped)
hold to dim.
B Press repeatedly or press and WARNINGS
hold to brighten. The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
high beams on or off.
50
Lighting
WARNINGS Once the system is active, the high beams

Do not use the system in poor turn on if:
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, • It is dark enough to require the use of
spray or snow. high beams.
You may need to override the system • There is no traffic or street lighting
during inclement weather. ahead.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
The system may not switch the high
approximately 40 km/h.
beams off if the lights of oncoming
vehicles are hidden by obstacles, for The system turns the high beams turn off
example guard rails. if:
Inspect and replace the windshield • The ambient light level is high enough
wiper blades regularly to make sure that high beams are not required.
the camera sensor has a clear view. • The system detects an approaching
The windshield wiper blades must be the vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
correct length. • The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 30 km/h.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark • The system detects severe rain, snow
enough and no other traffic is present. If it or fog.
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting • The camera is blocked.
ahead, the system turns off high beams • You switch the rear fog lamps on.
before they can distract other road users.
Low beams remain on. Switching the System On and Off
Note: Keep the windshield free from Switch the system on using the information
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects display. See Information Displays (page
and snow or ice. 70).
Note: The system may detect reflective
road signs as oncoming traffic and switch
the headlamps to low beam.
Note: Always fit original parts when
replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may
reduce system performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the

autolamps position. See Autolamps
(page 49).
51
Lighting
Overriding the System REAR FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)

Push or pull the lever to switch between
high and low beam.
Automatic High Beam Indicator (If

Equipped)
The indicator illuminates to

confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)

E232250
WARNING
Do not use the rear fog lamps when
it is raining or snowing and visibility
is more than 50 m.
Press to switch the fog lamps on or off.

You can switch the fog lamps on when
either the front fog lamps or low beam
headlamps are on.
E232249
Press to switch the fog lamps on or off. HEADLAMP LEVELING (If Equipped)
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
Adjust the level of the headlamp beams
lighting control is in any position except
according to your vehicle load.
automatic high beam or off.
Set the headlamp leveling control to zero
when your vehicle is unloaded. Set the
headlamp beams to give between
35–100 m of road surface illumination
when your vehicle is partially or fully
loaded.
To adjust the level of the headlamp
beams:
52
Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS
Note: When switching the ignition off, the
lamps turn off after a period of time to
prevent the battery from draining. To switch
2 the lamps on, switch on the ignition.
Courtesy lamp
2
A B C
1
E132711
1. Press to release the control. E112207

2. Rotate the control to the required
setting. A Off.
3. Press to close the control. B Door contact.
C On.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
When setting the switch to position A, the
courtesy lamp stays off when you unlock
or open a door.
When setting the switch to position B, the
courtesy lamp turns on when you unlock
or open a door.
When setting the switch to position C with
the vehicle off, the courtesy lamp turns on.
Reading lamps
Type One
E162681
Push the lever up or down to use the

direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
E112208
53
Lighting
Type Two AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)

Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
The ambient lighting controls are in the
SYNC Settings menu.
E226564
E273192
Switching Ambient Lighting On Adjusting the Intensity

Drag the colors up or down to increase or
Touch a color once.
decrease the intensity.
Changing the Color
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Touch any color once to change the
lighting to that color. Touch the active color once or drag the
active color all the way down to zero
intensity.
54
Lighting
CARGO LAMPS (If Equipped)

Note: The cargo lamps turn off after a
period of time.
The cargo lamp is above the load
compartment.
You can only switch on the cargo lamps
when:
• The vehicle is in park (P) and you apply
the parking brake (manual
transmission).
• The driver or passenger door is open.
• Your vehicle is off.
E224576
Press the button on the instrument panel

to switch on the cargo lamps. You cannot
switch off the cargo lamps by pressing the
button again.
55
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS Driver’s Door Switches (Double

Cab)
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may B
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings. A
If the vehicle is to be left
unsupervised, the vehicle key should
be taken to ensure that the windows
are not operated inadvertently.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
Note: If you operate the switches often E131466
during a short period of time the system

might become inoperable for a certain time A Press the switch to open the
to prevent damage due to overheating. window.
Note: If you operate both the switch on the B Lift the switch to close the
relevant door and the switch for that window.
window on the driver’s door at the same
time, the window will stop moving.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows are open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
56
Windows and Mirrors
Driver’s Door Switches (Single and Front and Rear Passengers’ Door
Stretch Cab) Switches
B
B
A
A
E131467
A Press the switch to open the

window.
B Lift the switch to close the
window.
Opening and Closing the Driver

E131469
Side Window Automatically
Press or lift the switch to the second action
A Press the switch to open the point and release it.
window. Press again or lift it to stop the window.
B Lift the switch to close the
window. Opening and Closing Other
Windows Automatically (If Equipped)
Press or lift the switch to the second action
point and release it.
Press again or lift it to stop the window.
Safety Switch for the Rear

Windows
Note: Once the safety switch is pressed,
you can still operate the rear windows and
front passenger window from the driver’s
door if global opening and closing is fitted.
57
Windows and Mirrors
Note: In vehicles without global opening 5. If the window does not open or close
and closing, the rear windows cannot be automatically when the switch is
operated from driver side when the safety pressed or lifted to second action
switch is pressed. In certain vehicles front points, repeat the procedure.
passenger windows cannot be operated as
well. Safety Mode
WARNING
The anti-trap function is not active
during this procedure.
If the system detects a malfunction, it

enters a safety mode. The windows will
move a little at a time and then stop again.
E131468 Close the windows by pressing the switch
again when the windows stop moving.
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear Contact an authorized dealer.
window controls.
Bounce-Back
Resetting the Memory of the
Electric Windows - Vehicle with The window will automatically stop and
One Touch Up/Down on Driver reverse some distance if it detects an
Side only obstacle while closing.
WARNING Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

The bounce back feature remains WARNING
turned off until you reset the
memory. When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
In the event of a flat battery or after the when closing the windows to avoid
battery has been disconnected from the personal injury.
vehicle, you must reset the memory for
driver window.
Proceed as follows to override this
1. Open the window and then try to close protection feature when there is a
using the one-touch feature. resistance, for example in winter:
2. Lift and hold the switch to second 1. Close the window twice until it reaches
action point until the window is fully the point of resistance and let it
closed. reverse.
3. Hold the switch lifted for more than 2. Close the window a third time to the
two seconds and release. point of resistance. The Bouce-back
4. Open the window using the first action feature is now disabled and you can
point and try to close it automatically close the window manually. The
using second action point. window will go past the point of
resistance and you can close it fully.
58
Windows and Mirrors
See an authorized dealer as soon as

possible if the window does not close after
the third attempt.
Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING
The bounce-back feature remains
turned off until you reset the
memory.
If you have disconnected the battery, you

must reset the bounce-back memory B
separately for each window. A C
1. Lift and hold the switch until the E131480
window is fully closed.
2. Release the switch. A Left-hand side.
3. Lift the switch again for one second. B Off.
4. Press and hold the switch until the C Right-hand side.
window is fully open.
5. Release the switch.
6. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
7. Open the window and then try to close
it automatically.
8. Reset and repeat the procedure if the
window does not close automatically.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
E131481
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death. Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror
in its support when returning it to its
original position.
59
Windows and Mirrors
Power-Folding Mirrors INTERIOR MIRROR

The power folding mirrors operate with the
ignition on. Manual Dimming Mirror
Note: The mirrors no longer operate if you WARNING
switch the ignition off. Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
serious personal injury or death.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you

to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
E131482
serious personal injury or death.
Press the button to fold the mirrors inward. The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
Release the button to stop and reverse the bright light from behind. It returns to
direction of movement, or to fold the normal when the bright light from behind
mirrors outward. is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
The heated exterior mirrors will remove
ice, mist and fog. See Heated Rear Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
Window (page 100). center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror

housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
60
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side

window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
61
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
M0 and M1 Cluster
E266348
A Tachometer. D Fuel gauge.

B Multi-function display. E Engine coolant temperature
gauge.
C Speedometer.
62
Instrument Cluster
M2 Cluster
E266346
A Multi-function display. Outside Air Temperature
B Speedometer. Shows the outside air temperature.

C Engine coolant temperature Compass
gauge and or fuel gauge.
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
Note: In the design and manufacture of
Trip Computer
instrumentation, Ford complies with the
government regulations that the indicate See General Information (page 70).
the value of the speedometer is not less
than the actual speed. In normal operation, Vehicle Settings and Personalization
customers may observe by other
instruments (such as a GPS Unit) that the See General Information (page 70).
indicated speed is slightly faster than the Engine Coolant Temperature
actual vehicle speed. This is normal and
Gauge
does not represent an instrument
malfunction. WARNING
Information Display Do not remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the cooling system is hot.
Odometer Wait 10 minutes for the cooling
system to cool down. Cover the coolant
Registers the accumulated distance your
reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent
vehicle has traveled.
the possibility of scalding and slowly
remove the cap. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
63
Instrument Cluster
At normal operating temperature, the Note: Depending on your vehicle

needle remains in the center section. If the specification, some warning lamps and
needle enters the red section, the engine indicators may not be active.
is overheating. Stop the engine, switch the
ignition off and determine the cause once Adaptive Cruise Control Lamp (If
the engine has cooled down. Equipped)
Note: Do not restart the engine until the The speed control system
cause of overheating has been determined indicator light changes color to
and resolved. E144524
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 156).
Fuel Gauge
On (white light): Illuminates when the
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly adaptive cruise control system is turned
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope. on. Turns off when the speed control
The fuel gauge indicates about how much system is turned off.
fuel is in the fuel tank. Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump the adaptive cruise control system is
symbol indicates on which side of your engaged. Turns off when the speed control
vehicle the fuel filler door is located. system is disengaged.
Low Fuel Reminder Anti-Lock Braking System Warning

A warning tone sounds and a message Lamp
appears in the information display when If it illuminates when you are
the distance to empty reaches 80 km. driving, this indicates a
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at malfunction. You will continue
different fuel gauge positions depending on to have the normal braking system
fuel economy conditions. This variation is (without anti-lock braking system) unless
normal. the brake system warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS Automatic High Beam Lamp (If
Equipped)
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition Illuminates when this feature is
that may become serious. Some lamps on. See Automatic High Beam
illuminate when you start your vehicle to Control (page 50).
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
Auto Start-Stop Lamp (If Equipped)
information. Illuminates to inform you when
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the engine shuts down or in
the information display and operate the conjunction with a message.
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
64
Instrument Cluster
Battery Warning Lamp Direction Indicator

If it illuminates when driving, this Illuminates when the left or right
indicates a malfunction. Switch direction indicator or the hazard
off all unnecessary electrical warning flasher is turned on. If
equipment. Have your vehicle checked by the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
an authorized dealer immediately. for a burnt out bulb. See Changing a
Bulb (page 228).
Blind Spot Monitor Indicator (If
Equipped) Door Ajar Indicator
Illuminates when you switch this Illuminates when the ignition is
feature off or in conjunction with on and any door is not
E124823
a message. completely closed.
Brake System Warning Lamp Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Lamp
Illuminates when you engage the
parking brake with the ignition Illuminates when the engine or
on. motor coolant temperature is
high. Stop your vehicle as soon
If it illuminates when you are driving, check as possible and contact your authorized
that the parking brake is not engaged. If dealer.
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have your vehicle Engine Oil Warning Lamp
checked by an authorized dealer
WARNING
immediately.
If it illuminates when you are driving
WARNING do not continue your journey, even if
Driving your vehicle with the warning the oil level is correct. Have your
lamp on is dangerous. A significant vehicle checked.
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It may take you longer to stop If it illuminates with the engine
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as running or when you are driving,
soon as possible. Driving extended this indicates a malfunction.
distances with the parking brake engaged Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
can cause brake failure and the risk of do so and switch the engine off. Check the
personal injury. engine oil level.
Cruise Control Indicator Electronic Locking Differential (If

Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch this
feature on. See Using Cruise Illuminates when using the
E71340 Control (page 156). electronic locking differential.
E163170
65
Instrument Cluster
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp Glow Plug Indicator

Illuminates and a tone sounds With the key in the on position,
to remind you to fasten your illuminates when the glow plug
E71880 seatbelt. See Seatbelt heat is necessary as a starting
Reminder (page 24). aid. Wait until the light goes off before
starting.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If After you start the engine, the light should
Equipped) turn off. When the engine is cold, the light
should always illuminate for a short period.
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged. High Beam Indicator
E181780
Illuminates when you switch the

Illuminates when four-wheel
high beam headlamps on. It
drive high is engaged.
E181779
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Front Airbag Warning Lamp
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
If the warning lamp does not
illuminate during start up, Illuminates when hill descent
E67017 remains on or flashes, the control is switched on.
system may be disabled. E163171
Have your vehicle checked by an Hood Ajar Warning Lamp

authorized dealer.
Illuminates when the ignition is
Front Fog Lamps Indicator (If Equipped) on and the hood is not
E159324
completely closed.
Illuminates when you switch the
front fog lamps on. Lane Keeping Aid Indicator (If
Equipped)
Frost Warning Lamp (If Equipped) Illuminates when you activate

the lane keeping system.
WARNING E144813
Even if the temperature rises to

above 4°C there is no guarantee that Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
the road is free of hazards caused by If it illuminates when you are
inclement weather. driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
Illuminates when the outside air
temperature is 4°C or below.
66
Instrument Cluster
Low Tire Pressure Warning (If Equipped) Fasten Rear Seatbelt Warning
Lamp
Illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp Illuminates and a tone sounds
remains on with the engine to signal the rear seatbelts are
running or when driving, check your tire E206718
not buckled.
pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when Service Engine Soon
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
If it illuminates when the engine
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
is running this indicates a
when you switch the ignition on, or begins
malfunction. The On Board
to flash at any time, have the system
Diagnostics system has detected a
checked by an authorized dealer.
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
Low Washer Fluid
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
It illuminates when the occurring. Increased exhaust gas
windshield washer fluid is low. temperatures could damage the catalytic
E132353
converter or other vehicle components.
Over Speed Warning (If Equipped) Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have
It illuminates if the vehicle your vehicle immediately serviced.
exceeds 120km/h. It illuminates when you switch the ignition
E165368 on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
Parking Lamps Indicator ready for Inspection and Maintenance
It illuminates when you switch (I/M) testing.
the parking lamps on. Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
Powertrain Fault 15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
It illuminates when a powertrain indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
or a four-wheel drive fault has Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
been detected. Contact an
Shift Indicator (If Equipped)
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Illuminates to inform you that
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator (If Equipped) shifting to a higher gear as
indicated may give better fuel
It illuminates when you switch economy and lower CO2
E67040 the rear fog lamps on. emissions. It does not illuminate during
periods of high acceleration, braking or
when the clutch pedal is pressed.
67
Instrument Cluster
Speed Limiter AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

Illuminates when you switch on INDICATORS
the speed limiter system. See
E172886 Speed Limiter (page 163). Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
Stability Control Warning Lamp audible warnings and indicators will display
or be available.
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated Key in Ignition
E138639 or does not illuminate when you Sounds when the driver's door is open and
switch the ignition on, this indicates a the key is in the ignition.
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have your vehicle Headlamps On
immediately. See Using Stability Sounds when you remove the key from the
Control (page 142). ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
Stability Control Off Indicator on.
Illuminates when you switch the Parking Brake On

system off. It goes out when you
Sounds when the parking brake is on and
E130458 switch the system back on or
your vehicle is moving. If the warning
when you switch the ignition off. See
chime remains on after you have released
Using Stability Control (page 142).
the parking brake, have the system
Traffic Sign Recognition Road immediately.
Condition Indicator (If Equipped)
Door Ajar
Illuminates when the road
condition is prohibiting traffic Sounds when the driver's door is ajar, or
E181349 sign recognition. when any door is ajar while the vehicle is
traveling over 5 km/h.
Traffic Sign Recognition Speed Seatbelt Reminder
Limit Indicator (If Equipped)
Sounds when a seatbelt is unfastened in
Illuminates when you have an occupied seat and your vehicle is
exceeded the speed limit for moving.
E181348 traffic sign recognition.
Lane Departure Warning (If Equipped)
Water-In-Fuel Warning Lamp
Activates when the system detects
Illuminates when there is excess unintentional drifting toward the outside
water in the fuel filter. Drain off of the lane and alerts or aids you to stay in
the water immediately. See the lane through the steering system and
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap instrument cluster display.
(page 223).
68
Instrument Cluster
Front and Rear Park Aid (If Equipped)

Sounds to alert driver of objects
approaching the front and rear of the
vehicle while moving forward or reversing.
69
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION Information Display

M0 Cluster
WARNING
You can control various systems on your

vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
E266430
The information display shows the
corresponding information.
Menu
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: It may describe options not fitted to
the vehicle you have purchased.
Trip 1 and 2
Digital Speedometer
Distance to Empty
Trip odometer
Trip Timer
Average Fuel
Note: Press and hold OK on the current

screen to reset the respective trip, distance,
time and fuel information.
70
Fuel economy
Distance to E
Instantaneous Fuel
Average Fuel
Fuel History
Average Speed
Auto StartStop
Note: You can reset your average fuel

economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Prog Range Sel
AdBlue Status
AdBlue Range
Diesel Particulate Filter
Traction Control
Hill Start
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Sway
Tire Monitor
Tire Press.
Settings
Alarm All Sensors
Perim. Sens.
Vehicle
Ask on exit
A. Engine Off
71
Settings
Chimes Information
Lighting Auto Beam
A/lamp Dlay
DRL
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Mislock
Switches Inh.
Unlocking
Oil Life Hold OK to reset oil life.
Reset
Seatbelts
Silent Mode
Windows Remote Open
Rmt Close
Wipers Crtesy wipe
Rain Sensing
Rev. Wiper
Distance Miles & Gallons
Unit
L/100km
km/L
Temper- Fahrenh. (°F)
ature
Display Celsius (°C)
Tire Pres- psi
sure
kPa
bar
Language Choose your applicable setting
72
Settings
Admin "Num" MyKeys
Keys
"Odo" MyKey km
"Num" Admin Keys
MyKey Dist
Odo Units
MyKey
Create -
Emergency Assist
Do Not Disturb
Traction Always On
Ctrl
Selectable
Max Speed selectable based on Region
Speed
Off
Speed Speed selectable based on Region
Minder
Off
Volume Set
Limit
Clear All Clear
73
Information Display Menu

M1 Cluster You can access the menu using the
E266431
Trip 1 and 2
Digital Speedometer
Distance to Empty
Trip odometer
Trip Timer
Average Fuel
All values

Fuel economy
Distance to E
Instantaneous Fuel
Average Fuel
74
Fuel economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
All values
Auto StartStop

Vehicle Information
Off Road
Driver Assist
AdBlue Status
AdBlue Range
Blindspot
Cross Traffic Alert
Cruise Control Adaptive
Normal
Diesel Particulate Filter
Driver Alert Driver Alert
Display
Hill Start
Lane Keeping System Mode
Intensity
Pre-collision Alert Sensitivity
Distance Indication
Active Braking
On/Off
75
Driver Assist
Rear Park Aid
Speed Limiter Settings
Traffic Signs Display
Always Shown
Speed Warning
Tire Monitor Reset
Tire Pressure Tire Pressures
Trailer Sway
Settings
Alarm All Sensors
Perim. Sens.
Ask on exit
Vehicle
A. Engine Off
Chimes Park Slot
Information
DTE Normal
Calcula-
tion
76
Information Display Menu

M2 Cluster You can access the menu using the
E266427
Display Mode
Distance to Empty
Tachometer
Tachometer + Temperature Gauge
Off Road
Digital Speedometer
Tire Pressure
Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the
steering wheel controls.
Trip 1 & 2
All values
All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel).
Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the
steering wheel controls.
77
Fuel Economy
Instant fuel
Fuel History
Average Speed
Auto Start Stop
• Instant Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
• Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
• Average Speed - shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset.
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
AdBlue® Status
Blindspot
Chimes Park Slot Found
Information
Cross Traffic Alert
Cruise Control Choose your applicable setting.
Driver Alert Driver Alert
Display
Exhaust Filter Status Hold OK to clean.
Hill Start Assist
Lane Keeping Sys Mode Choose your applicable
setting.
Intensity Choose your applicable
setting.
Pre-Collision On
Alert Sensitivity Choose your applicable
setting.
Dist. Indication
78
Driver Assist
Active Braking
Rear Park Aid
Tire Monitor Hold OK to Reset
Trailer Sway
Speed Limiter
Traffic Signs Display
Speed Warning
Settings
Alarm All Sensors
Perim. Sens.
Vehicle Ask on exit
A. Engine Off
Park Lock Control
DTE Normal
Calcula-
tion Towing
Lighting Auto Beam

Daytime Lights Off
A/lamp Dlay XX Seconds
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Mislock
Switches Inh.
Remote Unlock
Mainten- Set Initial Date
ance
Confirm Service with Submenu
79
Settings
Power Autofold
Mirror
Oil Life Reset Oil Life
Reset
Seatbelts
Silent Mode
Windows Remote Open
Rmt Close
Wipers Crtesy wipe
Rain Sensing
Rev. Wiper
MyKey MyKey "Num" MyKeys
Info
"Odo" MyKey km
"Num" Admin Keys
Create Hold OK to create MyKey.
MyKey
Emergency Assist
Do Not Disturb
Traction Always On
Ctrl
Selectable
Max Speed selectable based on Region
Speed
Off
Speed Speed selectable based on Region
Minder
Off
Volume Set
Limit
Clear All Hold OK to clear all MyKeys.
Distance Miles & Gallons
Display
Unit
80
Settings
L/100km
km/L
Temper- Fahrenh. (°F)
ature
Celsius (°C)
Tire Pres- psi
sure
kPa
bar
Language Choose your applicable setting
Average Speed
TRIP COMPUTER Indicates the average speed since the
function was last reset.
Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your Outside Air Temperature
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in Shows the outside air temperature.
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary. Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption Records the total distance traveled by your
vehicle.
Indicates the current average fuel
consumption. Resetting the trip computer
Average Fuel Consumption To reset a particular display:
Indicates the average fuel consumption 1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up
since the function was last reset. and down arrow buttons and press the
right arrow button.
Trip Odometer 2. Highlight the function to be reset.
Records the distance travelled on 3. Hold the OK button pressed.
individual journeys.
Digital Speedometer
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
The speed your vehicle is traveling at will Languages
display as a digital number.
A selection of languages are available
using the menus in the setting menu.
81
Measure units • Fuel warnings given at higher distance

to empty values.
To toggle between either metric or imperial
units, scroll to this display and press the • Prevention of turning off some driver
OK button. assist systems:
• Traction control
Toggling the units of measure using this
display affects the following displays: • Park aid
• Distance to empty. • Collision Warning System -
additionally uses maximum
• Average fuel consumption. sensitivity as default
• Instantaneous fuel consumption. • Emergency assist
• Average speed. • Do not disturb
• Digital speedometer. • Mileage logged by MyKeys.
Temperature units
To toggle between metric and imperial
INFORMATION MESSAGES
units, scroll to this display and press the
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
OK button.
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
Toggling the temperature units using this messages will display or be available.
display affects the following displays: Certain messages may be abbreviated or
• Outside air temperature. shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
• The temperature display in the
automatic climate control.
Tone deactivation
The following tones can be switched off:
• Warning messages.
• Information messages.
MyKey (If Equipped)

MyKey is a feature which allows customers
to assign keys which enables extra safety
features designed for use by young drivers. E201420
Features can be adjusted and customized
to suit the level of driver. Features include: Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
• Muted audio when seatbelts are information display. Other messages will
unbuckled. be removed automatically after a short
• Vehicle speed limited. time.
• Speed minder. Certain messages need to be confirmed
• Volume limiter on audio system. before you can access the menus.
82
Active Park
Message Action
Active Park Fault Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC

Malfunction from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
157).
Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise
Available cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 157).
Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar
Available Sensor visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of
Blocked See Manual radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 157).
Normal Cruise Active Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.
Automatic Braking
Turned Off
Front Sensor Not Aligned Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls
Resume Control to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Shift Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting
Down the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the transmission
into a lower gear.
83
Airbag
Message Action
Occupant Sensor Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

BLOCKED Remove blocked sensor.
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm
Message Action
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
Alarm, Start Vehicle. ized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 41).
Auto-Start-Stop
Message Action
Auto StartStop Manual Displayed when Auto-Start-Stop system is not functioning

Restart Required and requires the user to manually restart.
Auto StartStop Press Displayed when the clutch needs to be pressed to restart the
Clutch to Start Engine engine.
Auto StartStop Press a Displayed when a pedal needs to be pressed to restart the
Pedal to Start Engine engine.
Auto StartStop Select Displayed when neutral needs to be selected to restart engine.
Neutral To Start Engine
Vehicle is ON Displayed when the vehicle is in Auto-Start-Stop mode and
the door is opened. Switch the ignition off before leaving the
vehicle if the system has shut down the engine.
Auto StartStop Malfunc- The system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on
tion Service Required or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See
Auto-Start-Stop (page 116).
Auto StartStop Press The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harder
Brake Harder to Activate to start.
Auto StartStop Not Displays when conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop
Available system to function properly. See Auto-Start-Stop (page
116).
84
Message Action
Auto StartStop Shift to Select park for the system to restart the engine.
P, then Restart Engine
Auto StartStop Press The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal to
Brake to Start Engine start.
Auto StartStop Deactiv- Displays the system status
ated by Switch
Auto StartStop Activ- Displays the system status
ated by Switch
Battery and Charging System
Message Action
Check Charging System Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
Low Battery Features Displayed when the battery management system detects an
Temporarily Turned Off extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will
be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system
voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal
Turn Power Off To Save Displayed when the battery management system determines
Battery that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition
off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message
will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary elec-
trical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
85
Doors and Locks
Message Action
Door Ajar Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and
the vehicle is moving.
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Hood Ajar Displays when the hood is not completely closed.
Switches Inhibited Displays when the door switches have been disabled.
Security Mode
Child Lock Malfunction Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child
Service Required locks. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driver Alert
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Take a rest break soon.
Suggested
Four-Wheel Drive
Message Action
4x4 Temporarily Displayed when the 4x4 system has been temporarily disabled
Disabled to protect itself from overheating.
4x4 OFF Displayed when the 4x4 system has been automatically
disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system
is overheating.
4x4 Restored The 4x4 system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
4WD Malfunction Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmis-
Service Required sion/4x4 light when the 4x4 system is not operating properly.
If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
86
Fuel
Message Action
Fuel Level Low Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Hill Start Assist
Message Action
Hill Start Assist Not Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your
Available authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 137).
Hill Descent Control
Message Action
For Hill Descent Reduce Displayed when vehicle speed is too high for HDC to engage.
Speed 20MPH or Less Reduce speed to below that indicated in the message to
engage HDC.
For Hill Descent Reduce
Speed 32 Km/h or Less
Hill Descent Control Off Displayed when HDC cannot be engaged due to excessive
System Cooling heat. Allow system to cool before re-engaging.
Hill Descent Control Displayed when there is a fault with the HDC system. See your
Fault authorized dealer.
For Hill Descent Select Displayed when HDC cannot be engaged due to vehicle not
Gear being in gear. Select gear to engage HDC.
87
Keys and Starting
Message Action
To START Press Brake Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the
vehicle.
Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your
vehicle’s starting system. See your authorized dealer for
service.
To START Press Brake Displayed as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while
and Clutch starting the vehicle.
To START Press Clutch Displayed as a reminder to press the clutch in while starting
the vehicle.
Key Program Successful Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key is programmed to the system.
Key Program Failure Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key has failed to be programmed.
Max Number of Keys Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum
Learned number of keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys Displayed during spare key programming when not enough
Learned keys have been programmed.
Key Battery Low Replace Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as
Soon soon as possible.
Could Not Program Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key
Integrated Key using two existing keys.
Engine ON Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle
and the engine is on.
88
Lane Keeping System
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
Malfunction Service dealer as soon as possible.
Required
Front Camera Tempor- The system has detected a condition that has caused the
arily Not Available system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-
ility Clean Screen shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
tion Service Required dealer as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their
Wheel hands on the steering wheel.
Maintenance
Message Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine.
Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on with your engine running, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil Soon Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
See Engine Oil Check (page 221).
Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil
Check (page 221).
Brake Fluid Level Low Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system
should be inspected immediately. See Brake and Clutch
Fluid Check (page 223).
Check Brake System Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Over Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop the
Temperature vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact your authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 222).
Power Reduced to Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help
Lower Engine Temp reduce high coolant temperatures.
89
Message Action
Transport Mode Contact Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport mode.
Dealer This may not allow some features to operate properly. See
your authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Factory mode.
Dealer This may not allow some features to operate properly. See
See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
Parking Aid
Message Action
Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Front
Parking Aid (page 147).
Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 146).
Front Park Aid On Off Displays the parking aid status.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the parking aid status.
Parking Brake
Message Action
Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running
and the vehicle is driven more than 5 km/h. If the warning
stays on after the parking brake is released, contact your
authorized dealer.
90
Power Steering
Message Action
Steering Lock Fault The power steering system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle
Safely a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault The power steering system has detected a condition within
Service Required the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Powertrain
Message Action
Check Locking Differen- Displayed when there is a malfunction with the electronic
tial locking differential that requires service. See your authorized
dealer.
Fuel Pressure Low Displayed when there is a loss in fuel system pressure. See
Stop Safely Now Displayed when there is a powertrain fault and vehicle has
entered limp home mode. See your authorized dealer.
Starting System
Message Action
To START Press Brake Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
To START Press Brake Displays as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while
and Clutch starting the vehicle.
Engine Start Pending Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.
Please Wait
Pending Start Cancelled Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.
Cranking Time Exceeded Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
attempting to start the vehicle.
91
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire
pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 244).
Tire Pressure Monitor Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
Fault malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 244).
Tire Pressure Sensor Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or
Fault your spare tire is in use. For more information on how the
system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 244). If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Traction Control
Message Action
Traction Control Off Displays when the traction control system has been switched
off. See Traction Control (page 140).
Traction Control On Displays when the traction control system has been switched
on. See Traction Control (page 140).
Spinout Detected Displays when a Spin out has occurred and the hazards are
Hazards Activated activated.
92
Transmission
Message Action
Transmission Malfunc- See your authorized dealer.

tion Service Now
Transmission Service See your authorized dealer.
Required
Transmission Limited Displays when the transmission has overheated and has
Function See Manual limited functionality. See Automatic Transmission (page
125).
Transmission Not in Park Displays as a reminder to shift into park.
Press Brake Pedal Displays as a reminder to press the brake pedal in order to
select a gear.
Trailer
Message Action
Trailer Brake Module Displayed when there is a fault with the Trailer module. See
Fault your authorized dealer.
Stop Safely Now Displayed when there is a powertrain fault and vehicle has
entered limp home mode. See your authorized dealer.
Trailer Lighting Module Displayed when there is a fault with the Trailer module. See
Fault See Manual your authorized dealer.
Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Displayed when there is a fault with the stop lamps on the
Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Park Lamps Fault Displayed when there is a fault with the park lamps on the
Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Displayed when there is a fault with the left lamps on the
Fault Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Displayed when there is a fault with the right lamps on the
Fault Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
93
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
C D E F
B H
A I
E205820
Recirculated Air
A Recirculated air.
B A/C. Press the button to switch between
outside air and recirculated air. The air
C Fan speed control. currently in the passenger compartment
D Power. recirculates. This can reduce the time
needed to cool the interior and reduce
E Air distribution control. unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
F Temperature control. Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or
G MAX defrost. prevent you from switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
H MAX A/C. of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
I Heated rear window. and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather in order
to improve cooling efficiency.
94
Climate Control
A/C Temperature Control

Press the button to switch the air Adjusts the temperature of the air
conditioning on or off. Use air conditioning circulated in your vehicle.
with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency. MAX Defrost
Note: In certain conditions (for example, Turn to the right to switch on defrost. Air
maximum defrost), the air conditioning flows through the windshield vents and
compressor may continue to operate even the fan adjusts to the highest speed. You
though you switch off the air conditioning. can also use this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The
Fan Speed Control heated rear window also turns on when
you select maximum defrost.
Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle. Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
Power maximum defrost is on.
Press to switch the system on and off. MAX A/C
When the system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle. Turn to the left for maximum cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the
Air Distribution Control instrument panel vents, air conditioning
turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest
Press to switch air flow from the speed.
windshield, instrument panel or footwell
vents on or off. You can distribute air Heated Rear Window
through any combination of these vents.
Press to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Rear Window (page
100).
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
95
Climate Control
A B C
L D
K E
F J I H G F
E200620
Left-hand Temperature Control

A Left-hand temperature control.
B Fan speed control. Adjusts the temperature setting on the
left-hand side.
C Right-hand temperature control.
D Max A/C or heated windshield. Fan Speed Control
E Recirculated air. Adjust the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
F Heated seats.
G A/C. Right-hand Temperature Control
H Power. Adjusts the temperature setting on the
I Auto. right-hand side. This control also adjusts
the left-hand side temperature when you
J Heated rear window. switch off dual zone mode.
K Defrost.
L Max defrost.
96
Climate Control
Max A/C (If Equipped) Auto

Press for maximum cooling. The right-hand Press to switch on automatic operation,
and left-hand settings set to LO, then adjust the temperature control to
recirculated air flows through the select the desired temperature. The
instrument panel vents, air conditioning system adjusts fan speed, air distribution,
turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest air conditioning operation, and outside or
speed. recirculated air adjust to heat or cool the
vehicle to maintain the desired
Heated Windshield (If Equipped) temperature. You can also switch off dual
zone mode by pressing and holding the
Press the button to clear the windshield of button for more than two seconds.
thin ice and fog. The heated windshield
turns off after a short period of time. Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure that the engine is running Press to switch the heated rear window on
before switching the heated windshield on. and off. See Heated Rear Window (page
Note: The system does not operate if the 100).
battery charge level is low.
Defrost
Recirculated Air
Press to distribute air through the
Press to switch between outside air and windshield air vents and de-mister. Air
recirculated air. The air currently in the distribution to the instrument panel and
passenger compartment recirculates. This footwell vents turns off. You can also use
may reduce the time needed to cool the this setting to defog and clear the
interior (when used with A/C) and reduce windshield of a thin covering of ice.
unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Max Defrost
Heated Seats
Press to switch on defrost. The left-hand
Press to cycle through the various heat and right-hand settings set to HI, air flows
settings and on and off. through the windshield vents, and the fan
adjusts to the highest speed. You can also
A/C use this setting to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice. The
Press to switch the air conditioning on or heated rear window also turns on when
off. Use A/C with recirculated air to you select maximum defrost.
improve cooling performance and
efficiency. Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost is on.
maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Power
Press to switch the system on and off.
When the system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
97
Climate Control
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE Manual Climate Control

INTERIOR CLIMATE Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
General Hints distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up. Automatic Climate Control
Note: You may feel a small amount of air Note: Adjusting the settings when your
from the footwell air vents regardless of the vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
air distribution setting. not necessary. The system automatically
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
your vehicle, do not drive with the system selected temperature as quickly as possible.
switched off or with recirculated air always For the system to function efficiently, the
switched on. instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow Note: If you select AUTO during cold
to the rear seats. temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
the air intake area at the base of the until the engine warms up.
windshield.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
Note: To improve the time to reach a temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
comfortable temperature in hot weather, is hot, the system automatically uses
drive with the windows open until you feel recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
cold air through the air vents. Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control Automatic climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest Press AUTO.

setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting. desired setting.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
98
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press AUTO.

setting.
midway point of the hot settings. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
point, then adjust the setting as neces-
sary.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1 Select MAX A/C. Select MAX A/C.

2 Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press AUTO.

setting.
midway point of the cold settings. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
sary.
3 Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.
99
Climate Control
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
1 Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button.
2 Press A/C. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
sary.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or

glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
HEATED REAR WINDOW (If petroleum-based cleaning products.
Equipped)
CABIN AIR FILTER (If Equipped)

Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
E184884 Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
heated rear window turns off
filter, which gives you and your passengers
after a short period of time.
the following benefits:
Note: Make sure the engine is on before • It improves your driving comfort by
operating the heated windows. reducing particle and odor
Note: Do not use razor blades or other concentration.
sharp objects to clean or remove decals • It improves the interior compartment
from the inside of the heated rear window. cleanliness.
The vehicle Warranty may not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window • It protects the climate control
grid lines. components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
(If Equipped)
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
When you switch the heated rear window the system without a filter in place could
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. result in degradation or damage to the
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors system.
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass Replace the filter at regular intervals.
when it is frozen in place.
100
Climate Control
For additional cabin air filter information,

or to replace the filter, see a qualified
technician.
101
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT • Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of your
POSITION head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
WARNINGS comfortable.
Do not recline the seatback too far • Keep sufficient distance between
as this can cause the occupant to yourself and the steering wheel. We
slide under the seatbelt, resulting in recommend a minimum of 25 cm
serious injury in the event of a collision. between your breastbone and the
Always sit upright against your airbag cover.
seatback with your feet on the floor. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
Do not place objects higher than the
top of the seat backrest. Failure to • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
follow this instruction could result in press the pedals fully.
personal injury or death in the event of a • Position the shoulder strap of the
sudden stop or crash. seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
E68595
moving.
When you use them properly, the seat, Raise the rear head restraints when
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will passengers occupy the rear seats.
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash. Do not remove the head restraint
from an occupied seat.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest more
than 30°.
102
Seats
Front Head Restraints MANUAL SEATS

WARNINGS
Use accessory seat covers designed
for seats with side airbags. Have
these fitted by an authorized dealer.
Do not adjust the driver seat when
Note: The seat covers fitted to your vehicle

2 as part of a special equipment pack are
washable without removing them from the
1 seats.
Note: The seat covers are designed to work
E140447
with the seat's existing features and safety
systems, and should not require adjustment.
To raise, pull the head restraint up to the If seat cover removal and installation is
desired position. To lower, press the required, see an authorized dealer.
locking button 1 and lower the head
restraint to the desired position. Make sure Moving the Seat Backward and
that the head restraint engages properly Forward
when in position.
WARNING
Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head for Make sure the seat fully locks into
optimum support in a crash. place by rocking it backward and
forward.
Removing the Head Restraints
Press locking button 1 and release the
retaining clip 2 using a suitable implement.
Rear Head Restraints (Double Cab)
E212698
To raise, pull the head restraint up to the

fullest extent. Press the locking button 1 to
lower the head restraint. Press the locking
button 2 to remove the head restraint.
103
Seats
Adjusting the Height of the Driver

Seat
E131590
Note: Do not move the front seats too close

to the instrument panel. E131593
Adjusting the Lumbar Support Recline Adjustment
E131592
E131595
104
Seats
Folding the Seat Backrest - Super POWER SEATS (If Equipped)

Cab
Fold the front passenger seat to allow easy WARNINGS
access to the rear seat. Use accessory seat covers designed
for seats with side airbags. Have
these fitted by an authorized dealer.
Do not adjust the driver seat when
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as

part of a special equipment pack are
seats.
Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted
to work with the seat's existing features and
safety systems, and should not require
adjustment. If seat cover removal and
installation is required, see an authorized
E136219
dealer.
Bench Seat Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward
E135862
E131591
105
Seats
Note: Do not move the front seats too close Tilting the Seat
to the instrument panel.

Seat
E131607
REAR SEATS (If Equipped)

E131594
Note: The seat covers fitted to your vehicle

Recline Adjustment as part of a special equipment pack are
seats.
Note: The seat covers are designed to work
with the seat's existing features and safety
systems, and should not require adjustment.
If seat cover removal and installation is
required, see an authorized dealer.
E131596
106
Seats
Folding the Seat Cushion

Super Cab
2
E247641
1. Place the passenger side seat buckles

1 behind the elastic strap on the seat
backrest.
2. Place the driver side seat buckle behind
E131743 the elastic strap on the seat backrest.
3. Pull the tether strap.
Folding the Seat Cushion 4. Raise the seat cushion.
Double Cab 5. Use the strap to tether the cushion to
the seat backrest.
Unfolding the Seat Cushion

Double Cab
WARNING
Make sure that the seats and the
seat backrests are secure and fully
locked in their catches.
E247999
E247640
107
Seats
1. Push the seat cushion down. 2. Push the seat backrest forward.
2. Remove the seatbelt buckles from
behind the elastic strap on the seat
Unfolding the Seat Backrest
backrest. Double cab
Note: You must stow the cushion tether
strap in the pocket provided. WARNING
Make sure that the seats and the
Folding the Seat Backrest seat backrests are secure and fully
locked in their catches.
Double Cab
WARNING Note: When folding the seat backrest up,
When folding the seat backrest make sure that the seatbelts are visible to
down, take care not to get your an occupant and not caught behind the
fingers caught in the mechanism. seat.
Note: When folding the cushion up, make REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
sure that the seatbelt buckles are visible to
an occupant and are not under the seat.
Note: Do not use the rear surface of the rear
seat backrest as a load floor.
Note: Do not unlatch and fold the seat
backrest when the seat cushion is folded
up.
E235304
2 Fold the armrest down to use the armrest

and cupholder.
E131744
1. Pull the release strap up.
108
12 Volt DC Power Point Location

WARNING Power points may be in the following
locations:
Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect • On the front of the center console.
use of the power points can cause • Inside the center console.
damage not covered by the vehicle • On the rear of the center console.
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury. • Inside the luggage compartment.
230 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt WARNING
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps. Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
If the power supply does not work after you the device is not in use. Do not use
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition any extension cord with the 230 volt AC
on. power point, since it will defeat the safety
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the protection design. Doing so may cause the
accessory plug. power point to overload due to powering
Note: Do not use the power point over the multiple devices that can reach beyond
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or the 150 watt load limit and could result in
a fuse may blow. fire or serious injury.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use. Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
Do not insert objects other than an voltage drops below 11 volts.
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow You can use the power point for electric
the fuse. devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
E206133
109
When the indicator light on the power point

is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
110
Storage Compartments
GLOVE BOX
The glove box is on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
Open the glove box using the latch handle.
E266391
Available console features include:

A Audio input and or USB port.
B Cup holders
C Cool box (if equipped).
D Coin storage.
E223956 E Auxiliary power point (if
equipped).
Glove Box with Lock (If Equipped) F A/C power point (if equipped).
Lock the glove box using the ignition key.
To lock, close the glove box and insert the OVERHEAD CONSOLE
ignition key into the glove box lock and
rotate it clockwise. Remove the key.
To unlock the glove box, insert the ignition
key into the glove box lock and rotate it
counter clockwise.
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
E266392
Press near the rear edge of the door to

open it.
111
Storage Compartments
COOL BOX (If Equipped)
E132725
A Open.
B Close.
UNDER SEAT STORAGE

Super Cab
2
1
E188672
1. Lift the handle in the direction shown.

2. Slide it in the direction shown to
remove the under seat storage cover.
112
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)

WARNINGS Note: The keyless starting system may not
Extended idling at high engine function if the key is close to metal objects
speeds can produce very high or electronic devices such as cellular
temperatures in the engine and phones.
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or Note: A valid key must be located inside
other damage. your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle start the engine.
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up Ignition Modes
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected E144447
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes. The keyless starting system has three
modes:
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle Off: Turns the ignition off.
may exhibit some unusual driving • Without applying the clutch pedal
characteristics for approximately 8 km (manual transmission) or brake pedal
after you reconnect it. This is because the (automatic transmission), press and
engine management system must realign release the button once when the
itself with the engine. You can disregard ignition is in the on mode, or when the
any unusual driving characteristics during engine is running but the vehicle is not
this period. moving.
The powertrain control system meets all On: All electrical circuits are operational
Canadian interference-causing equipment and the warning lamps and indicators
standard requirements regulating the illuminate.
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
• Without applying the clutch pedal
When you start the engine, avoid pressing (manual transmission) or brake pedal
the accelerator pedal before and during (automatic transmission), press and
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal release the button once.
when you have difficulty starting the
engine. Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
not start when the vehicle starts.
113
• Press the clutch pedal (manual Switching the Ignition On

transmission) or brake pedal
(automatic transmission), and then Turn the key to position II. All electrical
press the button for any length of time. circuits and accessories are operational
An indicator light on the button and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminates when then ignition is on and illuminate.
when the engine starts.
Starting the Engine
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped) Turn the key to position III. Release the
key when the engine starts.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK

WARNING
Always check that the steering wheel
lock is deactivated before
attempting to move your vehicle.
Failure to deactivate the steering wheel
lock could result in a crash.
Your vehicle has an electronically

controlled steering wheel lock that
automatically operates.
The steering wheel will lock shortly after
you have parked your vehicle and the
passive key is outside it or when you lock
your vehicle.
E247596
Note: The steering wheel will not lock when
Note: Make sure the key is clean before the ignition is on or when your vehicle is
inserting it into any lock cylinder. moving.
Note: Do not leave the key in the ignition Unlocking the Steering Wheel
for an extended period of time when the
engine is not running. This is to prevent the
vehicle battery from losing charge.
Switching the Ignition Off

Turn the key to position 0.
Switching the Ignition to

Accessory Mode
Turn the key to position I. Electrical
accessories, for example the radio, operate
without the engine running.
E144447
114
The steering wheel unlocks when the 3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
system detects a valid passive key inside 4. Keep the accelerator pedal fully
your vehicle. If the steering wheel relocks, depressed and press the push button
switch the ignition on to unlock it. ignition switch until the engine starts.
Note: You may have to slightly rotate the
steering wheel to assist unlocking it.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE Vehicles With a Turbocharger
Cold or Hot Engine WARNING

Do not switch the engine off when it
Switch the ignition on and wait
is running at high speed. If you do, the
until the glow plug indicator goes
turbocharger will continue running
off. Fully depress the clutch
after the engine oil pressure has dropped
pedal (manual transmission) or brake
to zero. This will lead to premature
pedal (automatic transmission). Start the
turbocharger bearing wear.
engine.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal (manual the engine has reached idle speed and then
transmission) or brake pedal (automatic switch it off.
transmission) while the engine is starting
will stop the engine cranking and return to
ignition on.
Note: When the temperature is below
-15°C, you may need to crank the engine for
up to 10 seconds.
Note: You can only operate the starter for
a limited period of time.
Note: After a limited number of attempts
to start your engine, the system does not
allow you to try again until a period of time
has elapsed, for example 30 minutes.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, fully depress the brake
pedal. For vehicles with manual
transmission, fully depress the clutch
pedal and apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral.
115
Unique Driving Characteristics
AUTO-START-STOP - Under certain conditions the engine may

restart by itself, for example:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
• You switch the heated windshield on.
WARNING • You switch the maximum defrost on.
Always switch the ignition off and • You turn the steering wheel.
fully apply the parking brake before • Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
carrying out any maintenance or neutral.
leaving your vehicle. Failure to follow this • To maintain adequate brake
instruction could result in personal injury assistance.
or death if the engine restarts.
• To maintain the interior climate or
reduce fogging.
Principle of Operation
Note: The blower motor speed could
The system is designed to help reduce fuel change during an automatic restart.
consumption and CO2 emissions by turning
Note: The system may not function if you
off the engine when idling, for example at leave electrical devices connected with the
traffic lights. ignition off, because they could drain the
Your vehicle has an enhanced starter battery.
motor that is designed for an increased
number of engine start events. Using Auto-Start-Stop
Under certain conditions the engine may WARNING
not stop, for example:
Apply the parking brake and shift into
• You have opened the driver door. park (P) before leaving your vehicle.
• You have unfastened the driver
seatbelt.
Stopping the Engine
• Your vehicle is at high altitude.
1. Release the accelerator pedal.
• You have switched the heated
windshield on. 2. Stop your vehicle in drive (D).
• You have switched tow/haul or manual 3. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal.
mode on. Note: The engine stops if the gearshift is in
• You have selected sport mode. park (P) or neutral (N) regardless of brake
• You have selected 4L or 4H. pedal position.
• Your vehicle is on a steep grade. Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.
• The engine is warming up.
• The outside temperature is too low or Restarting the Engine
too high.
To restart the engine, do any of the
• The battery charge is low or battery following:
temperature is optimal operating
range. • Release the brake pedal.
• To maintain the interior climate or • Press the accelerator pedal.
reduce fogging. • Shift into drive (D), reverse (R), neutral
(N), or manual (M).
116
Switching the System On and Off Your vehicle has an enhanced starter
motor that is designed for increased
The system turns on when you switch the number of engine start events.
ignition on.
Under certain conditions the engine may
To switch the system off, press not stop, for example:
the switch and the word OFF
illuminates. Press again to • You have opened the driver door.
switch the system back on. • You have unfastened the driver
seatbelt.
The auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green when the engine stops. It flashes • Your vehicle is at high altitude.
amber and a message appears when you • You have switched the heated
need to take an action. windshield on.
The auto-start stop indicator • You have selected 4L or 4H.
illuminates grey with a strike out • The engine is warming up.
E146361
when the system is not available. • The outside temperature is too low or
Note: The system turns off when it detects too high.
a malfunction. If it remains inactive after an • The battery charge is low or battery
ignition cycle, have your vehicle checked by temperature is outside optimal
an authorized dealer. operating range.
Replacing the Battery • To maintain the interior climate or
reduce fogging.
Replace the battery with one of exactly Under certain conditions the engine may
the same specification for the system to restart, for example:
function correctly.
• You switch the heated windshield on.
• You switch the maximum defrost on.
AUTO-START-STOP - MANUAL
• You turn the steering wheel.
TRANSMISSION
• Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
neutral.
WARNING
• To maintain adequate brake
Always switch the ignition off and assistance.
fully apply the parking brake before
carrying out any maintenance or • To maintain the interior climate or
leaving your vehicle. Failure to follow this reduce fogging.
instruction could result in personal injury Note: The blower motor speed could
or death if the engine restarts. change during an automatic restart.
Note: The system may not function if you
Principle of Operation leave electrical devices connected with the
ignition off, because they could drain the
The system is designed to help reduce fuel
battery.
consumption and CO2 emissions by turning
off the engine when idling, for example at
traffic lights.
117
Using Auto-Start-Stop Replacing the Battery

Stopping the Engine Replace the battery with one of exactly
the same specification for the system to
1. Stop your vehicle. function correctly.
2. Shift into neutral.
3. Release the clutch and accelerator
pedal.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.
Restarting the Engine

For vehicles with manual transmission,
fully depress the clutch pedal.
Note: To obtain maximum benefit from the
system, shift to neutral (N) and release the
clutch pedal during any stop longer than
three seconds.
Note: Auto-start-stop also provides stall
recovery. To restart the engine after stalling,
fully press the clutch pedal.
Switching the System On and Off

The system turns on when you switch the
ignition on.
To switch the system off, press
the switch and the word OFF
illuminates. Press again to
switch the system back on.
The auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green when the engine stops. It flashes
amber and a message appears when you
need to take an action. See Information
Messages (page 82).
The auto-start stop indicator
illuminates grey with a strike out
E146361
when the system is not available.
Note: The system turns off when it detects
a malfunction. If it remains inactive after an
ignition cycle, have your vehicle checked by
118
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel

vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
WARNINGS
excessive or prolonged breathing of
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
pressure in an overfilled tank may permanent injury.
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire. • Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
The fuel system may be under remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound with water for 15 minutes and seek
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel medical attention. Failure to seek
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may proper medical attention could lead to
spray out, which could cause serious permanent injury.
personal injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
Fuels can cause serious injury or through the skin. If you splash fuel on
death if misused or mishandled. your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
Fuel may contain benzene, which is thoroughly wash your skin with soap
a cancer-causing agent. and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
When refueling always shut the contact causes skin irritation.
engine off and never allow sparks or • Be particularly careful if you are taking
open flames near the fuel tank filler Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone for the treatment of alcoholism.
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid adverse reaction, serious personal
inhaling excess fumes. injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
Follow these guidelines when refueling: reactions.
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your FUEL QUALITY
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before WARNING
refueling. Do not mix diesel with gasoline,
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or gasohol or alcohol. This could cause
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic an explosion.
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed Use diesel that meets the specification
immediately call a physician, even if no defined by EN 590 or the relevant national
symptoms are immediately apparent. specification, from a trusted fuel supplier.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours. Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel.
Note: The use of aftermarket fuel additives
or other engine treatments are not
recommended.
119
Fuel and Refueling
Biodiesel Usage • You may need to cycle the ignition from

off to on several times after refueling
Your vehicle is suitable for use with to allow the fuel system to pump the
biodiesel blends up to 7% (B7). You can fuel from the tank to the engine. On
achieve acceptable engine performance restarting, cranking time will take a few
and durability using B7 by adhering to seconds longer than normal. Crank
below guidelines. Do not fill the fuel tank time will be longer than usual.
with fuel that contains biodiesel with
blends greater than 7%. • Normally, adding 5 L of fuel is enough
to restart the engine. If the vehicle is
Note: Do not use raw oils, fats or waste out of fuel and on a steep grade, more
cooking greases, these are not biodiesel. than 5 L may be required.
Note: If your vehicle experiences low
temperature fuel waxing issues, consider
Fuel Run Dry Protection Feature
using different diesel brands or diesel with Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel run dry
lower biodiesel content. protection system to prevent engine
Note: We do not recommend the use of damage.
additional additives to prevent fuel waxing. The vehicle will enter an engine misfire
mode and shutdown at a pre-determined
Long-Term Storage distance after the Distance to Empty
Most diesel fuels contain biodiesel. Do not becomes zero.
leave vehicles filled with biodiesel parked Refill the fuel tank with a minimum of 5 L
for more than one month. Diesel fuels diesel before resetting the feature.
containing biodiesel can degrade quickly
when stored for long periods of time, Reset the fuel run dry protection feature
especially when exposed to warm and by following the below steps:
humid conditions. We recommend that 1. Insert the ignition key and turn to
you seek advice from an authorized dealer. position II (Ignition).
2. Hold the key in the position for 20
Winter Driving seconds and turn back to 0 (Off).
Diesel can be adjusted seasonally for cold 3. Repeat the steps three times to
temperatures. For best results at complete the reset procedure.
temperatures below 2°C it is
recommended to use a diesel fuel that has Filling a Portable Fuel Container
been seasonally adjusted for the local
conditions. Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL • Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
Avoid running out of fuel. This may have container on the ground when filling.
an adverse effect on powertrain
components. • Do not fill a fuel container while it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
If you have run out of fuel: area).
120
Fuel and Refueling
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact

with the fuel container while filling. A B
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview C D
A B
E206911
A Left-hand side. To open the fuel

filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
C then release.
E267248
B Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
A Fuel filler door. rear edge of the fuel filler door
B Fuel tank filler valve. and then release.
C Fuel tank filler pipe. C Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler D Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
cap. the fuel filler door to open it.
Refueling Your Vehicle

WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
121
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not pry open the fuel tank filler
valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this A
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
E139202
and fire.
Wait at least five seconds before 3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
removing the fuel pump nozzle to first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
allow any residual fuel to drain into fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
the fuel tank. tank filler pipe.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door. A

2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
B
E139203
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position

B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
122
Fuel and Refueling
3. Apply the parking brake.

A B
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
E206912 7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. This
the area shown.
action should dislodge any debris that
may be preventing the fuel tank filler
valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
E119081 and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly
remove it. FUEL CONSUMPTION
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Advertised Capacity
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. The advertised capacity is the maximum
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
vehicle immediately checked. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 267).
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped) In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully reserve. The empty reserve is an
close, a message could appear in the unspecified amount of fuel that remains
information display. in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Message Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
Check Fuel Fill Inlet to increase driving range.
If the message appears, do the following:

1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
123
Fuel and Refueling
Filling the Fuel Tank Conditions

For consistent results when refueling: • Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an fuel economy.
inaccurate reading results if the engine • Carrying unnecessary weight in your
is left running. vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Use the same fill rate • Adding certain accessories to your
(low-medium-high) each time the tank vehicle such as bug defectors, rollbars
is filled. or light bars, running boards and ski
• Allow no more than one automatic racks may reduce fuel economy.
shut-off when refueling. • Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent. • Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
Calculating Fuel Economy • Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
The first 1,500 km of driving is the break-in
period of the engine. A more accurate • You will get better fuel economy when
measurement is obtained after 3,000 km. driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
1. Completely fill the fuel tank and record
the initial odometer reading. See
Refueling (page 121).
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving, for example city
or highway. This provides an accurate
estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy
under current driving conditions. Keeping
records during summer and winter shows
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
124
Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (If

Equipped)
General Information
Do not rest your hand on the gearshift lever
or use the geashift lever to hang and
support objects. This could cause damage
to the transmission not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
or use the clutch pedal to keep your vehicle
stationary when waiting on a hill. This E99067
could cause damage to the clutch not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. 3. Raise the collar and shift into reverse
gear.
Failure to fully press the clutch pedal could
cause increased shift efforts, prematurely
wear transmission components or damage AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
to the transmission.
(If Equipped)
If any gear is not fully engaged, fully press
the clutch pedal and shift into neutral.
WARNINGS
Release the clutch pedal for a moment,
fully press the clutch pedal again and shift Always fully apply the parking brake
into gear. and make sure you shift into park (P).
Failure to follow this instruction
Shifting Into Reverse Gear could result in personal injury or death.
Do not shift into reverse gear when your Do not apply the brake pedal and
vehicle is moving. This could cause accelerator pedal simultaneously.
damage to the transmission not covered Applying both pedals simultaneously
by the vehicle Warranty. for more than a few seconds will limit
engine performance, which may result in
1. Fully press the brake pedal. difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and
2. Fully press the clutch pedal and shift could lead to serious injury.
into neutral.
Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.
This increases the tendency for your vehicle
to creep when you have selected a drive
gear.
125
Transmission
Transmission Selector Lever 10 Speed Transmission

Positions - 6 Speed
E269654
P Park.
R Reverse.
N Neutral.
D Drive.
E270856 S Sport mode and manual shifting
- 10 speed transmission.
P Park. Press the button (1) on the transmission
R Reverse. selector lever (2) to select reverse (R) or
drive (D). After the transmission is in drive
N Neutral. (D), you can then press the button (1) on
D Drive. the transmission selector lever (2) again
to select sport (S). When you operate the
S Sport mode and manual shifting +/- button in Sport mode, the current gear
- using the +/- positions. displays on the instrument panel.
Park (P)
WARNING
Move the transmission selector lever
to park (P) only when your vehicle is
stationary.
Note: To move the transmission selector

lever from park (P), apply the brake with
ignition key in position II.
Note: An audible warning sounds if you
open the driver door and you have not
moved the transmission selector lever to
park (P). The battery saver deactivates the
audible warning after a period of time.
126
Transmission
In this position, power is not transmitted Sport Mode (S)

to the driven wheels and the transmission
is locked. You can start the engine with the Switch on sport mode by shifting the
transmission selector lever in this position. transmission selector lever to sport (S). In
sport mode the transmission selects the
Reverse (R) optimum gear for best performance. This
gear selection is typically lower than that
WARNING of drive (D) and the shifts are faster.
Move the transmission selector lever SelectShift™ Automatic
to reverse (R) only when your vehicle Transmission
is stationary and the engine is at idle
speed. This feature gives you the ability to change
gears up or down as desired.
Shift the selector lever to reverse (R) to As long as the engine speed does not
allow your vehicle to move backward. exceed the maximum allowable limit,
downshifts are allowed. SelectShift
Neutral (N) automatically downshifts at low engine
WARNING speeds in order to prevent engine stalls.
In neutral (N) your vehicle has the Note: Engine damage may occur if you
ability to roll freely. If you intend to maintain excessive engine revving without
leave your vehicle, make sure you shifting.
apply the parking brake. SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
In this position, power is not transmitted limit.
to the driven wheels but the transmission For 6 speed transmissions - with the
is not locked. You can start the engine with transmission selector lever in the sport (S)
the transmission selector lever in this position:
position. • Move the lever forward (-) to
Drive (D) downshift.
• Move the lever backward (+) to upshift.
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy and smoothness.
Shift the transmission selector lever to
drive (D) to allow your vehicle to move
forward and shift automatically through
the forward gears.
The transmission shifts to the appropriate
gear for optimum performance based on
ambient temperature, road gradient,
vehicle load and your input.
127
Transmission
When your vehicle is stationary, only the

1st and 2nd gears can be selected. Manual
shifting is sequential, therefore gears
cannot be skipped.
Progressive Range Selection - 10

P Speed only
R Progressive Range Selection gives you the

ability to lockout gears from the automatic
N shifting range. This may provide you with
- an improved driving experience, for
example, in slippery conditions or when
D S experiencing a steep slope.
+
With the transmission in drive (D), press
the - button to activate PRS. The available
and selected gears appear on the
instrument cluster.
E136209
All available gears display with the current
gear indicated. Press the – button again to
For 10 speed transmissions - with the lock out gears beginning with the highest
transmission selector lever in sport (S) gear. For example, press the – button twice
position: to lock out 10th and 9th gears. Only the
• Press the (+) button on the available gears display and the
transmission selector lever to upshift. transmission shifts between the available
• Press the (-) button on the gears. Press the + button to unlock gears
transmission selector lever to to allow the transmission to shift to higher
downshift. gears. The transmission shifts within the
gear range you select.
Emergency Park Position Release

Lever
WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
E269656
If the parking brake is fully released,
To exit SelectShift mode, return the but the brake warning lamp remains
transmission selector lever to drive (D). illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
128
Transmission
Note: For some markets this feature is 1. Lift up the cover in the center console
disabled. next to the transmission selector lever
with a screwdriver.
Your vehicle has a brake-shift interlock
feature that prevents moving the 2. Push down the locking button in the
transmission selector lever from park (P) slot and simultaneously move the
when the ignition is on and you do not transmission selector lever out of the
press the brake pedal. park (P) position and into another gear.
The system requires service if you cannot 10 Speed Transmission
move the gearshift lever out of park (P)
with the ignition on and the brake pedal Apply the parking brake and turn the
pressed. It is possible that a fuse has blown ignition off before performing this
or your vehicle’s brake lamps are not procedure.
operating properly. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 202).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are properly working, the following
procedure allows you to move the
transmission selector lever from park (P):
Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible, if this procedure is used.
6 Speed Transmission
Apply the parking brake and switch the
E269652
ignition off before performing this
procedure. 1. Insert a screwdriver between the shifter
boot material and the trim ring (1) to
release the retainer tabs from the top
panel trim ring.
2. Lift the shifter boot (2) upwards.
E270857
129
Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud

or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
E269653
3. Locate the lower white lever (3)

located on the side of the transmission
selector lever.
4. Using the screwdriver, move the lower
white lever (3) towards the front of the
transmission selector lever.
5. When holding the lower white lever (3)
in the forward position, move the
transmission selector lever out of the
park (P) position and into another gear.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive

Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
130
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Use for off-road driving.

We recommend that you frequently
The four-wheel drive system in your vehicle inspect your vehicle's chassis components
is a part-time system activated using the if your vehicle is subject to off-road use.
rotary switch mounted in the centre
console. In normal rear-wheel drive Note: The four-wheel drive indicator lamp
operation (2H) drive torque is directed to will come on when the transfer shift switch
the rear axle. When the switch is moved to is in the 4H position. See Warning Lamps
4H or 4L, drive torque is directed to both and Indicators (page 64).
the front and rear axles, providing
four-wheel drive operation.
Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range - 4L
Depending on your vehicle, further Note: Do not use four-wheel drive 4L for
four-wheel drive options may be available normal road driving.
on the switch panel located on the centre Use for more extreme off-road conditions,
console. such as steep ascents and descents.
Also use when low speed maneuvering is
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE necessary, such as negotiating a
boulder-strewn river bed.
Note: A clicking sound from the drive line
We recommend that you frequently
may be heard while shifting between ranges,
inspect your vehicle's chassis components
which is normal.
if your vehicle is subject to off-road use.
Note: The four-wheel drive low range 4L
and four-wheel drive indicator lamps will
come on when the transfer shift switch is in
the 4L position. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 64).
Shifting Between 2H and 4H

Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the
stability control (ESP) functions.
Shift between 2H and 4H can be done with
the vehicle moving up to 110 km/h, but only
with the accelerator pedal released in a
straight line. During the shift the indicator
lamp will flash.
E132692
Shifting Between 2H and 4L

Two-Wheel Drive, High Range - 2H
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate Engine
Use for all normal road driving and also for Traction Control and Trailer Stability Control
off-road driving across dry, level terrain. but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist
and Brake Traction Control remain active.
Four-Wheel Drive, High Range - 4H
Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the
Note: Do not use four-wheel drive 4H for stability control (ESP) functions.
normal road driving.
131
1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to do When driving at slow speeds off road under
so. high load conditions, use a low gear when
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal for possible. Low gear operation will maximize
manual transmission. the engine and transmission cooling
capability.
3. Move the transmission selector lever
to neutral (N) for automatic Basic Operating Principles
transmission.
When driving your vehicle on surfaces
4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 2H made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel,
to 4L or 4L to 2H. snow or ice proceed with care.
During the shift the indicator lamp will
flash. If it continues to flash, check meeting Sand
the above conditions. When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Shifting Between 4H and 4L Shift to a lower gear and drive steadily
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate Engine through the terrain. Apply the accelerator
Traction Control and Trailer Stability Control slowly and avoid excessive wheel slip.
but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
and Brake Traction Control remain active. an extended period of time. This will cause
1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to do the system to overheat.
so. To resume operation, switch the ignition
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal for off and allow the system to cool down for
manual transmission. a minimum of 15 minutes.
3. Move the transmission selector lever When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
to neutral (N) for automatic under high outside temperatures, use a low
transmission. gear when possible. Low gear operation
4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 4H will maximize the engine and transmission
to 4L or 4L to 4H. cooling capability.
During the shift the indicator lamp will Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
flash. If it continues to flash, check meeting causes vehicle momentum to work against
the above conditions. you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
Driving in Special Conditions With required from another vehicle. Remember,
Four-Wheel Drive you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are suitable for
driving on sand, snow, mud and rough Mud and Water
roads and have operating characteristics
that are somewhat different from Mud
conventional vehicles, both on and off the Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
freeway. speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
132
After driving through mud, clean off residue If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
stuck to rotating drive shafts and tires. around because this could cause vehicle
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
drive shafts can cause an imbalance that safe location.
could damage drive components.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
Water climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
If you must drive through high water, drive resulting in loss of vehicle control.
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims. If the ignition
system gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may E143949
damage the transmission. If the front or rear

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
axle is submerged in water, the axle
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
brake application and brake overheating.
should be checked and changed if
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
necessary.
overdrive or move the transmission
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
Although natural obstacles may make it braking as you could lose control. The front
necessary to travel diagonally up or down wheels have to be turning in order to steer
a hill or steep incline, you should always your vehicle.
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping brake pedal.
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
133
Driving on Snow and Ice If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow
WARNING
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
If you are driving in slippery it may be rocked out by shifting between
conditions that require tire chains or forward and reverse gears, stopping
cables, then it is critical that you drive between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead is not at normal operating temperature,
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of damage to the transmission may occur.
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
the direction of the slide until you regain than a minute, damage to the transmission
control of your vehicle. and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage. Maintenance and Modifications
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages The suspension and steering systems on
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and your vehicle have been designed and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle. tested to provide predictable performance
Should you start to slide while driving on whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel we strongly recommend that you do not
in the direction of the slide until you regain make modifications such as adding or
control. removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
Avoid sudden applications of power and
equivalent to the original factory
quick changes of direction on snow and
equipment.
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop. We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not control.
become overconfident as to road
conditions. Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
Make sure you allow sufficient distance cost, reduce vehicle performance and
between you and other vehicles for operational capabilities and adversely
stopping. Drive slower than usual and affect you and your passenger's safety. We
consider using one of the lower gears. In recommend you frequently inspect your
emergency stopping situations, apply the vehicle's chassis components when your
brake steadily. As your vehicle has a four vehicle is subject to off road usage.
wheel anti-lock brake system, do not pump
the brake pedal. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 137).
134
Rear Axle
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The electronic differential lock will lock

and unlock when the internal gears are
(If Equipped) aligned and no torque load is placed on
the differential. To aid alignment, drive the
This axle provides added traction on vehicle in a straight line with the
slippery surfaces, particularly when one accelerator pedal released. Alternatively,
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under drive slowly forward and backward while
normal conditions, the limited slip axle moving the steering wheel from side to side
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle to allow the electronic differential lock to
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in lock.
tight turns with low vehicle speed. This is
normal behavior and indicates the axle is The system will:
working. • Automatically disengage when a speed
of 40 km/h is exceeded.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING • Automatically re-engage when the
speed drops below 30 km/h.
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped)
• Automatically disengage when the
ignition is turned off.
Note: Do not operate the system on sealed
roads. Doing so may lead to excessive tire Note: The system activates when the
noise and wear. Use the system only in vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h and
consistently slippery or loose surface. accelerator pedal released.
The system locks the left and right portions Note: The system can be used in any drive
of the rear axle together to form a solid mode (2H, 4H or 4L).
driving axle, resulting in increased rear If the system is selected when driving
wheel traction in certain conditions. above 40 km/h, the request is stored and
Press the electronic differential lock button will be engaged when the vehicle speed
to activate the system. reduces to 30 km/h. The electronic
differential lock indicator lamp will flash
until either the vehicle speed reduces and
the differential lock is engaged or the driver
deselects the electronic differential lock
button.
Note: When the system is engaged, the
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) functions
such as Stability Control, Traction Control,
Hill Descent Control, Emergency stop signal,
E214414 Hill Start Assist and Trailer Sway Control
will be deactivated, the ESP Off indicator
illuminates, and the HDC on indicator turns
off.
Note: When the anti-lock braking system
is operating, the system will be disengaged.
135
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION 3. Select park (P) (automatic

transmission only).
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If 4. Apply the parking brake.
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
continuous squeal sound is present, the
interferences. If none are found and the
brake linings may be worn-out. If the vehicle
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
has continuous vibration or shudder in the
to a dealer.
steering wheel while braking, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. Brake Inspection
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving Disc brake pads should be checked to
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the confirm that each disc brake pad lining has
brakes wear. See Cleaning the Wheels a suitable amount of friction material for
(page 236). safe use.
Disc Brakes Inspection and Verification
Wet brake discs result in reduced braking Note: Disc brake pads must be replaced as
efficiency. Dab the brake pedal when an "axle set". Do not replace an individual
driving from a car wash to remove the film disc brake pad or disc brake pads on one
of water. brake assembly only.
1. Using a suitable tool, such as an
Anti-Lock Brake System (If Equipped) inspection mirror, look into the
inspection hole on the back of each
WARNING disc brake caliper.
The system is designed to aid the 2. Inspect the inner and outer disc brake
driver. It is not intended to replace pads to confirm each disc brake pad
your attention and judgment. You are lining measures 1.5 mm thick or more.
still responsible to drive with due care and Note: See your authorised dealer if any disc
attention. brake pad lining is under 1.5 mm thickness.
Inspect each brake caliper and anchor
This system helps you maintain steering
bracket for corrosion, wear, or damage.
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking. Wear Adjustment
Brake Override Automatic adjustment of disc brake
friction material during brake application
In the event the accelerator pedal occurs as follows:
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to • The piston slides within its bore to a
slow your vehicle and reduce engine power. new position, taking up the brake pad
wear.
If you experience this condition:
• The brake caliper moves on its guide
1. Apply the brakes and bring your vehicle pins, taking up the brake pad wear.
to a safe stop.
2. Turn the engine off.
136
Brakes
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing uphill select first gear and turn the
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES steering wheel away from the curb.
The anti-lock braking system does not Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
eliminate the risks when: facing downhill select reverse gear and turn
the steering wheel toward the curb.
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you. All Vehicles
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
Note: Do not press the release button while
• You take corners too fast. pulling the lever up.
• The road surface is poor.
To apply the parking brake:
Note: If the system activates, the brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You 2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its
may also hear a noise from the system. This fullest extent.
is normal. To release the parking brake:
1. Press the brake pedal firmly.
PARKING BRAKE 2. Pull the lever up slightly.
Vehicles With Automatic 3. Press the release button and push the
Transmission lever down.
WARNING
HILL START ASSIST (If Equipped)
Always set the parking brake fully
and leave your vehicle with the
WARNINGS
transmission selector lever in
position P. The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and brake and move the transmission selector
facing uphill move the transmission selector lever into park (P).
lever to position P and turn the steering
wheel away from the curb. You must remain in your vehicle once
you have turned the system on.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing downhill move the transmission The system is active unless ESC
selector lever to position P and turn the warning lamp is turned off. During all
steering wheel toward the curb. times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
Vehicles With Manual system and intervening, if required.
Transmission
If the engine is revved excessively or
WARNING if a malfunction is detected, the
system will turn off and ESC warning
Always set the parking brake fully. lamp will turn on.
137
Brakes
WARNINGS 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The

There is a short delay in the system brakes will be released automatically.
activation of up to two seconds after
Enable and Disable the System
shifting the lever to drive (D) or
reverse (R) in vehicles with automatic You can enable the system only if the
transmission. following conditions are met:
• The engine is running.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the • All doors are fully closed.
need to use the parking brake. • The parking brake is fully disengaged.
When the system is active, your vehicle will • No failure mode is present.
remain stationary on the slope for two to • Accelerator pedal is not depressed.
three seconds after you release the brake • Vehicle is completely stopped.
pedal. This allows you time to move your
foot from the brake to the accelerator • Uphill: Gear shift lever should be in
pedal. The brakes are released drive (D) for Automatic transmission
automatically once the engine has and in any position other than reverse
developed sufficient drive to prevent your (R) for manual transmission.
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This • Downhill: Gear shift lever should be in
is an advantage when pulling away on a reverse (R).
slope (for example from a car park ramp,
To disable the system, perform one of the
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
following:
a parking space).
• Apply the parking brake.
The system will turn on automatically on
any slope which can result in significant • Open any door.
vehicle rollback. • Drive off uphill without re-applying the
Note: Hill start assist is available in vehicles brake.
equipped with electronic stability control • Wait for one to two seconds after you
(ESC). remove your foot from the brake pedal.
• If the system is active in a forward gear,
Using Hill Start Assist select reverse gear.
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your • If the system is active in neutral,
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep release the clutch pedal (Manual
the brake pedal pressed. transmission).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle • If the system is active in reverse gear,
is on a slope, the system will be select neutral.
activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the Switching the System On and Off
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain Note: You can only switch the system on
on the slope without rolling away for and off if your vehicle has a manual
approximately two or three seconds. transmission.
This hold time will automatically be
extended if you are in the process of Note: The system will remain on or off
driving off. depending on how it was last set.
138
Brakes
Your vehicle comes with this feature

already enabled. If required, you can switch
this feature off using the information
display. See General Information (page
70).
139
Traction Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL

Traction control forms part of the stability
control system.
Note: The system automatically turns on
every time you switch the ignition on.
Note: On 4WD vehicles only, shifting to 4L
deactivates the engine traction control but
brake traction control remains active.
In some situations for example if your
vehicle is stuck in snow or mud, turning the
system off may be beneficial as this allows
the wheels to spin with full engine power.
Traction control is an enhanced feature of
stability control system and automatically
detects the wheel spin when you
accelerate. If this situation occurs, the
system applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and if necessary, reduces
engine power.
To switch off the traction control, See
Using Stability Control (page 142).
Stability control will remain on even when
you have switched the traction control off.
140
Stability Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If a driving condition activates either the

stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
WARNINGS
conditions:
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof • The stability and traction control light
racks, suspension, steering system, flashes.
tire construction and wheel and tire size • Your vehicle slows down.
may change the handling characteristics • Reduced engine power.
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability • A vibration in the brake pedal.
control system. In addition, installing any • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with • If the driving condition is severe and
and adversely affect the electronic stability your foot is not on the brake, the brake
control system. Install any aftermarket pedal may move as the systems
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from applies higher brake forces.
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk The stability control system has several
of interfering with the electronic stability features built into it to help you maintain
control sensors. Reducing the control of your vehicle:
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased Electronic Stability Control
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
rollover, personal injury and death. to prevent skids or lateral slides by
Remember that even advanced applying brakes to one or more of the
technology cannot defy the laws of wheels individually and, if necessary,
physics. It’s always possible to lose reducing engine power.
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive Roll Stability Control
driving on any road condition can cause The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
you to lose control of your vehicle to prevent rollovers by detecting your
increasing the risk of personal injury or vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
property damage. Activation of the it changes by applying the brakes to one
electronic stability control system is an or more wheels individually.
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road; Curve Control
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, to follow the road when cornering severely
personal injury and death. If your electronic or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve
stability control system activates, SLOW Control operates by reducing engine power
DOWN. and, if necessary, applying brakes to one
or more of the wheels individually.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
141
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 140).
E207884
B
The system can be deactivated using the
switch in the center console.
Note: On 4WD vehicles only, when the
system is deactivated with the transfer
B switch in 2H position, the ESC off indicator
will flash twice to indicate that the system
is completely turned off and remains
B illuminated. Press the switch again to
enable the system.
A
Note: On 4WD vehicles only, ESC is
A B A switched off when the transfer switch is in
4L position or the Electronic Locking
Differential is operating.
E72903
2-wheel drive vehicles
A Vehicle without stability control Press and hold the switch for one second
skidding off its intended route. to deactivate Engine Traction Control and
Trailer Sway Control. Hill Start Assist
B Vehicle with stability control remains active.
maintaining control on a slippery
surface. Press and hold the switch for five seconds
to deactivate Engine Traction Control and
Trailer Sway Control and Brake Traction
USING STABILITY CONTROL Control. Hill Start Assist remains active.
Note: The system will be switched on 4-wheel drive vehicles

automatically every time you switch the Note: All the stability control (ESC)
ignition on. functions are reactivated when 2H position
is selected.
Transfer shift switch in 4H position:
142
• Press and hold the switch for one

second to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Sway Control and ESC.
Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist
and Brake Traction Control remain
active.
Transfer shift switch in 4H or 4L position:
• Press and hold the switch for five
seconds to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Sway Control and Brake
Traction Control. Hill Descent Control
and Hill Start Assist remain active.
Transfer shift switch in 2H position:
• Press and hold the switch for one
second to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Sway Control and ESC.
Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist
and Brake Traction Control remain
active.
• Press and hold the switch for five
seconds to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Sway Control and Brake
Traction Control. Hill Descent Control
and Hill Start Assist remain active.
143
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: HDC will be active at speeds less

than 35 km/h and deactivated above
40 km/h but will not turn off until vehicle
WARNING
exceeds 60 km/h.
Before driving off-road it is
Note: HDC will turn off when you switch
absolutely essential that
the ignition off.
in-experienced drivers become fully
familiar with the vehicle's controls. In The HDC switch will illuminate
particular, Sport (S) mode and Hill Descent continuously to indicate that
Control (HDC). HDC is fully active.
HDC will temporarily deactivate during the

Hill descent control (HDC) operates in
following conditions:
conjunction with stability control (ESC) to
provide greater control when off-road, • The brake is hot. Operation resumes
particularly when descending steep slopes. once the brakes cool down.
HDC operation is fully automatic when • Stability control indicator on warning
engaged. lamp is illuminated and operating.
Engine braking controls the speed of the
descent during an off-road hill descent. If HDC Operation
engine braking alone is insufficient to
control the vehicle's speed, HDC will slow
the vehicle using the braking system.
Note: Use HDC only in first or reverse (R)
gear in manual transmission vehicles.
Note: Use HDC only in drive (D), reverse
(R) or sport (S) mode in automatic
transmission vehicles. When in drive (D),
the vehicle will select the most appropriate
gear.
USING HILL DESCENT

CONTROL
E206132
Note: HDC deactivates when the electronic
locking differential is operating. Cruise control switches on the steering
wheel allows you to control your speed of
Selecting HDC descent. SET + increases the speed and
To select HDC, press the hill SET - decreases the speed.
descent control switch on the
E163171 centre console.
Select HDC at speeds less than 60 km/h.
144
Changing the Set Speed

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 km/h increments.
Pressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal will increase or decrease the speed
respectively.
Note: Each gear has a pre-determined
minimum speed.
Note: Descent speed will only increase on
a slope steep enough to provide additional
momentum. Therefore, use of the SET+
switch on a gentle slope may not increase
the speed.
Note: Brake overrides the HDC if the brake
pedal is pressed and the system resumes
on the release of the brake pedal.
Note: HDC assistance will fade out
gradually if you switch the system off. This
is to prevent the loss of control if you press
the HDC switch unintentionally. If assistance
is still required, you can switch back the HDC
on. The control will resume at a speed the
vehicle is travelling when the pedal is
released.
Note: You may hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
Note: When HDC is operating, ESC on
warning lamp will flash.
HDC operates only if the vehicle speed is
within the specified range even if the
system is on permanently during off-road
driving.
145
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: When a trailer is connected to your

vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
WARNINGS
the rear parking aid when a trailer is
To help avoid personal injury, always connected to prevent the alert.
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system. The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
The system may not detect objects vehicle. The system turns on automatically
with surfaces that absorb reflection. whenever you switch the ignition on.
Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result The system can be switched off through
in a crash. the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
Traffic control systems, inclement shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
weather, air brakes, external motors General Information (page 70).
and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may If a fault is present in the system, a warning
cause reduced performance or false alerts. message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
The system may not detect small or (page 82).
moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.
REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be The rear sensors are only active when the
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See transmission is in reverse (R). As your
Principle of Operation (page 33). vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the When the obstacle is less than 30 cm
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and away, the warning sounds continuously. If
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors the system detects a stationary or receding
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be object farther than 30 cm from the corners
affected. Do not clean the sensors with of the bumper, the tone sounds for only
sharp objects. three seconds. Once the system detects
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to an object approaching, the warning sounds
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned again.
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.
146
Parking Aids
The indicator displays:

• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)

The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
E130178 park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
speed.
Coverage area of up to 1.8 m from the rear
bumper. There may be decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 5 km/h
or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 5 km/h or
less. E187330
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 5 km/h and a moving object Coverage area of up to 70 cm from the
is approaching the rear of your vehicle front bumper. The coverage area
at a speed of less than 5 km/h. decreases at the outer corners.
The system provides audio warnings only When your vehicle approaches an object,
when your vehicle is moving or when your a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
vehicle is stationary and the detected moves closer to an object, the warning
obstacle is less than 30 cm away from the tone repeat rate increases. The warning
bumper. tone sounds continuously when an object
is 30 cm or less from the front bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If You can switch the system off through the
Equipped) information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
The system provides obstacle distance shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
indication through the information display. General Information (page 70). If your
The distance indicator displays when the vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
transmission is in reverse (R). switch the system off by pressing the
button.
147
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)

Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance WARNINGS

indication through the information display. You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
The indicator displays: times, you are responsible for
• As the distance to the obstacle controlling your vehicle, supervising the
decreases the indicator blocks system and intervening, if required. Failure
illuminate and move towards the to take care may result in the loss of
vehicle icon. control of your vehicle, serious personal
• If there is no obstacle detected, the injury or death.
distance indicator blocks are grayed The system is designed to aid the
out. driver. It is not intended to replace
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the your attention and judgment. You are
front sensing system provides audio still responsible to drive with due care and
warnings when your vehicle is moving and attention.
the detected obstacle is moving towards The sensors may not detect objects
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, in heavy rain or other conditions that
the audio warning will be stopped after 2 cause interference.
seconds. Visual indication is always
present in reverse (R). Active park assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any
other forward gear (for example, low (L),
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual Note: The blind spot information system
transmission), the front sensing system does not detect traffic alongside or behind
provides audio and visual warnings when your vehicle during an active park assist
your vehicle is moving below a speed of maneuver.
8 km/h and an obstacle is located inside Note: Active park assist is a multi-step
the detection area. Once the vehicle is process and may require you to shift your
stationary, the audio warning will be transmission multiple times. Follow the
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual on-screen instructions until you complete
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the the parking process.
obstacles detected are within 30 cm, the
visual indication remains on. The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the your vehicle (hands-free) while you control
system provides visual indication only the accelerator, transmission and brakes.
when your vehicle is moving at 8 km/h or The system visually and audibly guides you
below and an obstacle is located inside to park your vehicle.
the detection area. Once your vehicle is
stationary, the visual indication will stop If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
after 4 seconds. to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel or pushing the active park
assist button.
148
Parking Aids
The system may not operate correctly in Note: Following a change in tire size, the
any of the following conditions: system must recalibrate and operation may
• You use a spare tire or a tire be impaired for a short time.
significantly worn more than the other Do not use the system if:
tires.
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer
• One or more tires are improperly or other object near the sensors on the
inflated. front or rear of your vehicle.
• You try to park on a tight curve. • You have attached an overhanging
• Something passes between the front object to the roof. For example, a
bumper and the parking space. For surfboard.
example, a pedestrian or cyclist. • A foreign object damages or obstructs
• The edge of the neighboring parking the sensors.
vehicle is high off the ground. For • The correct tire size is not in use. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed example, when using a mini-spare tire.
truck.
• The weather conditions are poor. For Using Active Park Assist
example, during heavy rain, snow or Press the button to turn the
fog. system on or off.
E146186
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
fascia, free from now, ice and large When driving at a speed less than 35 km/h,
accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can the system automatically scans both sides
affect the systems accuracy. Do not clean of your vehicle for an available parking
the sensors with sharp objects. space. The system displays a message and
Note: The sensors may not detect objects a corresponding graphic to indicate it is
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves searching for a parking space. Use the
or cause ultrasonic interference. For direction indicator to select searching
example, motorcycle exhaust, truck air either to the left hand side or right hand
brakes or horns. side of your vehicle. If the direction
indicator is not used, the system defaults
to the passenger side of your vehicle.
E130107
149
Parking Aids
When the system finds a suitable space it Note: The system always offers the last
displays a message and a tone sounds. detected parking space. For example, if your
Stop your vehicle and follow the vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
instructions on the display screen. If your are driving, it offers the last detected space.
vehicle is moving very slowly, you may Note: If driven above approximately
need to pull forward a short distance 35 km/h, the display screen shows a
before the system is ready to park. message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
Note: You can also activate the system speed.
after you drive partially or completely pass
the parking space. To do so, press the active Automatic Steering into Parking
park assist button and the system informs Space
you if you recently passed a suitable parking
space. Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 9 km/h or
the maneuver is interrupted, for example
Note: You must observe that the selected driver input is detected, the system switches
space remains clear of obstructions at all off and you need to take full control of your
times in the maneuver. vehicle.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within When you shift the transmission into
1.5 m and as parallel to the other vehicles reverse (R), with your hands off the
as possible while passing a parking space. steering wheel and nothing obstructing its
movement, your vehicle steers itself into
the space. The system displays instructions
to move your vehicle back and forth in the
space.
E130108
When automatic steering is complete, the

When you think your vehicle has enough
system displays a message and a chime
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
sounds, indicating that the active park
solid tone from the parking aid
assist process is finished. You are
(accompanied by a touchscreen display
responsible for checking the parking job
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
and making any necessary corrections
to a complete stop.
before leaving your vehicle.
150
Parking Aids
Deactivating the Park Assist Certain vehicle conditions can also

Feature deactivate the system, such as:
Manually deactivate the system by: • Traction control has activated.
• Pressing the active park assist button • There is an anti-lock brake system
during an active maneuver. activation or failure.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an If a problem occurs with the system, a
active maneuver. warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
• Driving above approximately 35 km/h may occur in normal operation. For
for 30 seconds during an active park recurring or frequent system faults, contact
search. an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
• Driving above 9 km/h during automatic serviced.
steering.
• Switching off the traction control
system.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.

The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered. For example, with snow, ice or dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 1.5 m or closer than 40 cm away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 35 km/h.
You may have recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect,
the vehicle must be driven on a straight road for a short period of time.
151
Parking Aids
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission. For example, rolling
forward when the transmission is in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly. For example, not inflated correctly,
improper size or of a different size.
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving
truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly. For example, when driving from
a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash.
WARNINGS
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped) Use caution when the rear cargo door
is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar,
WARNINGS the camera will be out of position
The rear view camera system is a and the video image may be incorrect. All
reverse aid supplement device that guidelines disappear when the rear cargo
still requires the driver to use it in door is ajar. Failure to follow this
conjunction with the interior and exterior instruction could result in personal injury.
mirrors for maximum coverage. Use caution when turning camera
Objects that are close to either features on or off when the
corner of the bumper or under the transmission is not in park (P). Make
bumper, might not be seen on the sure your vehicle is not moving.
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system. The rear view camera system provides a
Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure video image of the area behind your
to follow this instruction could result vehicle.
in the loss of control of your vehicle, During operation, lines appear in the
personal injury or death. display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
152
Parking Aids
The camera may not operate correctly

under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
E133364
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera is on the tailgate.
You can access the rear view camera
Using the Rear View Camera system settings in the display screen. See
System Settings (page 364).
The rear view camera system displays Camera guidelines
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R). Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
The system uses three types of guides to in reverse (R).
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
Note: The centerline is only available if
• Active guidelines: Show the intended active or fixed guidelines are on.
path of your vehicle while reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in reverse (R), have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once you engage the trailer tow connector.
153
Parking Aids
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and

out depending on the steering wheel
A B C D E position. The active guidelines do not
show when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

Equipped)
F
E142436
A Active guidelines
B Centerline
C Fixed guideline: Green zone
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
E Fixed guideline: Red zone
F Rear bumper
Active guidelines only show with fixed E190459

guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines The system provides an image of your
toward an intended path. If the steering vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
wheel position changes while reversing, will highlight green, yellow and red when
your vehicle might deviate from the original the parking aid sensors detect an object in
intended path. the coverage area.
154
Parking Aids
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when

the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
Selectable settings for this feature are
zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the
symbol on the camera screen to change
the view. The default setting is zoom off.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Rear Camera Delay

Selectable settings for this feature are on
and off. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until your vehicle speed reaches
10 km/h. This occurs when the rear camera
delay feature is on.
155
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Switching Cruise Control On

Press the cruise control button.
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the The indicator appears in the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise information display.
control when your vehicle speed is greater E71340
than 30 km/h.
Setting the Cruise Speed
USING CRUISE CONTROL 1. Drive to desired speed.

2. Press SET+ or SET-.
WARNINGS 3. Take your foot off the accelerator
Do not use cruise control on winding pedal.
roads, in heavy traffic or when the Note: The indicator changes color.
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious Changing the Set Speed
injury or death.
• Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
When you are going downhill, your speed in small increments.
vehicle speed could increase above
the set speed. The system does not • Press the accelerator or brake pedal
apply the brakes. until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Note: Cruise control disengages if the • Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h the control when you reach the desired
below the set speed when driving uphill. speed.
To help the system to maintain the set Canceling the Set Speed
speed when going downhill, downshift to
a lower gear. Press CAN or tap the brake pedal. The set
speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed

Press RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off

Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Press the cruise control button when the
system is in standby mode, or switch the
ignition off.
E201284
The cruise controls are on the steering

wheel.
156
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE The system adjusts your vehicle speed to

maintain the set gap between you and the
CONTROL vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
WARNINGS
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
Always pay close attention to drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
changing road conditions when using at all times.
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing Note: Using non-Ford branded front
to pay attention to the road may result in mounted accessories could cause sensor
a crash, serious injury or death. obstruction and result in a loss of radar
functionality.
Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a The system uses a radar sensor that
highway, on roads with intersections projects a beam directly in front of your
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or vehicle.
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
E248386
Adaptive cruise control may not
detect stationary or slow moving The adaptive cruise controls are on the
vehicles below 10 km/h. steering wheel.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
road. On
Adaptive cruise control does not Press and release CAN/OFF.
detect oncoming vehicles in the The indicator, current gap setting
same lane. and set speed appear in the
E144529
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash information display.
warning or avoidance system.
157
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
E164805 intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed crash, serious injury or death.
1. Drive to your preferred speed. Adaptive cruise control only warns

of vehicles detected by the radar
2. Press and release RES+ or SET-. sensor. In some cases there may be
3. A green indicator light, the current gap no warning or a delayed warning. You
setting and your set speed appear in should always apply the brakes when
the information display. necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
E164805 Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
5. A lead vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you. • The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly • The vehicle in front of you moves out
from the set speed displayed in the of the lane you are in or out of range of
information display. the radar.
• Your vehicle speed falls below
20 km/h.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
158
If the system determines that its maximum

braking level is not sufficient, an audible Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar Graphic Distance Gap Dynamic
displays on the windshield and you must display, behavior
take immediate action. bars indic-
ated
Setting the Gap Distance between
vehicles
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in 1 Closest. Sport.
front by pressing the gap control.
2 Close. Normal.
3 Medium. Normal.
4 Far. Comfort.
Each time you switch the system on, it

selects the last chosen gap setting.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent

and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
E248383 appropriate to the driving conditions.
A Gap decrease. Overriding the Set Speed

B Gap increase. WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you

override the set speed and gap distance.
E164805 When you override the system,
the green indicator light
E144529
The selected gap appears in the illuminates and the vehicle
information display as shown by the bars image does not appear in the information
in the image. display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
159
Changing the Set Speed Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
audible warning sounds and a message
• Press and release RES+ or SET- to appears in the information display.
change the set speed in small Automatic braking releases.
increments.
Note: Shift to a lower gear (manual
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal transmission only) to avoid automatic
until you reach your preferred speed. cancellation.
Press and release RES+ or SET-.
• Press and hold RES+ or SET- to Hilly Condition Usage
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when Select a lower gear when the system is
you reach your preferred speed. active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
The system may apply the brakes to slow example in mountainous areas. The
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set system needs additional engine braking in
speed displays continuously in the these situations to reduce the load on the
information display when the system is vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
active. it from overheating.
Canceling the Set Speed Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
Press and release CAN/OFF or tap the an extended period of time. This allows the
brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Resuming the Set Speed
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Press and release RES+. Your vehicle Off
speed returns to the previously set speed
and gap setting. The set speed displays Press and release CAN/OFF when the
continuously in the information display system is in standby mode, or switch the
when the system is active. ignition off.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of Note: You erase the set speed and gap
the set speed and intend to return to it. setting when you switch the system off.
Note: Shift to a lower gear (manual
transmission only) to avoid automatic
Detection Issues
cancellation. WARNINGS
Automatic Cancellation On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
The system does not operate below infrastructures, for example bridges,
20 km/h. tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
Automatic cancellation can also occur if: the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
• The tires lose traction. responsible for controlling your vehicle,
• The engine speed is too low. supervising the system and intervening, if
• You apply the parking brake. required.
If the system malfunctions, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
160
The radar sensor has a limited field of view. In these cases, the system may brake late
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
a vehicle later than expected in some take action when necessary.
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does If something hits the front end of your
not illuminate if the system does not vehicle or damage occurs, the
detect a vehicle in front of you. radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
System Not Available

Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E71621
Detection issues can occur:

E267381
A With vehicles that edge into your
lane that can only be detected A message displays if something obstructs
once they have moved fully into the radar signals from the sensor. The
your lane sensor is behind the lower grille. The
system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and
B Motorcyclists may be detected
does not function when something
late, or not at all
obstructs the radar signal.
C There may be issues with the
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
detection of vehicles in front
behind a fascia panel.
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
161
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:

Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or obstructed in some way. or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It may take several
but the message remains in the display. minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the Do not use the system in these conditions
radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the Do not use the system in these conditions
road may interfere with the radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise

Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise

control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340 control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking does not activate.
162
Driving Aids
SPEED LIMITER - VEHICLES Setting the Speed Limit

WITH: CRUISE CONTROL Press SET+ or SET- with the limiter in
standby mode to set the limiter to the
Principle of Operation current vehicle speed. The set speed is
stored and appears in the information
WARNING display.
When you are going downhill, your Press SET+ or SET- to select your desired
vehicle speed may increase above speed limit. The set speed is stored and
the set speed. The system will not appears in the information display.
apply the brakes but a warning displays.
Press CAN to cancel the limiter and place
Failure to follow this warning could result
it in standby mode. The information display
in serious personal injury or death.
confirms the system is in standby mode
by displaying the set speed limit as crossed
The system allows you to set a speed to out.
which your vehicle becomes limited. The
set speed sets the effective maximum Press RES to resume the limiter. The
speed of your vehicle. You can temporarily information display confirms this is on by
exceed the set speed if required, for showing the set speed again.
example to overtake. Intentionally Exceeding the Speed
Using the Speed Limiter Limiter Set Speed
Firmly depress the accelerator pedal to
Note: If you briefly press the accelerator,
temporarily switch the system off. The
for example when overtaking another
speed limiter set speed resumes when your
vehicle, the system temporarily turns off.
vehicle speed drops below the set speed
The system is operated by the controls limit.
mounted on the steering wheel.
System Warnings
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the
set speed indicator in the information
display flashes and a tone sounds.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed,
a warning appears in the information
display.
E269729

Press LIM to set the limiter in standby
mode. The information display prompts
you to set a speed. Press LIM again to
switch the system off.
163
Driving Aids
Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter Switching the System On and Off
(If Equipped)
Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in
standby mode. The information display
WARNING prompts you to set a speed or show the
You are responsible for controlling detected speed limit as the set speed. The
your vehicle at all times. The system system does not limit the vehicle speed in
is designed to be an aid and does not standby mode. Press LIM CNCL/OFF with
relieve you of your responsibility to drive the limiter in standby mode to switch the
with due care and attention. Failure to system off.
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal Setting the Speed Limit
injury or death. • Press RES+ with the limiter in standby
mode to set the limiter to the detected
Note: When driving between countries that speed limit.
use different units of measure (miles per • Press SET- with the limiter in standby
hour or kilometers per hour), there may be mode to set the limiter to the current
a delay before the system changes between vehicle speed.
speed limit units. During this time, the
display screen for the speed limiter may • Press RES+ or SET- to gradually
differ from the actual posted speed limit. change the current set speed to your
For best performance, make sure that the desired speed limit.
navigation SD card is in the navigation • Press LIM CNCL/OFF to cancel the
media port. limiter and place it in standby mode.
The system allows you to automatically • Press RES+ to resume the limiter.
limit your vehicle speed to the speed limit The limit speed automatically adapts to
that is detected by the Traffic Sign the speed limit detected by the Traffic Sign
Recognition system. Recognition system. The system does not
You can change the speed limiter mode react to speed limits shown with a
between manual and intelligent in the supplementary sign by the Traffic Sign
information display. See General Recognition system. If there is no speed
Information (page 70). limit information available, the limiter
switches to standby mode.
You can select a permanent set speed
tolerance that is in addition to the detected Intentionally Exceeding the Speed
speed limit through the tolerance menu in Limiter Set Speed
the information display. See General
Information (page 70). Firmly depress the accelerator pedal to
speed limiter set speed resumes when your
vehicle speed drops below the set speed
limit.
164
Driving Aids
System Warnings Using the Speed Limiter

If the set speed is automatically set to a Note: If you briefly press the accelerator,
lower value than your current vehicle for example when overtaking another
speed, the set speed indicator in the vehicle, the system temporarily turns off.
information display flashes and you hear
an audible warning tone if you are The system is operated by the controls
continuously exceeding the set speed. mounted on the steering wheel.
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the

display flashes and you hear an audible
warning tone.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed,
only the set speed indicator in the
information display flashes.
If the Traffic Sign Recognition system
detects a speed limit outside the
operational speed range, you hear a single
warning tone and the system switches to E269730
standby mode.
SPEED LIMITER - VEHICLES Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE prompts you to set a speed. Press LIM
CONTROL CNCL/OFF again to switch the system off.
Principle of Operation Setting the Speed Limit
WARNING Press SET- with the limiter in standby

mode to set the limiter to the current
When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed. The set speed is stored and
vehicle speed may increase above appears in the information display.
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays. Press RES+ or SET- to select your desired
Failure to follow this warning could result speed limit. The set speed is stored and
in serious personal injury or death. appears in the information display.
Press LIM CNCL/OFF to cancel the limiter
The system allows you to set a speed to and place it in standby mode. The
which your vehicle becomes limited. The information display confirms the system
set speed sets the effective maximum is in standby mode by displaying the set
speed of your vehicle. You can temporarily speed limit as crossed out.
exceed the set speed if required, for Press RES+ to resume the limiter. The
example to overtake. information display confirms this is on by
showing the set speed again.
165
Driving Aids
Intentionally Exceeding the Speed You can change the speed limiter mode
Limiter Set Speed between manual and intelligent in the
information display. See General
Firmly depress the accelerator pedal to Information (page 70).
speed limiter set speed resumes when your You can select a permanent set speed
vehicle speed drops below the set speed tolerance that is in addition to the detected
limit. speed limit through the tolerance menu in
System Warnings Information (page 70).
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the Switching the System On and Off
display flashes and a tone sounds. Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in
If you intentionally exceed the set speed, prompts you to set a speed or show the
a warning appears in the information detected speed limit as the set speed. The
display. system does not limit the vehicle speed in
standby mode. Press LIM CNCL/OFF with
Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter the limiter in standby mode to switch the
(If Equipped)
system off.
WARNING Setting the Speed Limit
You are responsible for controlling • Press RES+ with the limiter in standby
your vehicle at all times. The system mode to set the limiter to the detected
is designed to be an aid and does not speed limit.
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to • Press SET- with the limiter in standby
follow this instruction could result in the mode to set the limiter to the current
loss of control of your vehicle, personal vehicle speed.
injury or death. • Press RES+ or SET- to gradually
change the current set speed to your
Note: When driving between countries that desired speed limit.
use different units of measure (miles per • Press LIM CNCL/OFF to cancel the
hour or kilometers per hour), there may be limiter and place it in standby mode.
a delay before the system changes between • Press RES+ to resume the limiter.
speed limit units. During this time, the
display screen for the speed limiter may The limit speed automatically adapts to
differ from the actual posted speed limit. the speed limit detected by the Traffic Sign
For best performance, make sure that the Recognition system. The system does not
navigation SD card is in the navigation react to speed limits shown with a
media port. supplementary sign by the Traffic Sign
Recognition system. If there is no speed
The system allows you to automatically limit information available, the limiter
limit your vehicle speed to the speed limit switches to standby mode.
that is detected by the Traffic Sign
Recognition system.
166
Driving Aids
Intentionally Exceeding the Speed WARNINGS

Limiter Set Speed Take regular rest breaks if you feel
Firmly depress the accelerator pedal to tired. Do not wait for the system to
temporarily switch the system off. The warn you.
speed limiter set speed resumes when your Certain driving styles may result in
vehicle speed drops below the set speed the system warning you even if you
limit. are not feeling tired.
System Warnings In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
If the set speed is automatically set to a function. Rain, snow and spray can
lower value than your current vehicle all limit sensor performance.
speed, the set speed indicator in the
information display flashes and you hear The system will not operate if the
an audible warning tone if you are sensor cannot track the road lane
continuously exceeding the set speed. markings.
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the If damage occurs in the immediate
set speed indicator in the information area surrounding the sensor, have
display flashes and you hear an audible your vehicle checked as soon as
warning tone. possible.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed, The system may not correctly
only the set speed indicator in the operate if your vehicle is fitted with
information display flashes. a suspension kit not approved by us.
If the Traffic Sign Recognition system
detects a speed limit outside the Note: The system may not operate correctly
operational speed range, you hear a single if you modify the ride height.
warning tone and the system switches to Note: Keep the windshield free from
standby mode. obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice.
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped) Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION function.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
WARNINGS activates at speeds above 64 km/h. When
You are responsible for controlling below the activation speed, the information
your vehicle at all times. The system display informs the driver that the system
is designed to be an aid and does not is unavailable.
with due care and attention. Failure to
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
The system may not function if the
sensor is blocked.
167
Driving Aids
System Display
When active, the system runs
automatically in the background and only
issues a warning if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
The alertness level is shown by six steps
in a colored bar.
E249505
The system automatically monitors your

driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain E131358
threshold, the system alerts you using a
The current assessment of your alertness
chime and a message in the information
is within a typical range.
display.
USING DRIVER ALERT

Switch the system on or off using the
E131359
When active, the system monitors your
alertness level based upon your driving The current assessment of your alertness
behavior in relation to the lane markings indicates that you should rest as soon as
and other factors. safely possible.
The status bar travels from left to right as
System Warnings
the calculated alertness level decreases.
Note: The system does not issue warnings As the meter approaches the rest icon, the
below approximately 64 km/h. color turns from green to yellow to red.
The warning system has two stages. First, The yellow position indicates the first
the system issues a temporary warning warning is active and the red position
that you need to take a rest. This message indicates the second warning is active.
only appears for a short time. If the system Note: If you have recently received a
detects further reduction in driving warning, you should consider resting, even
alertness, it may issue another warning if the current assessment is within the
that remains in the information display for typical range.
a longer time. You can press OK on the
steering wheel control to clear the warning.
168
Driving Aids
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the WARNINGS

road lane markings, or if your vehicle speed The system may not operate
drops below approximately 64 km/h, the properly if the sensor is blocked.
alertness level changes to grey for a short Keep the windshield free from
time and the information display informs obstruction.
you that the system is unavailable.
If damage occurs in the immediate
Resetting the System area surrounding the sensor, have
your vehicle checked as soon as
You can reset the system by either: possible.
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening Note: The system works above 64 km/h.
and closing the driver’s door. Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
Equipped) mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
WARNINGS The system may detect a light grip or touch
You are responsible for controlling on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
your vehicle at all times. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not Note: The system may not function if the
relieve you of your responsibility to drive camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
with due care and attention. Failure to damaged or dirty.
injury or death.
Always drive with due care and
attention when using and operating
the controls and features on your
vehicle.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can
all limit sensor performance.
E249505
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
The sensor may incorrectly track lane
markings as other structures or
objects. This can result in a false or
missed warning.
169
Driving Aids
When you switch the system on and the

system detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur, the system
notifies or assists you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and
information display. Depending on the
feature operation mode you select, the
system provides a warning by vibrating the
steering wheel or a steering assistance by
gently counter steering your vehicle back
into the lane.
Switching the System On and Off E165515
Note: The system on or off setting is stored Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey vibration when the system detects an
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey, unintended lane departure.
it defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.
E132099
Press the button on the direction indicator

E165516
stalk to switch the system on or off.
Aid only – Provides a steering assistance
System Settings toward the lane center when the system
The system has optional setting menus detects an unintended lane departure.
available. The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you switch the system on.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
170
Driving Aids
System Display
E165517
E151660
A Alert
B Aid If you switch the system on in alert mode,
an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
Alert + Aid – Provides a steering assistance markings appears in the information
toward the lane center. display.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the If you switch the system on in aid or alert
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the and aid mode, a separate white icon also
vehicle, the system provides a steering appears, or in some vehicles arrows display
wheel vibration. with the lane markings.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate When you switch off the system, the lane
general zone coverage. They do not provide marking graphics do not display.
exact zone parameters. While the system is on, the color of the
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity lane markings change to indicate the
of the steering wheel vibration used for the system status.
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting Gray: Indicates that the system is
does not affect the aid mode. temporarily unable to provide a warning
• Low. or intervention on the indicated side. This
may be because:
• Normal.
• High. • Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
171
Driving Aids
See Troubleshooting for additional Red: Indicates that the system is providing
information. or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or The system can be temporarily suppressed
intervention on the indicated side. at any time by the following:
Yellow: Indicates that the system is • Quick braking.
providing or has just provided a lane • Fast acceleration.
keeping aid intervention.
• Using the turn signal indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• Driving too close to the lane marking.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.

The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
172
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Alert and Aid mode?
High cross winds are present.

There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit

not approved by us, the system may not
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION correctly function.
(If Equipped) Note: Always fit Ford original parts when
replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may
Principle of Operation reduce system performance.
WARNINGS Note: The system may not detect all traffic
signs and may incorrectly read signs.
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace Note: Keep the windshield free from
your attention and judgment. You are obstructions for example bird droppings,
still responsible to drive with due care and insects and snow or ice.
attention. Note: The system is designed to detect
At all times, you are responsible for traffic signs meeting the Vienna convention.
controlling your vehicle, supervising Note: Traffic sign data provided by the
the system and intervening, if navigation system contains information
required. Failure to take care may result in integrated to the data carrier release.
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death. The sensor is behind the interior rear view
mirror. It continuously monitors road signs
The system may not function if the to inform you of the current maximum
sensor is blocked. speed limit and overtaking regulations.
The system detects recognizable traffic
Note: In cold and severe weather conditions signs, for example:
the system may not function. Rain, snow,
spray and large contrasts in lighting can all • Speed limit signs.
prevent the sensor from functioning • No overtaking signs.
correctly. • Speed limit cancellation signs.
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs • No overtaking cancellation signs.
in the immediate area surrounding the
sensor.
173
Driving Aids
Using Traffic Sign Recognition Switching the System On and Off
Setting the System Speed Warning You can switch the system on and off using
The system has a number of speed Information (page 70).
warning levels that you can set using the
information display. See General Note: The system remembers the last
Information (page 70). setting when you start your vehicle.
System Display STEERING

Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
E132994
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
The system can display two traffic signs ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
in parallel. switch the ignition on and watch the
You can view the status at any time using information display for a steering system
the information display. warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
The system displays recognizable traffic checked as soon as possible.
signs in four stages as follows:
If the system detects an error, you
1. All new traffic signs appear brighter may not feel a difference in the
than the others in the display. steering, however a serious condition
2. After a predetermined time they may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
display normally. soon as possible, failure to do so may
3. After a predetermined distance they result in loss of steering control.
are greyed out.
4. After another predetermined distance Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
they are deleted. power-assisted steering system. There is
no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If the system detects a supplementary
traffic sign, it displays below the respective If your vehicle loses electrical power while
traffic sign. For example, when passing a you are driving (or if the ignition is turned
reduced speed limit in wet road conditions off), you can steer the vehicle manually,
sign. but it takes more effort. Extreme
continuous steering may increase the effort
If your vehicle has a navigation system, it takes for you to steer. This occurs to
stored traffic sign data may influence the prevent internal overheating and
indicated speed limit value. permanent damage to your steering
174
Driving Aids
system. If this should occur, you will neither WARNINGS

lose the ability to steer the vehicle The system may fail or operate with
manually nor will it cause permanent reduced function during cold and
damage. Typical steering and driving severe weather conditions. Snow,
maneuvers will allow the system to cool ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect
and steering assist will return to normal. the system. Keep the front camera and
Steering Tips radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: your vehicle, serious personal injury or
• An improperly inflated tire. death.
• Uneven tire wear. In situations where the vehicle
camera has limited detection
• Loose or worn suspension capability, this may reduce system
components. performance. These situations include but
• Loose or worn steering components. are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
• Improper vehicle alignment. vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds with complex backgrounds, running
may also make the steering seem to pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians,
wander or pull. or pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
Equipped) death.
The system cannot help prevent all
WARNINGS crashes. Do not rely on this system
You are responsible for controlling to replace driver judgment and the
your vehicle at all times. The system need to maintain a safe distance and
is designed to be an aid and does not speed.
with due care and attention. Failure to
Note: To achieve full system performance,
you must break in the braking system. See
General Information (page 136).
injury or death.
Note: The warning indicator may flash for
The system does not detect vehicles
a short period of time when you start your
that are driving in a different
vehicle.
direction, cyclists or animals. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of Using the Pre-Collision Assist
control of your vehicle, serious personal System
injury or death.
The system does not operate during The Pre-Collision Assist system is active
hard acceleration or steering. Failure at speeds above approximately 5 km/h
to take care may lead to a crash or and pedestrian detection is active at
personal injury. speeds up to 80 km/h.
175
Driving Aids
Active Braking: Active braking may

activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
E156130
the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching the crash completely.
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
traveling in the same direction as yours, or alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
a pedestrian within your driving path, the then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
system provides three levels of though the manufacturer recommends
functionality: using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Distance Indication and Alert

This function provides a graphical
indication of the time gap to other
preceding vehicles traveling in the same
direction. The distance indication and alert
screen in the information display shows a
graphic similar to the one that follows.
E255268
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
Alert: When active, the system provides a
flashing visual warning and an audible
E190004
warning sound.
Brake Support: Assists the driver in If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
reducing collision speed by preparing the small, a red visual indication displays to
brake system for rapid braking. Brake the driver.
support does not automatically activate Note: Distance indication and alert
the brakes, but if the driver presses the deactivates and the graphics do not display
brake pedal even lightly, brake support when adaptive cruise control is active.
could add additional braking up to full
force.
Speed Sensitivity Graphics Distance Gap Time Gap

100 km/h Normal Grey >25 m >0.9sec
100 km/h Normal Yellow 17–25 m 0.6sec - 0.9sec
100 km/h Normal Red <17 m <0.6sec
176
Driving Aids
Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings Blocked Sensors

You can adjust alert and distance alert
sensitivity to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 70).
You can switch the distance alert and
indication function off using the
information display controls. See General
If required, you can switch active braking
off using the information display controls.
See General Information (page 70).
Note: Active braking automatically turns
on every time you switch the ignition on.
E271779
If a message regarding a blocked sensor

or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
are obstructed. The radar sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. With an obstructed
radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does
not function and cannot detect a vehicle
ahead. With the front camera obstructed,
the Pre-Collision Assist system does not
respond to pedestrians or stationary
vehicles and the system performance on
moving vehicles reduces. The following
table lists possible causes and actions for
when this message displays.
177
Driving Aids
Cause Action
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
or obstructed in some way.
tion.
Wait a short time. It may take several
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
minutes for the radar to detect that there
but the message remains in the display.
is no obstruction.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
with the radar signals. automatically reactivate a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
of the road may interfere with the radar
automatically reactivate a short time after
signals.
the weather conditions improve.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
radar checked for proper coverage and
impact.
operation.
The windshield in front of the camera is Clean the outside of the windshield in front
dirty or obstructed in some way. of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is Wait a short time. It may take several
clean but the message remains in the minutes for the camera to detect that there
display. is no obstruction.
Note: Proper system operation requires a Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
clear view of the road by the camera. Have at the camera or a potential misalignment
any windshield damage in the area of the condition, a message may display in the
camera's field of view repaired. information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. When operational
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
zone may change. This could cause missed
or false vehicle detections. Contact an temperature around the sensor decreases
authorized dealer to have the radar checked or the sensor automatically recalibrates
for proper coverage and operation. successfully.
178
Load Carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

To service the roller shutter, see an
WARNINGS authorized dealer.
Use load securing straps to an
approved standard, e.g. DIN. Note: You must secure the loads carried in
Make sure that you secure all loose the loadspace.
items properly. Note: Use the pull strap to close the roller
shutter.
Place luggage and other loads as low
and as far forward as possible within Note: Make sure that the roller shutter is
the luggage or loadspace. free of any obstruction before you open or
close it. For example; snow or ice.
Do not exceed the maximum front
and rear axle loads for your vehicle. Note: Water and dust may enter the
loadspace with the roller shutter closed.
Do not exceed the maximum gross
vehicle weight. See Vehicle Operation
Identification Plate (page 266).
The roller shutter has four locking
Do not place solid objects outside positions:
the loadspace area for example
timber and sheet material. 1. Fully closed.
2. 1/3 open.
Note: The center of the payload should be 3. 2/3 open.
located within the wheelbase of the vehicle.
4. Fully open.
Note: Avoid one sided load distribution. Note: The locking mechanism does not lock
Note: Uneven load distribution could result automatically as it passes each locking
in unacceptable handling and braking position.
characteristics.
Locking and unlocking into
position
LUGGAGE COVERS (If Equipped)
Note: You will hear a click as the roller
WARNINGS shutter passes each locking position.
Do not move your vehicle with Note: Use the pull strap to control the roller
people or animals in the loadspace. shutter movement while opening.
Do not use the roller shutter pull Lock the roller shutter at the required
strap to secure loads. locking position by pulling the pull strap to
the left.
Do not sit, stand or place anything
on the roller shutter.
179
Load Carrying
E154609
Unlock the roller shutter by pulling the pull

strap to the right or by pressing the lock
buttons.
180
Load Carrying
E154610
WARNINGS
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD Do not exceed the maximum
CARRIERS (If Equipped) permissible roof rail load of 80 kg,
including the roof rack.
WARNINGS
If you use a roof rack, the fuel Check the security of the roof rack load:
consumption of your vehicle will be • Before starting.
higher and you may experience
• After driving 50 km.
different driving characteristics.
• At 1,000 km intervals.
Read and follow the manufacturers
instructions when you are fitting a
roof rack.
181
Load Carrying
A B C
E131684
WARNINGS
A Roof Rail.
B Sports bar. Each tie down point has a maximum
load rating. Exceeding this may lead
C Box rail. to serious injury and vehicle damage.
Always inspect the tie down points
Note: Do not sit or stand on items B or C.
before use.
Note: Do not use item C to secure loads.
Note: To reduce fuel consumption, roof Note: The number of tie down points may
rack cross bars and accessories should be vary depending on your vehicle model.
removed when not in use.
Type 1
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES (If WARNING
Equipped) Do not exceed the load rating for the
tie down points.
Tie Down Points
WARNINGS
Use the tie down points only for
restraining the loads within the
loadspace. Using tie down points for
any other purpose may lead to serious
injury or vehicle damage. Do not use the
tie down points for towing.
182
Load Carrying
E131643 E133896
Load Rating of Type 1 Tie Down Points:

300 kg. A
Type 2
WARNING
Do not exceed the load rating for the B
tie down points.
C
D
E134098
A Cleat.
B Bezel.
C Spring.
E133894
D Pin.
Load Rating of Type 2 Tie Down Points: Do not use the tie down points under the
200 kg. following conditions:
Type 3 • Any sign of wear or damage.
• Rail channels supporting the tie down
WARNING
points show any sign of wear, damage
Do not exceed the load rating for the or distortion.
tie down points.
183
Load Carrying
• Locking bezel is damaged or broken or 1. Engage the base of the tie down point
will not lock into place. into the rail channel while holding the
• Not seated correctly within the support cleat vertically.
rail. 2. Slide along the rail until the pin on the
Load Rating of Type 3 Tie Down Points base of the tie down engages in a
(Rope Hook): 250 kg. desired hole on the rail.
3. Push the tie down in and rotate a
Fitting the Type 3 Tie Down Points quarter turn clockwise until the tie
down cleat is horizontal and the locking
WARNING bezel “snaps” into place.
Bezel must be fully engage into the
rail to secure the tie down point for Removing the Type 3 Tie Down Points
safe use. The word ‘Not Locked’ will 1. Grasp the locking bezel between the
be visible in the incorrectly installed tie thumb and fingers using the finger
downs. recess.
2. Pull the bezel away from the rail until
the base of the tie down point is fully
disengaged from the rail channel.
3. Turn the tie down point a quarter turn
anticlockwise until it snaps out of the
2 rail.
Load Rest
WARNINGS
1 A loaded load rest alters the vehicle's
center of gravity and aerodynamics.
Take care when cornering, driving in
crosswinds and at high speeds.
Do not exceed the permissible gross
weight. See Vehicle Identification
Plate (page 266).
E134099
184
Load Carrying
E131682
Note: Secure luggage or cargo placed on

the load rest with the load rest stoppers.
185
Tailgate
MANUAL TAILGATE (If Equipped)

Note: Do not exceed the maximum
permissible tailgate load of 220 kg.
Note: Vehicles with a tow bar or rear
bumper should not have the tailgate
lowered without the support cables in place.
Note: Make sure that you keep a firm grip
on the tailgate to prevent it from dropping
down.
Lowering the Tailgate

Note: Do not lower the tailgate if a load
bed extension is fitted.
Note: Maximum permissible load for a
tailgate with a load bed extension is 50 kg.
3
E135868
1. Raise the tailgate slightly.

2. Pull the support cable rearward.
3. Release the support cable from the
tailgate.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to pull out the
support cable on the other side.
Note: Lower the tailgate for better ingress
or egress of the loads.
186
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER • Place loads as low as possible and

central to the axle of your trailer. For
WARNINGS best stability of the trailer in an unladen
vehicle, place the load in the trailer
Do not exceed 100 km/h. Failure to towards the nose within the maximum
follow this instruction could result in nose load as this gives the best
the loss of control of your vehicle, stability. See Recommended Towing
personal injury or death. Weights (page 188).
Do not exceed the maximum gross • Reduce the stipulated maximum
combination mass stated on the permitted gross combination mass by
vehicle identification plate. Failure 10% for every additional 1,000 m in
to follow this instruction could result in high altitude regions above 1,000 m.
personal injury.
• Use a low gear when descending a
Do not exceed the maximum vertical steep downhill slope.
load on the tow ball. Failure to follow
The stability of your vehicle to trailer
this instruction could result in the
combination is very much dependent on
the quality of the trailer.
injury or death.
Do not tow a trailer unless your
vehicle is fitted with a compatible TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
aftermarket electronic trailer brake Equipped)
controller. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your Note: The system automatically turns on
vehicle, personal injury or death. For every time you switch the ignition on.
additional information and assistance, we
recommend that you contact an Note: Switching off the stability control will
authorized dealer. turn off the system.
Do not exceed the maximum front Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
and rear axle loads for your vehicle. sway, but reduces it once it begins.
The anti-lock brake system does not Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
control the trailer brakes. from swaying.
Trailer sway control is an enhanced feature
of stability control system and
Note: Vehicles with the electronic stability
automatically detects when an attached
program have trailer stability control
trailer starts to sway. This feature applies
included.
your vehicle brakes at individual wheels
When towing a trailer: and if necessary, reduces engine power. If
• Obey country specific regulations for the trailer begins to sway, slow your vehicle
towing a trailer. down, pull safely to the side of the road
and check for correct load distribution.
• Do not exceed 100 km/h even if a See Towing a Trailer (page 187).
country allows higher speeds under
certain conditions. Note: Shifting to 4x4 Low will deactivate
trailer sway control.
Note: Switching on the electronic locking
differential will turn off the system.
187
Towing
Note: To switch off the trailer sway control RECOMMENDED TOWING

as required, See Stability Control (page
141). WEIGHTS
WARNINGS
Towing trailers beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer weight
exceeds the limit of your vehicle and
could result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural damage,
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the
trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer
hitch could reduce the hitch rating.
Towing Capacities
Gross Max Tow Max Tow
Variant Transmission Drive FDR Combination Without With Trailer
Mass Trailer Brake Brake
2WD
1
3.55 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
6-Speed
Manual 2WD
2
3.55 5,425 kg 750 kg 2,500 kg
2.0L TDCi Transmission
Diesel
4WD
1
3.55 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
(132 kW /
180 PS)
10-Speed 2WD
1
3.31 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
Automatic
Transmission 4WD
1
3.31 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
6-Speed
2.0L TDCi Manual 4WD
1
3.31 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
Bi-Turbo Transmission
Diesel
(156 kW / 10-Speed 2WD
1
3.31 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
213 PS)
3
Automatic
Transmission 4WD
1
3.31 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
2WD
1
3.15 5,000 kg 750 kg 2,500 kg
2.2L TDCi
6-Speed
Diesel
Manual 2WD
2
3.15 5,425 kg 750 kg 2,500 kg
(118 kW /
Transmission
160 PS)
4WD
1
3.55 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
188
Towing
Gross Max Tow Max Tow

Variant Transmission Drive FDR Combination Without With Trailer
Mass Trailer Brake Brake
6-Speed 2WD
1
3.73 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
Automatic
Transmission 4WD
1
3.73 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
6-Speed
Manual 4WD
1
3.55 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
3.2L TDCi Transmission
Diesel
(147 kW / 6-Speed 1
3.73 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
2WD
200 PS) Automatic
Transmission 4WD
1
3.73 6,000 kg 750 kg 3,500 kg
1 High Ride.
2 Low Ride.
3 Excludes Raptor. See your Raptor supplement.
Trailer Nose Weight

WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum vertical load on the tow ball. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
Variant Minimum Nose Weight Maximum Nose Weight
All 10% of the towed weight 350 kg
189
Towing
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON WARNINGS

FOUR WHEELS It is recommended not to tow with
the drive wheels on the ground.
All Vehicles However, if it is required to move your
vehicle from a dangerous location, do not
WARNINGS tow your vehicle faster than 20 km/h or
Switch the ignition on when towing further than 20 km.
the vehicle. Do not tow your vehicle backward.
The brake and steering assistance
will not operate unless the engine is In the event of a mechanical failure
running. Press the brake pedal harder of the transmission the drive wheels
and allow for increased stopping distances must be lifted clear of the ground.
and heavier steering.
Do not tow your vehicle if the
Too much tension in the tow rope ambient temperature is below 0°C.
could cause damage to your vehicle
or the vehicle that is towing.
Do not use a rigid tow bar on the
front towing eye.
When towing your vehicle you must
select neutral.
Do not tow the vehicle with all
wheels on the ground while in 4WD
mode. Tow your vehicle with all
wheels off the ground or all wheels on the
ground while the vehicle is in 2WD mode
in an event of a breakdown or mechanical
failure of the transmission.
Drive off slowly and smoothly without

jerking the vehicle you are towing.
Vehicles With Automatic

Transmission
WARNINGS
If a speed of 20 km/h and a distance
of 20 km is to be exceeded the drive
wheels must be lifted clear of the
ground.
190
Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN You must only drive your vehicle for a short

distance if the engine overheats. The
Tires distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
New tires need to be run-in for terrain. The engine continues to operate
approximately 500 km. During this time, with limited power for a short period of
you may experience different driving time.
characteristics. If the engine temperature continues to rise,
Brakes and Clutch the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The
air conditioning switches off and the engine
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch cooling fan operates continually.
if possible for the first 150 km in town and 1. Gradually reduce your speed and stop
for the first 1,500 km on freeways. your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Engine
2. Immediately switch the engine off to
Avoid driving too fast during the first prevent severe engine damage.
1,500 km. Vary your speed frequently and
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
change up through the gears early. Do not
labor the engine. 4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 222).
Vehicles With a Diesel Engine 5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
During the first 3,000 km, you may notice possible.
a ticking sound when your vehicle slows
down. This is due to adjustments of your COLD WEATHER
new diesel engine and is normal.
PRECAUTIONS
REDUCED ENGINE The functional operation of some
PERFORMANCE components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -25°C.
WARNING
If you continue to drive your vehicle OFF-ROAD DRIVING
when the engine is overheating, the
engine could stop without warning. In addition to providing an excellent
Failure to follow this instruction could on-road driving experience, your vehicle
result in the loss of control of your vehicle. excels at all types of off-road driving. The
truck has been designed and equipped to
allow you to explore those places where
If the engine coolant temperature gauge the road doesn’t take you whether it’s a
needle moves to the upper limit position, forest trail or the open desert. Before going
the engine is overheating. See Gauges off-roading, consult with your local
(page 62). governmental agencies to determine
designated off-road trails and recreation
areas. Also, be sure to understand any
off-road vehicle registration requirements
for the area in which you plan on driving.
191
Driving Hints
Before taking your vehicle off-roading, a • When running with other vehicles, it is
basic vehicle inspection should be done to recommended that communication is
make sure that the vehicle is in top working used, and the lead vehicle notify other
condition. vehicles of obstacles that could cause
It is always recommended that at least potential vehicle damage.
two vehicles are used while off-roading. • Always keep available ground
The buddy system helps make sure that clearance in mind and pick a route that
help is close at hand should a vehicle minimizes the risk of catching the
become stuck or damaged. It is also wise underside of the vehicle on an obstacle.
to take supplies such as a first aid kit, • When negotiating low speed obstacles,
supply of water, tow strap, cell or satellite applying light brake pressure in
phone with you any time an off-road conjunction with the throttle will help
excursion is planned. prevent the vehicle from jerking and
will allow you to negotiate the obstacle
Basic Off-road Driving Techniques in a more controlled manner. Using 4L
• Grip the steering wheel with thumbs will also help with this.
on the outside of the rim. This will • Use and equip supplemental safety
reduce the risk of injury due to abrupt equipment as discussed later in this
steering wheel motions that occur chapter.
when negotiating rough terrain. Do not • Please consult your local off-road
grip the steering wheel with thumbs group for other helpful tips.
inside the rim.
• Off-roading requires a high degree of
• Throttle, brake and steering inputs concentration. Even if your local law
should be made in a smooth and does not prohibit alcohol use while
controlled manner. Sudden inputs to driving off-road, Ford strongly
the controls can cause loss of traction recommends against drinking if you
or upset the vehicle, especially while plan to off-road.
on sloped terrain or while crossing
obstacles such as rocks or logs. Crossing Obstacles
• Look ahead on your route noting
• Review the path ahead before
upcoming obstacles, surface texture
attempting to cross any obstacle. It is
or color changes or any other factors
best if the obstacle is reviewed from
which may indicate a change in
outside the vehicle so that there is a
available traction, and adjust the
good understanding of terrain condition
vehicle speed and route accordingly.
both in front of and behind the
During pre-run, mark obstacles with
obstacle.
GPS markers to make sure appropriate
speeds are used to avoid potential • Approach obstacles slowly and slowly
vehicle damage. inch the vehicle over.
• When driving off-road, if the front or
rear suspension is bottoming-out and
or excessive contact with the
skid-plates is encountered, reduce
vehicle speed to avoid potential
damage to the vehicle.
192
Driving Hints
• If a large obstacle such as a rock After Off-Road Driving

cannot be avoided, choose a path that
places the rock directly under the tire It is important to complete a full vehicle
rather than the undercarriage of the inspection after off-road driving. Some
vehicle. This will help prevent damage items to check include:
to the vehicle. • Make sure that you inflate the tires to
• Ditches and washouts should be the proper tire pressure as indicated on
crossed at a 45 degree angle, allowing the tire placard.
each wheel to independently cross the • Check the wheels and undercarriage
obstacle. for a buildup of mud or debris, which
can cause vehicle vibration.
Hill Climbing
• Make sure that the grille and radiator
WARNING are clear of any obstructions that may
affect cooling.
Extreme care should be used when
• Make sure that the brakes are in proper
steering the vehicle in reverse down
working order and free of any mud,
a slope so as not to cause the vehicle
stones and debris, which can become
to swerve out of control.
trapped around the brake rotor,
backing plate and caliper.
• Always attempt to climb a steep hill
• Check that the air filter is clean and dry.
along the fall line of the slope and not
diagonally. • Inspect for torn or punctured boots on
ball joints, half shafts, steering gears.
• If the vehicle is unable to make it up
the hill, DO NOT attempt to turn back • Inspect exhaust system for damage or
down the slope. Place the vehicle in looseness.
low range and slowly back down in • Inspect undercarriage fasteners. If any
reverse. are loose or damaged, tighten or
• When descending a steep slope, select replace and make sure that you use the
low gear and engage hill descent proper torque specification.
control. Use the throttle and brake • Inspect the tires for any cuts in the
pedals to control your descent speed tread or sidewall area. Also inspect the
as described earlier in this section using sidewall for any bulge, indicating
hill descent control. Note that hill damage to the tire.
descent control is functional in reverse • Inspect the wheels for dents, cracks,
and should be used in this situation. or other damage.
Water Wading
See Driving Through Water (page 193).
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNINGS
Drive through water in an emergency
only and not as part of normal
driving.
Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
193
Driving Hints
Note: For Chassis Cab vehicles or where a When driving in water, maintain a low
3rd party tray has been fitted, confirm the speed and do not stop your vehicle. After
installation is in line with the Ford Body driving through water and as soon as it is
Builders Guide. This ensures fuel tank safe to do so:
breathers and drive line breathers are • Depress the brake pedal lightly to
located above the specified water wading check that the brakes are functioning
lines. correctly.
In an emergency, you can drive your vehicle • Check that the horn works.
through water to a maximum depth as
shown and at a maximum speed of 7 km/h. • Check that your vehicle's lamps are
You must take extra care when driving fully operational.
through flowing water. • Check the power assistance of the
steering system.
4x2
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Use a floor mat designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle that does not
X obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
injury or death.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
E137140
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
X 600mm (23.6 inches) injury.
Secure the floor mat to both
4x2 (Vehicles with Increased Ride
retention devices so that it cannot
Height) and 4x4
slip out of position and interfere with
the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
Do not place additional floor mats
or any other covering on top of the
Y original floor mats. This could result
in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
E137139
Y 800mm (31.5 inches)
194
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor

mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
195
HAZARD FLASHERS Super cab

You can secure the warning triangle in the
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
tool bin below the rear seats.
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them
off.
E131838
WARNING TRIANGLE (If Equipped)

1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
Single cab 2. Remove the cover (if equipped).
You can secure the warning triangle behind Double cab

the passenger seat.
E131839
1. Fold the rear seatback forward.
E131837
1. Fold the seatback forward.
196
FUEL SHUTOFF (If Equipped) 4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
WARNING without pressing the brake pedal.
If your vehicle has been involved in a 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
crash, have the fuel system checked. steps 1 through 4.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure WARNINGS
that various systems are safe to restart. Batteries normally produce explosive
Once the vehicle determines the systems gases which can cause personal
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to injury. Therefore, do not allow
restart. flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
the battery, always shield your face and
not restart after your third attempt, contact
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
a qualified technician.
ventilation.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
Keep batteries out of reach of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
moderate to severe crash. Not every
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
impact causes a shutoff.
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash, near the battery to protect against possible
you may restart your vehicle. splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
If your vehicle has a key system: contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
1. Switch off the ignition. 15 minutes and get prompt medical
2. Switch to start position. attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
3. Switch off the ignition. physician immediately.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump. Preparing Your Vehicle
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat Do not attempt to push-start your
steps 1 through 4. automatic transmission vehicle.
If your vehicle has a push button start Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
system: with an automatic transmission may cause
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your transmission damage.
vehicle. Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
2. Press the brake pedal and vehicle.
START/STOP to switch on your Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
vehicle. disabled vehicle as this could damage the
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal vehicle electrical system.
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
197
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the to the positive (+) terminal of the
two vehicles do not touch. discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
Connecting the Jumper Cables (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
WARNINGS of the booster vehicle battery.
Do not connect the end of the 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
second cable to the negative (-) negative (-) terminal of the booster
terminal of the battery to be jumped. vehicle battery.
A spark may cause an explosion of the 4. Make the final connection of the
gases that surround the battery. negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
Do not use fuel lines, engine valve part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
covers, windshield wiper arms, the away from the battery and the fuel
intake manifold, or hood latch as injection system, or connect the
ground points. negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
3 4
2 E205764
Note: You can use the optional connection

point location shown above to ground your
vehicle.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
E142664 engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
198
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been 5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
started, run both vehicle engines for an minute.
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
1
2
3 E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a

E142665
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable your roadside assistance service provider.
from the disabled vehicle. We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
2. Remove the jumper cable on the dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
vehicle battery. not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
any other means, vehicle damage may
positive (+) terminal of the booster
occur.
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
199
We produce a towing manual for all

authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
TOWING POINTS
Note: Depending on your vehicle, some
towing points may be optional.
E271922
A Front towing eye.

B Rear towing eye.
200
Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Left-Hand Drive
E264973
E206157
A Pre-fuse box.
WARNINGS
B Engine compartment fuse box.
Always disconnect the battery before
C Passenger compartment fuse servicing high current fuses.
box.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
D High current fuse box. always replace the cover to the
Note: Right-hand drive similar. power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
Pre-fuse Box (If Equipped)
The engine compartment fuse box has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
When you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 225).
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
E206156
Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box in the

engine compartment attached to the
positive battery post. This box contains
several high current fuses. If replacement
of these high current fuses is required, see
201
Fuses
High Current Fuse Box (If Equipped) The fuse box is behind the access cover on
the outermost side of the steering column.
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
E206158
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box in the reservoirs.
engine compartment below the engine
compartment fuse box. This box contains The engine compartment fuse box has
several high current fuses. If replacement high-current fuses that protect your
of these high current fuses is required, see vehicle's main electrical systems from
an authorized dealer. overloads. When you disconnect and
reconnect the battery, you will need to
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box reset some features. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 225). Lift the release
levers at the rear of the cover to remove it.
E206167
202
Fuses
E190797
Fuse or Relay Fuse Rating Protected Component

Number
1 1 Not used.
15A
2 - Starter motor solenoid relay.
3 2 Rain sensor.
5A
4 - Blower motor relay.
5 1 Auxiliary power point 3 - console rear.
20A
6 - Not used. (2.2L, 3.2L).
- Water-in-fuel filter heater relay (2.0L).
7 2 Powertrain control module.
20A
8 2 Volumetric control valve (2.2L, 3.2L).
20A
203
Fuses

Number
EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) cooler bypass (2.2L,

3.2L).
Temperature mass air flow (2.2L, 3.2L).
EGR cooler bypass control - vacuum solenoid valve
(2.0L).
9 - Powertrain control module relay.
10 1 Auxiliary power point 1 - instrument panel.
20A
11 3 Not used (spare). (2.2L, 3.2L).
15A
Glow plug module (2.0L).
12 3 Fan.
15A
Glow plug module (2.2L, 3.2L).
Turbo bypass valve actuator (2.0L).
Wastegate actuator (2.0L).
A/C (air conditioning) compressor and control valve
(2.0L).
Coolant pump (2.0L).
13 3 Not used.
15A
14 3 Not used.
15A
15 - Run/start relay.
16 1 Auxiliary power point 2 - instrument panel.
20A
17 1 Auxiliary power point - rear cargo area.
20A
18 2 Fuel pump relay coil (2.2L, 3.2L).
10A
19 2 Electric power assist steering.
10A
20 2 Lighting control.
10A
Headlamp leveling motor.
21 2 Transmission control module.
15A
22 2 Air conditioning compressor.
10A
23 2 Rear parking aid camera.
7.5A
Adaptive cruise control.
Head up display.
204
Fuses

Number
IPMA (image processing module A)

24 2 Air conditioning pressure switch (manual transmission)
10A
(2.2L, 3.2L).
Not used (spare) (2.0L).
25 3 Anti-lock brake system.
10A
26 3 Not used (spare).
10A
27 - Not used.
28 2 Powertrain control module.
10A
29 - Not used.
30 - Not used.
31 - Not used.
32 - Fuel pump relay.
33 - A/C clutch relay.
34 2 Center high mount stop lamp.
15A
35 2 Transmission control module.
15A
36 - Not used.
37 2 Heated exterior mirror.
10A
38 - High-intensity discharge headlamp relay.
39 - 4WD (four-wheel drive) power relay.
40 - Center high mount stop lamp relay.
41 - Horn relay.
42 - 4WD motor no. 2 relay.
43 - Not used.
5A
45 2 Not used (spare) (2.2L, 3.2L).
5A
Water-in-fuel filter heater relay (2.0L).
205
Fuses

Number

10A
47 3 Brake pedal switch.
10A
48 2 Horn.
20A
49 2 Steering column lock.
20A
50 - Not used.
51 - Not used.
52 - Not used.
53 2 Rear differential lock.
15A
54 - Not used.
55 - Not used.
86 - 4WD motor no. 1 relay.
1 M-type fuse.
2 Micro 2 fuse.
3 Micro 3 fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom

There are fuses on the bottom of the fuse
box. To access the bottom of the fuse box:
206
Fuses
A 2 3
1 5
E206171 E206174
3. Move the fuse box toward the rear side

A Towards the front side of the
of the engine compartment and rotate
vehicle.
as shown.
1. Release the two latches on both sides 4. Pivot the rear side of the fuse box to
of the fuse box. access the bottom side.
2. Raise the rear side of the fuse box from 5. Release the two latches to open the
the cradle. fuse cover.
207
Fuses
E190798
Fuse or Relay Number Fuse Rating Protected Component
56 1 High-intensity discharge
20A
headlamp - right.
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 2 4WD.
25A
60 2 Fuel pump control module.
30A
30A
62 2 Body control module 1 -
50A
lighting.
63 1 High-intensity discharge
20A
headlamp - left.
208
Fuses
64 1 Trailer tow connector.

20A
20A
30A
67 2 Body control module 2 -
50A
lighting.
68 1 Rear window defroster.
20A
69 1 Anti-lock brake system
30A
valves.
70 - Not used.
71 - Not used. (2.2L, 3.2L).
2 Water-in-fuel filter heater
40A
(2.0L).
72 - Not used.
73 1 Trailer module.
30A
74 1 Driver power seat.
20A
75 - Not used.
76 - Not used.
77 - Not used.
78 - Not used.
79 2 Blower motor.
40A
80 - Not used.
81 1 Inverter.
40A
82 2 Anti-lock brake system.
60A
83 1 Windshield wiper motor.
30A
84 1 Starter motor solenoid.
30A
209
Fuses
85 - Not used.
87 2 Trailer module.
40A
1 M-type fuse.
2 LPJ-type fuse.
Battery Mounted Fuse Link
E200936
Fuse Number Fuse Rating Protected Component
225A Alternator. (2.2L, 3.2L).

1
300A Alternator. (2.0L).
2 125A Electronic power assist steering.
210
Fuses
High Current Fuse Box
E206158
Fuse Number Fuse Rating Fuse Rating
1 70A Glow plug module.

2 125A Body control module.
3 50A Body control module.
4 - Busbar through to power distribution box.
5 100A Auxiliary heater.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

The fuse box is below and outboard of the
steering column behind the access cover.
211
Fuses
E145984
Fuse or Relay Fuse Rating Fuse Rating

Number
1 - Not used.

7.5A
Driver door latch.
3 20A
1
Fuel flap unlock relay.

5A

20A

10A

10A

10A

10A

5A
11 2 Interior motion sensor.

5A
212
Fuses

Number
Electronic control panel.

12 7.5A
2
Climate control.
Instrument cluster.
13 7.5A
2
Steering column control module.
Data link connector.

10A
Gateway module.
15 10A
2
Data link connector.
OBD (on-board diagnostic) II (RHD).

15A
17 2 Battery backed sounder.

5A
Ignition switch.
18 5A
2
Push button start.

7.5A

7.5A
Humidity and in car temperature sensor.
21 5A
2
Heater (PTC (positive temperature coefficient)).

5A
Inverter.
23 10A
1
Door lock switch.
24 1 Central locking system.

20A
25 1 Driver door power window.

30A

30A

30A

20A

30A
213
Fuses

Number

30A

15A
Radio transceiver module.
SYNC.
32 10A
1
Global positioning system module.
Multi-function display.
Door entry remote.
33 1 Audio unit.
20A
34 1 Run/start relay.
30A
35 1 Restraints control module.

5A
Auto-dimming interior mirror.
36 15A
1
Mirror adjust switch.

20A
38 3 Power windows.
30A
1 Micro2 fuse.
2 Micro3 fuse.
3 PTC fuse.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating. E217331
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and If electrical components in the vehicle are
could start a fire. not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
214
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout Fuse Type
A Micro 2
B Micro 3
C Maxi
D Mini
E M Case
F J Case
G J Case Low Profile
215
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Check Monthly

• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
WARNINGS (page 221).
Switch the ignition off and apply the • Engine coolant level. See Engine
parking brake. Coolant Check (page 222).
Do not touch the electronic ignition • Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
system parts after you have switched • Air conditioning operation.
the ignition on or when the engine is
running. The system operates at high • Parking brake operation.
voltage. Failure to adhere to this warning • Horn operation.
could result in serious personal injury or • Tightness of lug nuts.
death.
Keep your hands and clothing clear
of the engine cooling fan.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Make sure that you fit filler caps securely Opening the Hood
after carrying out maintenance checks.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. Authorized repairers are best
qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly, with a wide range of highly
specialized tools.
In addition to regular servicing, we
recommend that you carry out the
following checks.
Check Daily
• Exterior lamps.
• Interior lamps.
• Warning lamps and indicators.
Check When Refueling 1

E206129
• Brake fluid level. See Brake and
Clutch Fluid Check (page 223).
1. Pull the hood release lever. See
• Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid Instrument Panel Overview (page
Check (page 223). 12).
• Tire pressures. See Technical
Specifications (page 255).
• Tire condition. See Wheels and Tires
(page 239).
216
Maintenance
E201861
E271769
2. Slightly lift the hood. 5. The hood strut automatically supports

the hood.
3. Move the catch to the left for vehicles
with left hand drive. Move the catch to Closing the Hood
the right for vehicle with right hand
drive. 1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight.
4. Open the hood.
2. If necessary, apply a downward force
on the leading edge of the hood prior
to engage with the latch, to latch the
hood fully.
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L TDCI BI-TURBO DIESEL (156

KW/213 PS) (YN) /2.0L TDCI DIESEL (132 KW/180 PS) (YM)
217
Maintenance
E266111
A Engine coolant reservoir. See F Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake

Engine Coolant Check (page and Clutch Fluid Check (page
222). 223).
B Air filter. G Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 201).
C Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 221). H Battery connection. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 197).
D Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 221). I Windshield washer fluid. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 223).
E Fuel filter water trap. See
Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap (page 223).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.2L DIESEL
218
Maintenance
E265477
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. E Fuel filter water trap. See

See Engine Coolant Check Draining the Fuel Filter Water
(page 222). Trap (page 224).
B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir F Engine junction box. See Fuses
cap. See Brake and Clutch (page 201).
Fluid Check (page 223). G Vehicle identification plate. See
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Capacities and Specifications
Oil Dipstick (page 221). (page 257).
D Engine oil filler cap. See Engine H Battery.
Oil Check (page 221). I Washer fluid reservoir cap. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 223).
J Air cleaner.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.2L DIESEL
219
Maintenance
E266432
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. H Battery.

See Engine Coolant Check I Washer fluid reservoir cap. See
(page 222). Washer Fluid Check (page 223).
B Air cleaner. 1
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick
1
C Engine oil dipstick . See Engine are colored for easy identification.
Oil Dipstick (page 221).
1
D Engine oil filler cap . See Engine
Oil Check (page 221).
E Fuel filter water trap. See
Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap (page 223).
F Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
cap. See Brake and Clutch
Fluid Check (page 223).
G Engine junction box. See Fuses
(page 201).
220
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
TDCI BI-TURBO DIESEL (156 dipstick and remove it again to check
KW/213 PS) (YN) /2.0L TDCI the oil level.
DIESEL (132 KW/180 PS) (YM) If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 267).
A B
Note: Check the oil level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
Note: Do not use oil additives or other
E226469 engine treatments. Under certain conditions,
they may damage the engine.
A Minimum.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
B Maximum. reaches its normal level after approximately
5,000 km.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.2L Adding Oil

DIESEL/3.2L DIESEL WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.
A B If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down. Failure
to take care may result in personal injury.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running. Failure to take
care may result in personal injury.
E71362
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add oil that meets Ford specifications.
A MIN See Capacities and Specifications
(page 267).
B MAX
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
ENGINE OIL CHECK Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level maximum mark may cause engine damage.
ground.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
2. Switch off the engine and wait 10 absorbent cloth immediately.
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
221
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
WARNINGS as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems.
Do not dispose of coolant in the
household refuse or the public Adding Coolant
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility. WARNINGS
Do not put coolant in the windshield Do not remove the coolant reservoir
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the cap when the cooling system is hot.
windshield, coolant could make it Wait 10 minutes for the cooling
difficult to see through the windshield. system to cool down. Cover the coolant
reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent
the possibility of scalding and slowly
remove the cap. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
Undiluted coolant is flammable and
may ignite if spilled on a hot exhaust.
We do not recommend the use of recycled

engine coolant since a Ford-approved
recycling process is not yet available.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle.
Note: Add a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze
and water or prediluted engine coolant that
E170684
meets the correct specification.
Make sure that the coolant level is Note: Use fluids which meet the
between the MIN and MAX marks on the specifications or requirements defined. Use
coolant reservoir. If the coolant level is at of other fluids may lead to damage which
or below the minimum mark, immediately is not covered by the vehicle Warranty. See
add coolant. Capacities and Specifications (page 257).
The coolant concentration should be To top up the coolant level do the
maintained within 48% to 50%, which following:
equates to a freeze point between -30°F
(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). 1. Remove the coolant reservoir cap.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The 2. Add coolant to the MAX mark, do not
level may extend beyond the MAX mark. overfill.
3. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
222
Maintenance
In case of emergency, you can add water Top up with fluid that meets the Ford
without engine coolant in order to reach a specification. See Capacities and
vehicle service location. Specifications (page 267).
Note: Prolonged use of an incorrect dilution
of coolant can cause damage, for example POWER STEERING FLUID
corrosion, overheating or freezing.
CHECK
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
CHECK power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WARNINGS
Use of any fluid other than the WASHER FLUID CHECK
recommended brake fluid may
reduce brake efficiency and not meet Top up the washer fluid reservoir when the
Ford's performance standards. washer fluid level indicator is on. See
Warning Lamps and Indicators (page
Do not allow the fluid to touch your 64).
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with When adding fluid we do not recommend
plenty of water and contact your doctor. adding any other solvent, only pure water,
mixed into the washer reservoir.
Clean the filler cap before removing.
Use only fluid that meets Ford Note: Do not add washer fluid when the
specifications and from a sealed engine is hot to prevent fire risk.
container. Note: The washer low level fluid indicator
is only available in some vehicles.
Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
brake system damage and possible failure. WATER TRAP - 2.0L TDCI BI-
Note: The brake and the clutch systems are TURBO DIESEL (156 KW/213
supplied from the same reservoir. PS) (YN) /2.0L TDCI DIESEL
The fluid level will drop slowly as the (132 KW/180 PS) (YM)
brakes wear, and will rise when the brake
components are replaced. WARNING
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX Do not dispose of fuel in the
lines are within the normal operating range; household refuse or the public
there is no need to add fluid. sewage system. Use an authorized
If the fluid levels are outside of the normal waste disposal facility.
operating range, the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford
service from you authorized dealer specification. See Fuel Quality (page 119).
immediately.
Note: The in-tank pump turns off after
approximately 20 seconds.
223
Maintenance
Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp

goes out after a few seconds, with the
engine running.
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER

WATER TRAP - 2.2L DIESEL/
3.2L DIESEL
WARNING
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford

specification. See Fuel Quality (page 119).
Note: The in-tank pump will turn off
automatically after approximately 40
seconds.
A
E269184
For item location: See Under Hood

Overview (page 217).
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Remove quick connector from water
drain spigot.
3. Attach a tube to the drain spigot and
place the end of the tube into a E208053
suitable container.
4. Switch the ignition on for 4 x 20 A Front of Vehicle.
seconds, to activate in-tank pump.
For item location: See Under Hood
5. Allow the water to drain.
Overview (page 217).
7. Remove the tube from the drain plug.
2. Attach a tube to the drain plug and
8. Attach quick connector back on the place the end of the tube into a
drain spigot. suitable container.
9. Start the engine. 3. Loosen the drain plug approximately
10. Check for leaks. 1.5 turns.
224
Maintenance
4. Switch the ignition on to activate the A connection at the negative battery

in-tank pump. terminal can cause inaccurate
5. Allow the water to drain. measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
When a battery replacement is required,
7. Tighten the drain plug until you feel a you must use a recommended
strong resistance. replacement battery that matches the
8. Remove the tube from the drain plug. electrical requirements of the vehicle.
9. Start the engine. After battery replacement, or in some
10. Check for leaks. cases after charging the battery with the
external charger, the Battery Management
Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp will System requires eight hours of vehicle
go out after approximately 2 seconds, with sleep time (key off with doors closed) to
the engine running. relearn the new battery state of charge.
Prior to relearning the state of charge, the
CHARGING THE 12V BATTERY Battery Management System may disable
electrical features (to protect the battery)
Battery Management System earlier than normal.
The battery management system monitors

battery conditions and takes actions to CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system may WARNINGS
temporarily disable certain electrical Batteries normally produce explosive
features to protect the battery. Those gases which can cause personal
electrical accessories affected include the injury. Therefore, do not allow
rear defrost, heated/cooled seats, climate flames, sparks or lighted substances to
control fan, heated steering wheel, audio come near the battery. When working near
and navigation system. A message may be the battery, always shield your face and
shown in the information displays to alert protect your eyes. Always provide correct
the driver that battery protection actions ventilation.
are active. These messages are only for
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
notification that an action is taking place,
excessive pressure on the end walls
and not intended to indicate an electrical
could cause acid to flow through the
problem or that the battery requires
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
replacement.
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
Electrical accessory installation battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
To ensure proper operation of the Battery
Management System, any electrical
devices that are added to your vehicle
should not have their ground connection
made directly at the negative battery post.
225
Maintenance
WARNINGS For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the

Keep batteries out of reach of top of the battery clean and dry and the
children. Batteries contain sulfuric battery cables tightly fastened to the
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or battery terminals. If any corrosion is
clothing. Shield your eyes when working present on the battery or terminals, remove
near the battery to protect against possible the cables from the terminals and clean
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
contact with skin or eyes, flush acid with a solution of baking soda and
immediately with water for a minimum of water.
15 minutes and get prompt medical We recommend that you disconnect the
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a negative battery cable terminal from the
physician immediately. battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
Battery posts, terminals and related an extended period.
accessories contain lead and lead To maintain correct operation of the
compounds. Wash hands after battery management system, if you add
handling. any electrical devices to your vehicle, do
This vehicle may have more than one not connect the ground connection directly
battery. Removing the battery cables to the negative battery terminal. A
from only one battery does not connection at the negative battery terminal
disconnect your vehicle electrical system. can cause inaccurate measurements of
Make sure you disconnect the battery the battery condition and potential
cables from all batteries when incorrect system operation.
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may Note: Electrical accessories or components
cause serious personal injury or property added to your vehicle by you or an
damage. authorized dealer, may adversely affect
For vehicles with Auto-Start-Stop battery performance, durability and the
the battery requirement is different. performance of other electrical systems on
You must replace the battery with your vehicle.
one of exactly the same specification. If a replacement battery is required, we
recommend you use a Ford replacement
The battery is located in the engine battery that matches the electrical
compartment. See Under Hood requirements of your vehicle.
Overview (page 217). If you disconnect or replace the battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free and your vehicle has an automatic
battery. It does not require additional transmission, transmission must relearn
water during service. its adaptive strategy. Because of this, the
transmission may shift firmly when first
If your vehicle battery has a cover, make driven. This is normal operation while the
sure you correctly install it after cleaning transmission fully updates its operation to
or replacing the battery. optimum shift feel.
Remove and Reinstall the Battery

To disconnect or remove the battery, do
the following:
226
Maintenance
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the CHECKING THE WIPER
ignition off.
BLADES
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
disconnecting the battery.
Note: The engine management system has
a power hold function and remains powered
for a period after you switch the ignition off.
This is to allow diagnostic and adaptive
tables to be stored. Disconnecting the
battery without waiting can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
4. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable terminal first. E222238
5. Disconnect the positive (+) battery Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
cable terminal last. the blade to check for roughness.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp. Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
7. Remove the battery. alcohol or windscreen washer concentrate.
8. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Before reconnecting the battery, CHANGING THE WIPER
make sure the ignition remains switched off. BLADES
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is Changing the Windshield Wiper
isolated or placed away from the battery Blades
terminal to avoid un-intended connection
or arcing. Note: The windshield wiper blades are
different in length.
Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals
are fully tightened. Note: If you install wiper blades of the
wrong length, the wiper blades can clash
Note: If you disconnect or replace the damaging the wiper system.
battery, you must reset the clock and the
pre-set radio stations once the battery is
reconnected.
Battery Disposal
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
E107998 environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
E170913
227
Maintenance
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away

from the glass.
A B C
2
1
E72899
2. Press and hold the locking button.

3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
D
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
E205822
REMOVING A HEADLAMP Headlamp assembly:

A. Front parking lamp bulb.
Contact an authorized dealer. B. High beam headlamp bulb or daytime
running lamp bulb.
CHANGING A BULB C. Low beam headlamp bulb.
D. Direction indicator lamp bulb.
Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs
Replacing the High Beam Headlamp
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Bulb
E205833
3 1
1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
228
Maintenance
Replacing the Low Beam Headlamp Side Repeater

Bulb
3 1 E133682
E205825
1. Slide the lens to the rear and remove
1. Carefully remove the cover. it.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
assembly by turning it Approach Lamp and Side Direction
counterclockwise and pull it straight Indicator
out.
4. Release the retainer spring and remove
the bulb from the headlamp assembly
by pulling it straight out.
Replacing the Front Parking Bulb

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it. A
B
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight E133683
out.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order. A Side direction indicator.
B Approach lamp.
Replacing the Direction Indicator Lamp
Bulb Note: These lamps are not serviceable, see
an authorized dealer if it they fail.
and remove it.
2. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb
counterclockwise to remove it.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
229
Maintenance
Front Fog Lamps 4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Rear Lamps
Type 1
Tail, Brake, Reversing, Fog Lamp and
Direction Indicator
3
2
E205847
1. Remove the screws.

2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
bumper.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector. E133757
E205849
230
Maintenance
Type 2
Tail, Brake, Reversing Lamp and
4 Direction Indicator
5 A
A B C
1
E133685
C
A Rear direction indicator.
D B Stop and rear lamp.
C Reversing lamp.
E133684
A Stop and rear lamp. 2. Remove the lamp lens.
B Rear direction indicator. 3. Remove the bulb.
C Reversing lamp. License Plate Lamp
D Rear fog lamp.
Type 1
1. Pull up on the manual tailgate handle
to release the tailgate.
3. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the 2
lamp.
and remove it. 3
5. Remove the bulb.
E133686
231
Maintenance
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Rotate the housing counterclockwise
to the unlock position.
3. Remove the bulb.
Type 2
3 2 1
E133687

2. Remove the lamp lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
232
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Exterior Chrome Parts

• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Detail Wash.
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Never use strong household detergents • Do not apply the cleaning product to
or soap, for example dish washing or hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
laundry liquid. These products can product on chrome surfaces longer
discolor and spot painted surfaces. than the time recommended.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot • Using non-recommended cleaners can
to the touch, or during strong or direct result in severe and permanent
sunlight. cosmetic damage.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
spotting.
can scratch the chrome surface.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
These may cause damage to your cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
Exterior Plastic Parts
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover. For routine cleaning we recommend
• Remove any exterior accessories, for Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
example antennas, before entering a spots are present, we recommend
car wash. Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
residue on painted surfaces
immediately. Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents however, pressure washing may be used
can damage painted surfaces. If these under the following conditions:
substances come in contact with your • Do not use water pressure higher than
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as 14,000 kPa.
possible.
• Do not use water hotter than 82°C.
Cleaning the Headlamps • Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or • Keep the nozzle at a 305 mm distance
chemical solvents to clean them. and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
they are dry. at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
233
Vehicle Care
Underbody CLEANING THE INTERIOR

Regularly clean the underside of your
Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a
drain holes free of debris or foreign
spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage
material.
may not be covered by your warranty.
Under Hood Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
For removing black rubber marks from and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft retardant abilities of the seat materials.
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover. Note: We recommend distilled water when
cleaning.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND Fabric, Carpets, Cloth Seats,
WIPER BLADES Headliners and Floor Mats
Note: Avoid soaking any surface.
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper Note: To avoid spots or discoloration, clean
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and the entire surface.
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper To clean:
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
performance. vacuum cleaner or brush.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades: • Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
• Clean the windshield with a solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When cloth.
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe cleaning, clean the entire area
any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately, but do not soak or the
immediately. ring will set.
• For windshields contaminated with Seatbelts
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool WARNINGS
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
circular motion and rinse with water. or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl these actions may weaken the belt
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer webbing.
concentrate. On vehicles equipped with
Note: Do not use razor blades or other seat-mounted airbags, do not use
sharp objects to clean or remove decals chemical solvents or strong
from the inside of the heated rear window. detergents. Such products could
The vehicle warranty does not cover contaminate the side airbag system and
damage caused to the heated rear window affect performance of the side airbag in a
grid lines. crash.
234
Vehicle Care
Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD

solvents to clean them. Screens and Radio Screens
Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate Note: Do not use abrasives, alcoholic
the seatbelt retractor mechanism. solvents or chemical solvents to clean the
Cleaning may safely be carried out using instrument cluster screens, LCD screens or
mild soap and water. Let them dry radio screens. These cleaning products can
naturally, away from artificial heat. damage the screens.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
Leather Interior (If Equipped) lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
Follow the same procedure as cleaning then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
leather seats for cleaning leather these areas.
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
Rear Windows
Note: Do not use any abrasive materials to
Suede Micro Fiber Fabric (If Equipped) clean the interior of the rear windows.
Note: Do not steam clean. Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the
interior of the rear windows.
Note: To avoid spots or discoloration, clean
the entire surface. Storage Compartments and Cup
Do not use the following products: Holders
• Leather care products. To clean:
• Household cleaners. • Take out any removable inserts.
• Alcoholic solutions. • Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
• Spot removers. cloth and a mild soap and water
• Shoe polish. solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
To clean:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
• Wipe the surface with a soft, damp Equipped)
cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft Note: Follow the same procedure as
cloth. cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
surfaces.
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately, but do not soak or the Note: Clean and treat spills as soon as
ring will set. possible. Test any cleaner or stain remover
on an inconspicuous area.
Note: Avoid soaking any surface.
Note: We recommend distilled water when
cleaning.
235
Vehicle Care
For cleaning and removing stains such as CLEANING THE WHEELS

dye transfer, use a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
interiors. warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Do not use the following products as these Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
may damage the leather: cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based combination with brush agitation to remove
leather conditioners. brake dust and dirt, could wear away the
• Household cleaners. clear coat finish over a period of time.
• Alcohol solutions. Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
• Solvents or cleaners intended wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics. Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
To clean: wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
vacuum cleaner. This will reduce the risk of increased
• Wipe the surface with a soft, damp corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and
cloth and a mild soap and water linings.
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft Note: Some automatic car washes may
cloth. cause damage to the finish on your wheel
• Do not rub any stains into the leather. rims and covers.
• For perforated leather, do not use foam Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
cleaning products. with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT • Clean them weekly with the
recommended wheel and tire cleaner.
DAMAGE
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
You should repair paintwork damage deposits of dirt and brake dust
caused by stones from the road or minor accumulation.
scratches as soon as possible. A choice of • Rinse them thoroughly with a
products are available from an authorized pressurized stream of water when you
dealer. have completed the cleaning process.
Remove particles such as bird droppings, We recommend that you use Ford service
tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read
salt and industrial fallout before repairing and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
paint chips.
Using other non-recommended cleaning
Always read and follow the manufacturer’s products can result in severe and
instructions before using the products. permanent cosmetic damage.
236
Vehicle Care
VEHICLE STORAGE Engine

• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
storage because used engine oil
days or more, read the following
contains contaminates which may
maintenance recommendations to make
cause engine damage.
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition. • Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
We engineer and test all motor vehicles with the climate controls set to defrost
and their components for reliable, regular until the engine reaches normal
driving. Under various conditions, operating temperature.
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you • With your foot on the brake, shift
use specific precautions to preserve engine through all the gears while the engine
components. is running.
• We recommend that you change the
General engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place. Fuel system
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
• If vehicles are stored outside, they until the first automatic shutoff of the
require regular maintenance to protect fuel pump nozzle.
against rust and damage.
Cooling system
Body
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from • When removing your vehicle from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing storage, check coolant fluid level.
and the underside of front fenders. Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is recommended level.
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to Battery
prevent rust.
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts connections clean.
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary • If storing your vehicle for more than 30
when you wash your vehicle. days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage the battery cables to maintain battery
compartment hinges and latches with charge for quick starting.
a light grade oil.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading. features if battery cables are disconnected.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
237
Vehicle Care
Brakes Contact an authorized dealer if you have

any concerns or issues.
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 7.5 m every 15
days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 4.5 m back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
238
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire

pressure gauge, as automatic service
A decal with tire pressure data is located station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford
in the driver’s door opening or on the B recommends the use of a digital or
pillar. dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a
stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are Use the recommended cold inflation
intending to drive your vehicle and when pressure for optimum tire performance and
the tires are cold. wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may
cause uneven treadwear patterns.
Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to
optimize fuel economy. WARNING
Note: Use only approved wheel and tire Under-inflation is the most common
sizes. Using other sizes could damage your cause of tire failures and may result
vehicle and will make the National Type in severe tire cracking, tread
Approval invalid. separation or blowout, with unexpected
loss of vehicle control and increased risk
Note: If you change the diameter of the tires of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
from that fitted at the factory, the flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in
speedometer may not display the correct heat buildup and internal damage to the
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire
dealer to have the engine management stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
system reprogrammed. control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
TIRE CARE to be flat!
Inflating Your Tires Always inflate your tires to the Ford

recommended inflation pressure even if it
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that
is less than the maximum inflation
your tires are properly inflated. Remember
pressure information found on the tire. The
that a tire can lose up to half of its air
Ford recommended tire inflation pressure
pressure without appearing flat.
is found on the Tire Label located on door
Every day before you drive, check your tires. opening or on the B-pillar. Failure to follow
If one looks lower than the others, use a the tire pressure recommendations can
tire gauge to check the pressure of all tires cause uneven treadwear patterns and
and adjust if required. adversely affect the way your vehicle
At least once a month and before long handles.
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including spare,
if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by the Ford Motor
Company.
239
Wheels and Tires
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change Note: If you are checking tire pressure when
the ride characteristics of the vehicle. If you the tire is hot, (for example, driven more
do not maintain the inflation pressure at the than 1.6 km, never bleed or reduce air
levels specified by Ford, your vehicle may pressure. The tires are hot from driving and
experience a condition known as shimmy. it is normal for pressures to increase above
Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
in the steering wheel after the vehicle travels or below recommended cold inflation
over a bump or dip in the road that does not pressure could be significantly
dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result under-inflated.
from significant under-inflation of the tires, Note: If you have to drive a distance to get
improper tires (load range, size, or type), or air for your tire(s), check and record the tire
vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the pressure first and add the appropriate air
event that your vehicle experiences shimmy, pressure when you get to the pump. It is
you should slowly reduce speed by either normal for tires to heat up and the air
lifting off the accelerator pedal or lightly pressure inside to go up as you drive.
applying the brakes. The shimmy will cease
as the vehicle speed decreases. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire the valve and measure the pressure.
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the 3. Add enough air to reach the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. recommended air pressure.
This pressure is normally higher than the Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by
manufacturer’s recommended cold pressing on the metal stem in the center of
inflation pressure which can be found next the valve. Then recheck the pressure with
to the driver's seat on the Tire Label your tire gauge.
located on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation pressure 4. Replace the valve cap.
should never be set lower than the 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
recommended pressure on the Safety including the spare.
Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label. Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher
inflation pressure than the other tires. For
When weather temperature changes full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the
occur, tire inflation pressures also change. Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause information for a description. Store and
a corresponding drop of 7 kPa in inflation maintain at the higher of the front and rear
pressure. Check your tire pressures inflation pressure as shown on the Tire
frequently and adjust them to the proper Label.
pressure which can be found on the Tire
Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
To check the pressure in your tire(s): embedded that could poke a hole in the
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning tire and cause an air leak.
they are not hot from driving even a mile. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there
are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
240
Wheels and Tires
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Damage

Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
Periodically inspect the tire treads for sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
uneven or excessive wear and remove the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread
objects such as stones, nails or glass that groove and separation in the tread or
may be wedged in the tread grooves. sidewall). If damage is observed or
Check the tire and valve stems for holes, suspected have the tire inspected by a tire
cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage professional. Tires can be damaged during
and repair or replace the tire and replace off-road use, so inspection after off-road
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls use is also recommended.
for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs
of damage or excessive wear. If internal Age
damage to the tire is suspected, have the
tire demounted and inspected in case it WARNING
needs to be repaired or replaced. For your Tires degrade over time depending
safety, tires that are damaged or show on many factors such as weather,
signs of excessive wear should not be used storage conditions, and conditions
because they are more likely to blow out of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
or fail. tires experience throughout their lives.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
In general, tires should be replaced after
maintenance can cause tires to wear
six years regardless of tread wear.
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including
However, heat caused by hot climates or
the spare, frequently, and replace them if
frequent high loading conditions can
one or more of the following conditions
accelerate the aging process and may
exist:
require tires to be replaced more
Tire Wear frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when

you replace the road tires or after six years
due to aging even if it has not been used.
Tire Replacement Requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
E142546 wheels that are the same size, load
Tire wear indicators are moulded in to the index, speed rating and type (such
bottom of the tread grooves to aid in as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
determining when to replace the tire. Tires versus all-terrain) as those originally
should be replaced before the tread wears provided by Ford. The recommended tire
down to the same height as the wear and wheel size may be found on either the
indicators. Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
241
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS Safety Practices

door-latch post, or the door edge that WARNINGS
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires;
the driver's door. If this information is not spinning the tires can tear the tire
found on these labels, then you should and cause an explosion. A tire can explode
contact your authorized dealer as soon as in as little as three to five seconds.
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not Do not spin the wheels at over
recommended by Ford can affect the 55 km/h. The tires may fail and injure
safety and performance of your vehicle, a passenger or bystander.
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, Driving habits have a great deal to do
personal injury and death. with your tire mileage and safety.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires *Observe posted speed limits
and wheels, you should not exceed *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
the maximum pressure indicated on the
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below. If the *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
beads do not seat at the maximum against a curb when parking
pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try
again. Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s
Important: Remember to replace the always the possibility that you may
wheel valve stems when the road tires are eventually have a flat tire on the highway.
replaced on your vehicle. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of
The two front tires or two rear tires should traffic. This may further damage the flat
generally be replaced as a pair. tire, but your safety is more important.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
wheels are not designed to be used in disturbance while driving, or you suspect
aftermarket wheels. your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive with
The use of wheels or tires not caution until you can safely pull off the
recommended by Ford Motor Company road. Stop and inspect the tires for
may affect the operation of your tire damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
pressure monitoring system. damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
If the tire pressure monitoring system replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
indicator is flashing, the system is If you cannot detect a cause, have the
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility
might be incompatible with your tire or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
242
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
can cause the front end of your vehicle to is defined as a spare wheel and tire
become misaligned or cause damage to assembly that is different in brand, size or
your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to appearance from the road tires and wheels.
one side when you’re driving, the wheels If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
may be out of alignment. Have an assembly it is intended for temporary use
authorized dealer check the wheel only and should not be used in a tire
alignment periodically. rotation.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear Note: After having your tires rotated,
can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of inflation pressure must be checked and
your tires and should be corrected by an adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive
vehicles and those with an independent Rotating your tires at the recommended
rear suspension may require alignment of interval of between 5,000 km to
all four wheels. 10,000 km will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance
The tires should also be balanced and longer tire life.
periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel
assembly may result in irregular tire wear. Rear-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel
drive vehicles (front tires at left of
Tire Rotation diagram)
WARNING
If the tire label shows different tire
pressures for the front and rear tires
and the vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you need to
update the settings for the system sensors.
Always perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If you do not
reset the system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when necessary.
E142548
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask
an authorized dealer to check for and correct Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or corrected by rotating the tires.
mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation. WARNING
Do not scrub the sidewalls of the
tires when you are parking.
If you have to mount a curb, do so slowly

and approach it with the wheels at
right-angles to the curb.
243
Wheels and Tires
Examine the tires regularly for cuts, foreign Vehicles with Stability Control
objects and uneven wear of the tread.
Uneven wear could mean that the wheel When stability control is on, your vehicle
alignment is outside specification. may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics. To reduce this, switch
Check the tire pressures (including the traction control off. See Using Traction
spare) when cold, every two weeks. Control (page 140).
USING SNOW CHAINS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

WARNINGS
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in WARNING
the loss of control of your vehicle, The tire pressure monitoring system
personal injury or death. is not a substitute for manually
Do not use snow chains on snow-free checking tire pressures. You should
roads. periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
Only fit snow chains to specified maintain tire pressures could increase the
tires. risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
If your vehicle is fitted with wheel
trims, remove them before fitting
snow chains. Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
Note: Only use snow chains on applicable system sensor.
tire sizes. See Technical Specifications
(page 255). Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
Only use S-Class snow chains, 15 mm function.
chain links.
Each tire, including the spare (if
Only use manual tensioning chains. Do not provided), should be checked
use self-tensioning chains. monthly when cold and inflated
Only use snow chains on the rear axle. to the inflation pressure recommended by
More information on applicable tire sizes the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
that support snow chains usage can be placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
found later in this Owner's Manual. See your vehicle has tires of a different size
Technical Specifications (page 255). than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
Note: The anti-lock brake system continues should determine the proper tire inflation
to operate normally. pressure for those tires).
244
Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle Changing Tires With a Tire

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Pressure Monitoring System
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. E142549
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain pressure sensor located inside the wheel
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
has not reached the level to trigger sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
telltale. not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
Your vehicle has also been equipped with damaging the sensor.
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly. You should always have your tires serviced
The TPMS malfunction indicator is by an authorized dealer.
combined with the low tire pressure Check the tire pressure periodically (at
telltale. When the system detects a least monthly) using an accurate tire
malfunction, the telltale will flash for gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in
approximately one minute and then remain this chapter.
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle Changing Wheels With a Tire
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. Pressure Monitoring System
When the malfunction indicator is When changing the wheels of your vehicle,
illuminated, the system may not be able the tire pressure monitoring system needs
to detect or signal low tire pressure as to relearn the tire pressure sensors. To
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur achieve this perform the following:
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate 1. Make sure all tires are inflated to the
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent proper pressure. If not, inflate the tires
the TPMS from functioning properly. to the correct pressure.
Always check the TPMS malfunction 2. Park your vehicle for at least 20
telltale after replacing one or more tires or minutes.
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
245
Wheels and Tires
3. Carry out the tire pressure monitoring low tire pressure warning light will turn on
system reset procedure. See Tire if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once
Pressure Monitoring System Reset the light is illuminated, your tires are
Procedure later in this section. under-inflated and need to be inflated to
4. The tire pressure monitoring system the manufacturer’s recommended tire
automatically re-learns the tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
pressure sensors the next time your short time later turns off, your tire pressure
drive your vehicle for approximately 15 still needs to be checked.
minutes above 40 km/h.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Installed
Monitoring System When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not

Operating Properly
E250820
The main function of the tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitoring system is to warn you when
measures pressure in your road tires and your tires need air. It can also warn you in
sends the tire pressure readings to your the event the system is no longer capable
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure of functioning as intended. See the
readings through the information display. following chart for information concerning
See General Information (page 70). The your tire pressure monitoring system:
246
Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure

Possible cause Customer action required
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-

sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
Tire(s) under-inflated as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 32 km/h before the
light turns off.
Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
Spare tire in use
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
TPMS malfunction
remains on, contact your authorized
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
Spare tire in use
description on how the system functions,
Flashing warning see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
light is Installed in this section.
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
TPMS malfunction
remains on, contact your authorized
When putting air into your tires (such as at

When Inflating Your Tires a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
WARNING respond immediately to the air added to
Do not use the tire pressure your tires.
displayed in the information display It may take up to two minutes of driving
as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to over 32 km/h for the light to turn off after
follow this instruction could result in you have filled your tires to the
personal injury or death. recommended inflation pressure.
247
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire If the tires are rotated, you need to reset
Pressure the system in order to relearn the positions
of the tire pressure sensors. The system
The tire pressure monitoring system cannot tell which position a tire pressure
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic sensor is in, and assumes you have set the
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a tire pressures correctly.
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 14–28 kPa from a cold Performing the Reset Procedure
start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature 1. Switch the ignition on.
significantly lower than the daytime 2. Navigate to the tire monitor menu in
temperature, the tire pressure may the information display. See
decrease about 21 kPa for a drop of 30°F Information Messages (page 82).
(17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
3. Press and hold the OK button until a
pressure value may be detected by the tire
pressure monitoring system as being confirmation message appears. If your
significantly lower than the recommended vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring
system reset button, press and hold
inflation pressure and activate the system
the button until a confirmation
warning light for low tire pressure. If the
message appears.
low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
necessary. Check the air pressure in the
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, Locking Wheel Nuts
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the You can obtain a replacement locking
tires. Inflate all the tires to the wheel nut key and replacement locking
recommended inflation pressure. wheel nuts from your dealer using the
reference number certificate.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Reset Procedure Vehicle Jack
Overview WARNINGS
You must carry out the system reset Ensure screwthread is adequately
procedure after each tire replacement or lubricated before use.
adjustment of the tire pressures. The jack should be used on level firm
To maintain your vehicle load carrying ground wherever possible.
capability, your vehicle may require Switch the ignition off and apply the
different tire pressures in the front park brake fully before lifting vehicle.
compared to the rear. In these cases, the
system illuminates the warning lamp at It is recommended that the wheels
different pressures for the front and rear of the vehicle be chocked, and that
tires. no person should remain in a vehicle
that is being jacked.
No person should place any portion
of their body under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
248
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS WARNING
Do not get under a vehicle that is The jack supplied with this vehicle is
supported by a jack. only intended for changing wheels.
Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in an
emergency.
Note: If you are not using the factory

installed scissor jack, you can use a
hydraulic jack with a minimum lifting
capacity of 2,000 kg and a lifting plate with
a minimum diameter of 80 mm.
E166722
Vehicle Jack Assembly
E271861
Your jack does not require maintenance or

A Wheel Brace. additional lubrication over the service life
B Jack Handle and Extensions. of your vehicle.
C Vehicle Jack.
The jack, wheel brace, extensions and jack

handle are in the cab.
249
Wheels and Tires
Do not use the jack if it is visibly damaged

or does not operate freely. Replace the
damaged jack with a jack specified for use
on your vehicle if you detect these
conditions.
Single Cab
Note: Not all cab configurations are
available in all markets.
E135841
1. Fold the right-hand side seat back

forward.
2. Loosen the jack, remove the bolt and
remove the jack.
Super Cab
E133591
1. Fold the left-hand side seat back

forward.
2. Remove the locking strap and remove
the tools.
E134701
1. Pull the release strap on the left-hand

side rear seat.
2. Remove the rear seat.
250
Wheels and Tires
Double Cab - Jack and Tools Behind

Seat
Note: There are two different double cab
jack location configurations.
E131838
3. Remove the cover.
E133593
1. Lift the release strap.

2. Lower the seat back.
4 3. Remove the locking strap.
4. Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the jack and tools.
5 Double Cab - Jack and Tools Under Seat
E133592
4. Remove the bolt and turn the lead

screw on the end counterclockwise to
unwind.
5. Remove the jack.
E266224
6. Remove the tools.
251
Wheels and Tires
1. Pull the release strap out.

2. Lift the seat cushion up.
3. Use the tether strap to secure the seat
cushion.
4. Remove the locking strap.
5. Remove the jack and tools
Spare Wheel
Note: If the spare wheel is not the same
type and size as your vehicle road wheel,
drive the shortest distance possible.
Note: Do not fit more than one spare wheel
on your vehicle at any one time.
E225716
Note: The spare wheel has a label showing
the maximum driving speed. Drive with Note: For vehicles with Selective Catalytic
caution and at no more than the permitted Reduction System (AdBlue™).
maximum speed. 2. Insert the jack handle into the guide
Note: The usage of a dissimilar spare wheel hole. Turn counterclockwise until the
or tire at any one wheel location can lead wheel rests on the ground, and there is
to impairment of the handling, stability and slack in the cable.
braking performance, comfort and noise.
Note: The spare wheel is underneath the
rear of the vehicle.
Note: Only two extensions are used to
lower the rear wheel.
E232928
E79153 Note: For all other vehicle.

3. Insert the jack handle into the guide
1. Assemble the handle.
hole. Turn counterclockwise until the
wheel rests on the ground, and there is
slack in the cable.
252
Wheels and Tires
4. Pass the bracket and cable through the

wheel opening.
Jacking and Lifting Points

WARNING
Use only the specified jacking points.
If you use other positions, you may
damage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system or the
fuel lines.
E133590
Non-Raptor
E133594
A. Emergency use only.

B. Maintenance.
253
Wheels and Tires
E266665
1. Assemble the jack handle.

Note: Assemble the three handles to jack
E274071 the rear of the vehicle.
2. Ensure screwthread on the jack is
Removing a Road Wheel adequately lubricated before use.
WARNINGS 3. Loosen the wheel nuts.
Park your vehicle in such a position 4. Raise your vehicle until the tire is clear
that neither the traffic nor you are of the ground.
hindered or endangered.
Make sure that the wheels are
pointing straight ahead.
If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, shift into first or reverse
gear. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, shift into park (P).
Secure the diagonally opposite
wheel with an appropriate block or
wheel chock.
Make sure that the vehicle jack is
vertical to the jacking point and the
base is flat on the ground.
E134693
Never place anything between the
vehicle jack and your vehicle.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and the road
wheel.
Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face
down on the ground. Installing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Use only approved wheel and tire
sizes. Using other sizes could
damage your vehicle.
254
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS 4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in the

Do not fit run flat tires on vehicles sequence shown.
that were not originally fitted with 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
them. See an authorized dealer for 6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in the
more details about compatibility. sequence shown. See Technical
Make sure there is no grease or oil on Specifications (page 255).
the threads or the surface between 7. Make sure that the projection of the
the wheel lugs and nuts. This can cap is positioned on the same position
cause the lug nuts to loosen while driving. as the projection of the hub.
Have the lug nuts checked for Note: If the spare wheel is different in size
tightness and the tire pressure or construction to the road wheels, replace
checked as soon as possible. it as soon as possible.
Do not install alloy wheels using lug
nuts designed for use with steel Stowing the Flat Tire
wheels. Note: Do not use power tools on the spare
wheel winch input drive.
Note: The wheel nuts of alloy wheels and 1. Place the wheel flat on the ground,
spoked steel wheels can also be used for with the outer face of the wheel facing
the steel spare wheel for a maximum of two up.
weeks.
2. Tilt the bracket, and pass it through the
Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact center of the wheel.
surfaces are free from foreign matter.
3. Fully insert the jack handle into the
Note: Make sure that the cones on the guide hole and turn the jack handle
wheel nuts are against the wheel. clockwise until the tire raises to its
1. Install the wheel. stowed position underneath your
vehicle and securely seated. The spare
2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight. tire carrier does not allow you to
3. Install the locking wheel nut key. overtighten.
4. Stow the wheel brace, jack, and jack
handle away.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
E79156
255
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Nut Torque

Vehicle Type Nm
All 135 Nm
Tire Pressures (Cold Tires)

Note: See the tire decal for applicable tire pressures and sizes.
Tire Size Normal Load 2 Full Load
ECO
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
265 / 65 2.4 bar 2.4 bar N/A N/A 2.4 bar 3 bar
R17 112T
(SWB
1
Ute)
215/70 2.4 bar 2.4 bar 2.6 bar 2.6 bar 2.6 bar 3.8 bar
R16C 108/
1
106 S
255/70 2.1 bar 2.1 bar 3 3 2.6 bar 3 bar
1
2.6 bar 2.6 bar
R16 111T
265/65 2.1 bar 2.1 bar 3 3 2.6 bar 3 bar
1
2.6 bar 2.6 bar
R17 112T
265/60 2.1 bar 2.1 bar 3 3 2.6 bar 3 bar
1
2.6 bar 2.6 bar
R18 110T
1 Onlyfit snow chains to specified tires.
2 ECO tire inflation pressures are recommended for optimal fuel consumption.
3 ECO tire pressure is not applicable for all vehicles with diesel engines, refer to the tire
decal to see if it’s applicable.
256
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L TDCI DIESEL (132 KW/180 PS)

(YM)
Measurement 2.0L TDCi
Capacity 1,996 cm³

Power output. 132 kW(180PS) @ 3500 rpm
Maximum torque. 420 Nm @ 1750-2500 rpm
Continuous engine speed. 4500 rpm
Maximum engine speed. 4900 rpm
Idle speed. 800 ± 150 rpm
Induction system. Single Turbocharged/intercooled
Firing order. 1-3-4-2
Ignition system. Compression Ignition
257
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L TDCI BI-TURBO DIESEL (156

KW/213 PS) (YN)
Measurement 2.0L TDCi
Capacity 1,996 cm³

Power output 157 kW(213PS) @ 3750 rpm
Maximum torque 500 Nm @ 1750-2000 rpm
Continuous engine speed 4500 rpm
Maximum Intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
Idle speed 800 ± 150 rpm
Induction system Single Turbocharged/intercooled
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Ignition system Compression Ignition
258
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.2L DIESEL
Engine type 2.2L TDCi
Capacity 2,198 cm³

Power output 110 kW (150 PS) @ 3700 rpm
Maximum torque 375 Nm @ 1500 - 2500 rpm
Maximum Intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
Induction system Turbocharged intercooled
Firing order 1-3-4-2
259
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L DIESEL
Engine type 3.2L TDCi
Capacity 3,198 cm³

Power output 147kW (200 PS) @ 3000 rpm
Maximum torque 470 Nm @ 1750 - 2500 rpm
Maximum intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
Induction system Turbocharged intercooled
Firing order 1-2-4-5-3
260
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS - DOUBLE CAB/SINGLE CAB/SUPER CAB
Single cab
E271912
Item Dimension description mm
A Maximum length 5,376 mm

A Maximum length - with bull bars 5,434 mm
B Overall width excluding - exterior mirrors 1,863 mm
C Overall height (4x2) 1,703 mm
261
C Overall height (4x2* or 4x4) 1,800–1,806 mm

D Wheelbase 3,220 mm
E Track - front and rear (4x2) 1,590 mm
E Track - front and rear (4x2* or 4x4) 1,560 mm
*Vehicles with increased ride height
Super cab
E271913
262

B Overall width - excluding exterior mirrors 1,867 mm
263
Double cab
E271914

A Maximum length - with bull bars 5,434 mm
B Overall width - excluding exterior mirrors 1,867 mm
264

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS - SHORT WHEELBASE, CHASSIS CAB
Dimensions - Chassis Cab
E212055
265
A Overall width including exterior mirrors 2,180 mm

B Overall height 1,837 mm
C Front track 1,560 mm
C Rear track 1,564 mm
E Overall length 5,160 mm
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

PLATE NUMBER
B
E266456
A Model.
B Paint code.
C Build date.
D Vehicle identification number.
The vehicle identification plate with your

vehicle identification number and
maximum weights is located on the A
bottom of the lock side of the passenger E133363
door aperture.
A The vehicle identification
number is on the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
B The vehicle identification
number is also stamped beneath
the front door on the chassis, on
the right-hand side.
266
CAPACITIES AND WARNING

SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L TDCI The air conditioning refrigerant
DIESEL (132 KW/180 PS) (YM) system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. Only qualified
Capacities personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil with filter. 7L

Engine oil without filter. 6.9 L
Clutch fluid. Between the MIN line and
the MAX line
Manual transmission oil. 2.7 L
10 Speed automatic transmission oil (dry). 11.85 L
10 Speed automatic transmission oil (wet). 10.35 L
Air conditioning system refrigerant. 1.1 ± 0.025 kg
Air conditioning compressor lubricant. 220 ml
Brake fluid. Between the MIN line and
the MAX line
Engine coolant automatic transmission. 11.2 L
Engine coolant manual transmission. 10.4 L
Windshield washer fluid. 4.5 L
Fuel tank. 80 L
Diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue®). 21 L
267
Specifications
Materials
Recommended fluid Specification
1 WSS-M2C913-D
Engine oil SAE 5W-30
2 WSS-M2C950-A
Manual Transmission - Motorcraft® Dual WSS-M2C200-D2
Clutch Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission - ULV ATF Fluid WSS-M2C949-A
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance WSS-M6C65-A2
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D
Front axle oil - Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 WSP-M2C197-A
Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Rear axle oil - Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 WSP-M2C197-A
Rear axle oil (LSD) - Motorcraft® SAE WSP-M2C197-A
80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Rear axle - Motorcraft® Additive Friction EST-M2C118-A
Modifier
Transfer case - Motorcraft® MERCON® LV WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant WSH-M17B19-A
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor WSH-M1C231-B
Oil
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue®) WSS-M99C130-A
1 Formarkets with high sulphur content (more than 50 ppm) AND emissions level stage
4 & below.
2 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND emissions level stage 5
& 6.
Only use fluid that meets our

Your engine has been designed to be used
specifications. Using oil and fluids that do
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel
not meet the defined specification and
economy benefit while maintaining the
viscosity grade may lead to:
durability of your engine.
268
• Component damage which may not be Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
• Longer engine cranking periods or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
• Increased emission levels. fluid may cause degraded brake
• Reduced engine performance. performance and not meet our performance
• Reduced fuel economy. standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
• Degraded brake performance. products or other materials may result in
Topping up the oil: brake system damage and possible failure.
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with
low sulphur content less than 50 ppm): CAPACITIES AND
If you are unable to find an oil that meets
the specification, you must use SAE 5W-30
SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L TDCI
that meets the specification defined by BI-TURBO DIESEL (156 KW/213
ACEA A5/B5. PS) (YN)
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with
high sulphur content greater than 50 Capacities
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
meets the specification defined in the WARNING
vehicle fluids table, you must use SAE The air conditioning refrigerant
10W-30 that meets the specification system contains refrigerant under
defined by API CH-4. high pressure. Only qualified
Do not use supplemental engine oil personnel should service the air
additives because they are unnecessary conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
and could lead to engine damage that may the air conditioning refrigerant system can
not be covered by your vehicle warranty. cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil with filter. 7

Engine oil without filter. 6.9
Clutch fluid. Between the MIN line and
the MAX line
Manual transmission oil. 2.7 L
10 Speed automatic transmission oil (dry). 11.85 L
10 Speed automatic transmission oil (wet). 10.35 L
Air conditioning system refrigerant. 1.1 ± 0.025 kg
Air conditioning compressor lubricant. 220 ml
269
Item Capacity
Brake fluid. Between the MIN line and

the MAX line
Engine coolant automatic transmission. 11.2 L
Engine coolant manual transmission. 10.4 L
Windshield washer fluid. 4.5 L
Fuel tank. 80 L
Diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue®). 22 L
Specifications
Materials
1 WSS-M2C913-D
2 WSS-M2C950-A
Automatic Transmission - ULV ATF Fluid WSS-M2C949-A
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D2
3
WSS-M97B44-D with WSS-M99P25-C
Modifier
270

Oil
1 Formarkets with high sulphur content (more than 50 ppm) AND emissions level stage
4 and below.
2 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND emissions level stage 5
and 6.
3 When using WSS-M97B44-D and WSS-M99P25-C mix together at 50% each.
Your engine has been designed to be used Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel high sulphur content greater than 50
economy benefit while maintaining the ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
durability of your engine. meets the specification defined in the
vehicle fluids table, you must use SAE
Only use fluid that meets our 10W-30 that meets the specification
specifications. Using oil and fluids that do defined by API CH-4.
viscosity grade may lead to: Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
• Component damage which may not be and could lead to engine damage that may
covered by the vehicle Warranty. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
• Increased emission levels. Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
• Reduced engine performance. or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
• Reduced fuel economy. fluid may cause degraded brake
• Degraded brake performance. performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Topping up the oil:
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with products or other materials may result in
low sulphur content less than 50 ppm): brake system damage and possible failure.
If you are unable to find an oil that meets
the specification, you must use SAE 5W-30
that meets the specification defined by
ACEA A5/B5.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.2L DIESEL
271
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil with filter 8.55 L

Engine oil without filter 8.15 L
Clutch fluid Between the MIN line and the MAX line
Manual transmission oil 2.7 L
Automatic transmission oil (dry) 10.5 L
Automatic transmission oil (wet) 9L
Air conditioning system refrigerant 0.975 ± 0.025 kg
Air conditioning compressor lubricant 200 ml
Brake fluid Between the MIN line and the MAX line
Engine coolant (MT82) 11.5 L
Engine coolant (AT) 11.9 L
Windshield washer fluid 4.5 L
Fuel tank 80 L
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue®) 20 L
Specifications
Materials
1 WSS-M2C913-C
WSS-M2C913-D
2 WSS-M2C913-D
2 WSS-M2C921-A
272

3 WSS-M2C950-A
Automatic Transmission - Motorcraft WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D2
4
WSS-M97B44-D with WSS-M99P25-C
Modifier
Oil
1 Formarkets with low sulphur content (less than 350 ppm)
2 For markets with high sulphur content (more than 350 ppm)
3 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND Stage 5 emissions
4 When using WSS-M97B44-D with WSS-M99P25-C mix together at 50% each.
Only use fluid that meets Ford

Your engine has been designed to be used
specifications. Using oil and fluids that do
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel
economy benefit whilst maintaining the
viscosity grade may lead to:
durability of your engine.
• Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods
273
• Increased emission levels. Do not use supplemental engine oil

• Reduced engine performance. additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
• Reduced fuel economy. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Degraded brake performance.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Topping up the oil: Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
low sulphur content less than 350 of any fluid other than the recommended
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that fluid may cause degraded brake
meets the specification, you must use SAE performance and not meet the Ford
5W-30 that meets the specification performance standards. Keep brake fluid
defined by ACEA A5/B5. clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with materials may result in brake system
high sulphur content greater than 350 damage and possible failure.
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
meets the specification defined in the
10W-30 that meets the specification
defined by API CH-4.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L DIESEL
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil with filter 9.75 L

Engine oil without filter 9.35 L
Clutch fluid Between the MIN line and the MAX line
Manual transmission oil 2.7 L
Automatic transmission oil (dry) 10.5 L
Automatic transmission oil (wet) 9L
Air conditioning compressor lubricant 200 ml
Air conditioning system refrigerant 0.975 ± 0.025 kg
274
Item Capacity
Brake fluid Between the MIN line and the MAX line
Engine coolant 13.5 L
Windshield washer fluid 4.5 L
Fuel tank 80 L
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue®) 20 L
Vehicles fitted with Selective Catalytic Reduc-
tion System (AdBlue®)
Specifications
Materials
1 WSS-M2C913-C
WSS-M2C913-D
2 WSS-M2C921-A
WSS-M2C913-D
3 WSS-M2C950-A
Automatic Transmission - Motorcraft WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D
Modifier
275

Oil
1 Formarkets with low sulphur content (less than 350 ppm)
2 For markets with high sulphur content (more than 350 ppm)
3 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND Stage 5 emissions
Your engine has been designed to be used Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel high sulphur content greater than 350
economy benefit whilst maintaining the ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
durability of your engine. meets the specification defined in the
Only use fluid that meets Ford 10W-30 that meets the specification
specifications. Using oil and fluids that do defined by API CH-4.
viscosity grade may lead to: Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
• Component damage which may not be and could lead to engine damage that may
covered by the vehicle Warranty. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
• Increased emission levels. Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
• Reduced engine performance. or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
• Reduced fuel economy. fluid may cause degraded brake
• Degraded brake performance. performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
Topping up the oil:
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with water, petroleum products or other
low sulphur content less than 350 materials may result in brake system
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that damage and possible failure.
meets the specification, you must use SAE
5W-30 that meets the specification
defined by ACEA A5/B5.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
276
Bulb Specification Power (Watts)
Headlamp low beam.

1
H7 55
Headlamp low beam.

2
H1R2 55
6 D8S 25
Headlamp low beam.
Headlamp high beam.

3
H15 55
Headlamp high beam.

4
HB3 60
Daytime running lamps. H15 15
Daytime running lamps.

6
LED
5
LED
Front position lamp. W5W 5
Front position lamp.

6
LED
5
LED
Front fog lamp. H8 35
Front fog lamp.

6
LED
5
LED
Front direction indicator. PY21W

1
21
Side direction indicator. -

5
-
Rear direction indicator. WY21W 21

Rear position lamp. W5W 5
Rear position/Stop lamp. W21/5W 21/5
Central high mounted brake lamp. 5 LED

LED
Reversing lamp. W21W 21
Rear fog lamp. W21W 21
License plate lamp. W5W 5
Roof bar lamp. W5W 5
277
Bulb Specification Power (Watts)
Interior lamp. W5W 5

Reading lamp. W5W 5
1 Reflectortype.
2 Projector type.
3 With Daytime running lamps.
4 Without Daytime running lamps.
5 See an authorized dealer for replacement.
6 Vehicles with HID headlamps.
278
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION Note: Listening to loud audio for long

periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Radio reception factors
Distance and Strength The further you travel away from an FM station, the weaker
the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a stronger
signal can override a weaker signal and can cause interfer-
ence in the audio system.
CD and CD Player Information MP3 and WMA Track and Folder

Structure
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
12 cm audio compact discs only. Due to Audio systems capable of recognizing and
technical incompatibility, certain recordable playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and re-recordable compact discs may not and folder structures work as follows:
function correctly when used in Ford CD • There are two different modes for MP3
players. and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade MP3 and WMA folder mode.
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
become jammed. You should use a folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
permanent felt tip marker rather than disc. The player numbers each MP3
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. and WMA track on the disc (noted by
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
authorized dealer for more information. T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped WMA files may be less depending on
discs or discs with a scratch protection film the structure of the CD and exact
attached. model of radio present.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
279
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers AM/FM/AUX IN/USB/
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc BLUETOOTH
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing WARNING
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255. Driving while distracted can result in
• Creating discs with only one level of injury. We strongly recommend that
folders helps with navigation through you use extreme caution when using any
the disc files. device that may take your focus off the
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
discs, it is important to understand how operation of your vehicle. We recommend
the system reads the structures you create. against the use of any hand-held device
While various files may be present, (files while driving and encourage the use of
with extensions other than MP3 and voice-operated systems when possible.
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA Make sure you are aware of all applicable
extension are played; other files are local laws that may affect the use of
ignored by the system. This enables you to electronic devices while driving.
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer, Note: Depending on your vehicle option
home computer and your in-vehicle package, your system may look different
system. from what you see here.
In track mode, the system displays and Note: Some features may not be available
plays the structure as if it were only one in your location. Check with an authorized
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, dealer.
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
280
Audio System
E209952
A Radio. Display Screen

B Display screen. Shows audio information.
C Number block. Number Block
D Clock.
In radio mode, store and recall your favorite
E Function buttons. radio stations. To store a radio station, tune
F Tune to the station, then press and hold a preset
button until sound returns. In phone mode,
G Seek, fast forward and reverse. enter a phone number.
H OK and cursor arrows.
Clock
I Volume and power.
Press to access the clock setting. Use the
J Mute or TA. center arrow controls to change the hours
K Sound. and minutes. You can also set the clock by
pressing MENU and scrolling to Clock
L Menu. Settings. If not in phone mode, press to
M Phone. display the clock.
N Media. Function Buttons
Radio Select different functions of the audio
system depending on which mode you are
Press this to switch between listening to a in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
CD and the media menu. Press the function
buttons below the radio screen to select
different radio functions.
281
Audio System
Tune Menu
Turn to search the frequency band in Press this button to access different audio
individual increments. system features.
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse Phone

Select a frequency band and press either Press this to access the phone features of
button. The system stops at the first the system.
station it finds in that direction.
Media
OK and Cursor Arrows
Press to open the media source menu. You
Press the up and down arrow buttons to can press this multiple times to change to
select the various settings. When you make a media device or scroll through the media
your selection, press the left and right sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK
arrow buttons to change the settings. to select a source.
Press OK to set, or press MENU to exit.
Volume and Power AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC
Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch
the system on and off.
WARNING
Mute (If Equipped) Driving while distracted can result in
Press to mute the playing audio. injury. We strongly recommend that
TA (If Equipped)
Press to switch the traffic announcements road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
on or off and cancel any active operation of your vehicle. We recommend
announcements. against the use of any hand-held device
Note: Traffic announcements may not be voice-operated systems when possible.
available in all areas. Make sure you are aware of all applicable
Sound electronic devices while driving.
Press to access settings for Treble,
Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the Note: Depending on your vehicle option
up and down arrow buttons to select the package, your system may look different
various settings. When you make your from what you see here.
selection, press the left and right arrow
Note: Some features may not be available
buttons to change the settings. Press OK
in your location.
to set or press MENU to exit. Sound
settings can be set for each audio source
independently.
282
Audio System
E247757
A CD. M CD slot.
B Sound. N Play/pause.
C Mute or TA. O Answer or make phone call.
D Clock. P Volume and power.
E Display screen. Q Menu.
F Number block. R Phone.
G Function buttons. S Media.
H Seek, fast forward and reverse. T Radio.
I Tune.
CD
J End phone call.
Press to listen to a CD. Press the function
K OK and cursor arrows. buttons below the radio screen to select
L CD eject. on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
283
Audio System
Sound Function Buttons

Press to access settings for Treble, Select different functions of the audio
Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the system depending on which mode you are
up and down arrow buttons to select the in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
various settings. When you make your
selection, press the left and right arrow Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
buttons to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit. Sound In radio mode, select a frequency band and
settings can be set for each audio source press either button. The system stops at
independently. the first station it finds in that direction. In
CD mode, press to select the next or
Mute (If Equipped) previous track. Press and hold to move
quickly forward or backward through the
Press to mute the playing audio. current track.
TA (If Equipped) Tune

Press to switch traffic announcements on Turn to search through the radio frequency
or off. This also cancels announcements band. The system stops at the first station
during an active announcement. it finds in that direction.
Note: Traffic announcements may not be End Phone Call
available in all areas.
Press to end a phone call.
Clock
OK and Cursor Arrows
Press to access the clock setting. Use the
center arrow controls to change the hours Use the up and down arrow buttons to
and minutes. You can also set the clock by select the various settings. When you make
pressing MENU and scrolling to Clock your selection, press the left and right
Settings. If not in phone mode, press to arrow buttons to change the settings.
display the clock. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
Display Screen CD Eject

Shows audio and SYNC information. Press to eject a CD.
Number Block CD Slot

In radio mode, store your favorite stations Insert a CD.
for later access. When tuned to any station,
press and hold a preset button until sound Play/Pause
returns. In CD mode, press a button to Press to either play or pause a track when
select a track. In phone mode, press the listening to a CD.
buttons to enter a phone number.
Answer or Make a Phone Call
Press to either answer or make a phone
call.
284
Audio System
Volume and Power AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch AM/FM/CD/SYNC/
the system on and off. TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY
Menu
WARNING
Press this button to access different audio Driving while distracted can result in
system features. loss of vehicle control, crash and
Phone you use extreme caution when using any
Press this to access the phone features of device that may take your focus off the
the SYNC system. See your SYNC road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
information. operation of your vehicle. We recommend
Media while driving and encourage the use of
Press to access or switch between your Make sure you are aware of all applicable
auxiliary media devices. local laws that may affect the use of
Radio
Press to listen to the radio or change radio
stations. Press the function buttons below
the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
285
Audio System
E248373
A Volume and power. Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse

B CD slot. In radio mode, select a radio station and
press either button. The system stops at
C Tune the first station it finds in that direction. In
D Seek, fast forward and reverse. CD mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to move
E CD eject.
quickly forward or backward through the
current track.
Volume and Power
CD Eject
Press to switch the system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume. Press to eject a CD.
CD Slot
Insert a CD.
Tune
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
286
Audio System
RADIO (If Equipped) Track Selection

• Press the seek up once to move to the
Antenna next track or press it repeatedly to
access later tracks.
• Press the seek down once to replay the
current track. When pressing within two
seconds of the start of a track, the
previous track plays.
• Press the seek down repeatedly to
select previous tracks.
• Press the up or down arrow to select
the required track, then press OK.
Select a track by using the numeric keypad.
E261117 Dial the track number until complete (for
example, 1 then 2 for track 12), or dial the
You can temporarily remove the mast by number and directly press OK.
unscrewing it from the base.
Note: Remove the antenna mast before Fast Forward and Reverse
entering a car wash. Make sure you firmly Press and hold the seek up or down to
screw in the mast when reattaching it to search forward or backward through the
maintain optimum radio reception. tracks.
COMPACT DISC PLAYER - Shuffle and Random

VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/AUX Random track playback, also known as
IN/USB/BLUETOOTH shuffle, plays all tracks on the CD in
random order.
Compact Disc Playback Type One
Note: During playback, the display indicates Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the
the disc, track and time that have elapsed system can shuffle tracks for the whole CD,
since the start of the track. or within the current folder.
During radio reception, press CD once to Press shuffle in CD MODE.
start CD playback.
After loading a disc, playback starts Type Two
immediately. Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the
system can shuffle tracks for the whole CD,
or within the current folder.
Press MENU and select CD MODE.
Select shuffle to switch the function on or
off.
287
Audio System
Type Three Type Two

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the
system can shuffle tracks for the whole CD, system can scan tracks on the CD or within
or within the current folder. the current folder. Press OK to toggle these
options.
Press function button 2.
Various scan modes are possible,
Use the seek up or down button to select
according to the type of CD currently
the next track to shuffle, if required.
playing.
Repeat Compact Disc Tracks Press MENU and select CD MODE.
Type One Select SCAN to switch the function on or
off.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the
system can repeat the current track or all Type Three
tracks within the current folder.
Press REPEAT in CD MODE. system can scan tracks on the CD or within
the current folder.
Type Two
system can repeat the current track or all MP3 File Playback
tracks within the current folder.
MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3) is a standard
Press MENU and select CD MODE. technology and format for compressing
Select REPEAT to switch the function on audio data. This allows a more efficient
or off. The track replays after it ends. use of the media.
The system can play MP3 files recorded
Type Three on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW formats.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the The disc must be in the ISO 9660 level 1
system can repeat the current track or all or level 2 format, or Joliet or Romeo in the
tracks within the current folder. expansion format. It also uses a disc
recorded in multi session.
ISO 9660 Format
Compact Disc Track Scanning
This is the most common international
The scan function allows you to preview standard for the logical format of files and
each track for approximately 8 seconds. folders on a CD-ROM.
Type One There are several specification levels. In
Level 1, file names must be in the 8.3
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the format (no more than eight characters in
system can scan tracks on the CD or within the name, no more than three characters
the current folder. in the extension MP3 and WMA) and in
Press CD/AUX to select CD MODE. capital letters.
Lightly press SCAN/AS to scan CD.
288
Audio System
Folder names can be no longer than eight The following discs take a longer time to
characters. There can be no more than start playback:
eight folder levels (trees). Level 2 • A disc recorded with complicated tree
specifications allow file names up to 31 structure.
characters long.
• A disc recorded in multi session.
Each folder can have up to eight trees.
• A non-finalized disc, where you can add
For Joliet or Romeo in the expansion more data.
format, consider these restrictions when
configuring your CD writing software. Playing a Multi Session Disc
Multi Session When the first track of the first session is

audio CD data only, the audio CD data of
This recording method enables adding of the first session plays. Non-audio CD data,
data using the track-at-once method. MP3 file information (such as track number
Conventional CDs begin at a CD control and time) displays with no sound.
area called the lead-in and end at an area When the first track of the first session is
called lead-out. A multi session CD is a CD not audio CD data:
having multiple sessions, with each • If an MP3 file is on the disc, the system
segment from lead-in to lead-out regarded skips these file and other data. Audio
as a single session. CD data is not recognized.
CD-Extra: The format that records audio • If no MP3 file is in the disc, nothing
(audio CD data) as tracks on session 1, and plays. Audio CD data is not recognized.
records data as tracks on session 2.
Mixed CD: In this format, data records as MP3 Files Playback Order
track 1 and audio (audio CD data) records Note: The system skips any folder that does
as track 2. not include an MP3 file.
File Formats To specify a desired playback order before
the folder or file name, input the order by
With formats other than ISO 9660 level 1 number (for example, 01 or 02) then record
and level 2, folder names or file names may the contents onto a disc. The order differs
not display correctly. depending on the writing software.
When naming, be sure to add the file The playback order of the folders and files
extension MP3 to the file name. are as shown.
Putting the extension MP3 to a file other
than MP3, the unit cannot recognize the
file correctly and generates random noise
that could damage your speakers.
289
Audio System
MP3 Navigation
You can record MP3 tracks on the CD in
several ways. You can place them in the
root directory like a conventional audio CD,
or in folders that may represent categories,
such as album, artist, or genre.
The normal playing sequence on CDs with
multiple folders is:
• Play the tracks within the root (top
level) first.
• Then the tracks in any folder(s) within
the root.
• Then move onto the second folder, and
so forth.
To navigate to a track:
1. Press the up or down arrow buttons to
enter the track list.
2. Navigate the hierarchy using the arrow
buttons to select another folder or
E104206 track (file).
3. Press OK to select a highlighted track.
ID3 Tag Version 2
MP3 Display Options
The following occurs when an MP3 file
containing a tag plays: When an MP3 disc is playing, limited
• When skipping a portion of a tag (at information encoded in each track
the beginning of the track) there is no displays. Such information normally
sound output. Skip time changes includes:
depending on the tag capacity. • The file name.
Example: At 64 kbytes, it is about 2
seconds (with RealJukebox). • The folder name.
• The displayed elapsed playing time • ID3 information (album or artist name).
when skipping a portion of the tag is The unit normally shows the file name that
inaccurate. For MP3 files of a bit rate is playing. To select one of the other items
other than 128 kbps, time does not of information, press INFO repeatedly until
display accurately during playback. the required item appears in the display.
• When an MP3 file is created with MP3
conversion software (such as CD Text Display Options
RealJukebox - a registered trademark Note: You can select these display options
of RealNetworks Inc.), the tag in the same way as MP3 displays.
generates.
290
Audio System
When an audio disc with CD text is playing,

limited information encoded in each track
displays. Such information normally
includes:
• The disc name.
• The artist name.
• The track name.
Ending Compact Disc Playback

To restore radio reception on all units,
press RADIO. E191758
Note: The CD does not eject. The disc The auxiliary input jack allows you to
pauses at the point where radio reception connect and play music from your portable
returned. music player through your vehicle speakers.
To resume CD playback, press CD again. You can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones. Your
audio extension cable must have male
AUDIO INPUT JACK (If Equipped) connectors at each end.
1. Make sure your vehicle is stationary
WARNINGS with the audio unit and the portable
Driving while distracted can result in music player switched off.
loss of vehicle control, crash and 2. Plug the extension cable from the
injury. We strongly recommend that device into the audio input jack.
device that may take your focus off the 3. Switch on the radio and select either a
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe tuned FM station or a CD.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend 4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch on your device and adjust the
volume to half the maximum level.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable 6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN
local laws that may affect the use of appears in the display. You should hear
electronic devices while driving. music from your device even if it is low.
Always place your device in a secure 7. Adjust the volume on your device until
location in your vehicle so it does not it reaches the volume level of the FM
become a projectile in a sudden stop station or CD. Do this by switching back
or crash. Failure to follow this instruction and forth between the AUX and FM or
could result in personal injury. CD controls.
Use the vehicle audio unit buttons to
restore playback from the vehicle audio
unit, while your device remains connected.
Note: The audio extension cable must be
long enough for you to safely store the
device when your vehicle is moving.
291
Audio System
Note: For optimum performance when The USB port allows you to plug in media
using any auxiliary device set the volume on playing devices, memory sticks and charge
the device high. This reduces audio devices, if supported.
interference when charging the device using
the vehicle power supply.
MEDIA HUB
Note: For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your device while WARNING
USB PORT injury. We strongly recommend that
WARNING device that may take your focus off the
Driving while distracted can result in road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
loss of vehicle control, crash and operation of your vehicle. We recommend
injury. We strongly recommend that against the use of any hand-held device
you use extreme caution when using any while driving and encourage the use of
device that may take your focus off the voice-operated systems when possible.
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe Make sure you are aware of all applicable
operation of your vehicle. We recommend local laws that may affect the use of
against the use of any hand-held device electronic devices while driving.
voice-operated systems when possible. The media hub may be on the instrument
Make sure you are aware of all applicable panel or center console.
local laws that may affect the use of The media hub may contain one or more
electronic devices while driving. of the following inputs:
• USB ports. See USB Port (page 292).
• Audio input jack. See Audio Input
Jack (page 291).
E201595
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
292
Audio System
Audio unit display Rectification
Please check CD General error message for CD fault conditions, such as

cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Make sure
the disc is loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, or
replace disc with known music disc. If error persists
contact your dealer.
CD drive malfunction General error message for CD fault conditions such as
possible mechanism fault.
CD drive high temp. Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work until
it has cooled down.
IPOD ERROR READING DEVICE General error message for iPod fault conditions, such
as cannot read the data. Ensure iPod is inserted
correctly. If error persists contact your dealer.
293
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING

E198355
This allows you to:

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your • Make and receive calls
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and • Access and play music from your
portable media player. media player
294
• Use Emergency Assistance and When using SYNC:

*
applications, via SYNC Applink • Do not operate playing devices if the
• Access phonebook contacts and music power cords or cables are broken, split
using voice commands or damaged. Carefully place cords and
cables where you cannot step on them
• Stream music from your connected cell
or they do not interfere with the
phone
operation of pedals, seats,
• Select pre-defined text messages (if compartments or safe driving abilities.
your device supports this)
• Do not leave playing devices in your
• Use the advanced voice recognition vehicle during extreme conditions as it
system could cause them damage. Refer to
• Charge your USB device (if your device your device's manual for further
supports this) information.
*
These features are not available in all • Do not attempt to service or repair the
markets and may require activation. system. See an authorized dealer.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Privacy Information
Make sure that you review your device's When a cell phone is connected to SYNC,
manual before using it with SYNC. the system creates a profile that is linked
to that cell phone. The system creates the
Support profile to offer you more mobile features
and to operate more efficiently. Among
For further support, see an authorized other things, this profile may contain data
dealer. For more information, visit the about your phonebook, text messages
regional Ford website. (read and unread) and call history. This
will include the history of calls when your
Safety Information cell phone was not connected to the
system. If you connect a media player, the
WARNING system creates and retains an index of
Driving while distracted can result in supported media content. The system also
loss of vehicle control, crash and records a short development log of
injury. We strongly recommend that approximately 10 minutes of all recent
you use extreme caution when using any system activity. The log profile and other
device that may take your focus off the system data may be used to improve the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe system and help diagnose any problems
operation of your vehicle. We recommend that may occur.
against the use of any hand-held device The cell phone profile, media player index
while driving and encourage the use of and development log will remain in the
voice-operated systems when possible. system unless deleted. They are generally
Make sure you are aware of all applicable accessible in your vehicle only when you
local laws that may affect the use of connect your cell phone or media player.
electronic devices while driving. If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you complete
a master reset to erase all stored
information. See SYNC™ (page 294).
295
Special equipment is required to access USING VOICE RECOGNITION

system data. Access to your vehicle's
SYNC module is also required. We will not This system helps you control many
access the system data for any purpose features using voice commands. This
other than as described without consent. allows you to keep your hands on the
Examples where system data can be steering wheel and focus on what is in front
accessed are for a court order, where of you.
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third Initiating a Voice Session
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information Press the voice button. A list of
independently of us. Further privacy available voice commands
information is available. See SYNC™ E142599 appears in the display.
Applications and Services (page 309).
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
(cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You

can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
help This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
(main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses

Helpful Hints
between words.
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is • You can interrupt the system at any
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from time while it is speaking by pressing the
open windows and road vibrations may voice button. You can cancel a voice
prevent the system from correctly session by pressing and holding the
recognizing spoken commands. voice button.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
296
System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of

interaction in order to help you learn to use
The system provides feedback through the system. You can change these settings
audible tones, prompts, questions and at any time.
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of Adjusting the Interaction Level
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less Press the voice button. When
instruction and feedback. prompted, say:
E142599
Voice Command Action and Description
voice settings
Then either of the following:
interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting, press the voice button and when prompted say:
voice settings
Then either of the following:
confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations, the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
297
To adjust this setting, press the voice button and when prompted say:
voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on When switched on, this feature prompts
you to confirm any voice initiated call
command prior to placing the call.
phone confirmation off The system makes a best guess; you may
still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
• Redialing.
Changing the Voice Settings
• Call waiting notification.
In addition to using voice commands to
• Caller identification.
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display. Other features such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
To change the voice settings press the download are cell phone dependent
Menu button then select: features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, refer to your device's manual
Menu Item or visit the regional Ford website.
SYNC-Settings
Pairing a Cell Phone For the First
Voice settings Time
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the
system allows you to make and receive
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR hands-free calls.
PHONE
Note: You must switch the ignition and
Hands-free calling is one of the main radio on.
features of SYNC. While the system Note: To scroll through the menus, press
supports a variety of features, many are the up or down arrows on your audio system.
dependent on your cell phone's
1. Make sure you switch on the Bluetooth
functionality.
feature on your cell phone before
At a minimum, most cell phones with starting the search. Refer to your
Bluetooth wireless technology support the device's manual if necessary.
following functions: 2. Press the PHONE button. When the
• Answering an incoming call. audio display indicates that no phones
• Ending a call. are paired, select the option to add.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
298
3. When a message to begin pairing

appears in the audio display, search for Press the voice button and when
SYNC on your cell phone to start the prompted say:
pairing process.
Voice Command Action and Descrip-
4. Select SYNC on your cell phone. tion
5. Wait until the PIN appears on the
phone display. Compare the PIN on the (pair ([Bluetooth] Follow the instruc-
phone with the PIN shown in the audio device | phone | tions on the audio
display and accept the request on the Bluetooth audio) | display.
phone and the vehicle display. The add phone)
display indicates when the pairing is Words in square brackets [ ] are optional
successful. and do not have to be spoken for the
Note: In some cases, the phone will request system to understand the command.
to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN
provided by the system in the audio display. Depending on your phone's capability and
The display indicates when the pairing is your market, the system may prompt you
successful. with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
Depending on your cell phone's capability
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
and your market, the system may prompt
first upon vehicle start-up) and
you with questions such as setting the
downloading your phonebook.
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone the system Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
automatically tries to connect with first
when you switch the ignition on) or Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the
downloading your phonebook. system allows you to make and receive
The information display may hands-free calls.
show your cell phone's battery Note: You must switch the ignition and
charge level and signal strength. radio on.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
Using Voice Commands the up or down arrows on your audio system.
Make sure to switch on your 1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature on
phone's Bluetooth feature your cell phone is switched on before
E142599 before starting the search. See starting the search. Refer to your
your device's manual if necessary. device's manual if necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth devices.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device to start the
pairing process.
299
7. Select SYNC on your cell phone. Voice Command

8. Wait until the PIN appears on the
phone display. Compare the PIN on the dial [[a] number] 1
phone with the PIN shown in the audio

display and accept the request on the ([go to] privacy [on] | transfer to 2
phone and the vehicle display. The phone | handsfree off)

display indicates when the pairing is
(hold call [on] | place call on hold) 2
successful.
Note: In some cases, the phone will request join (calls | call) 2
to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN

provided by the system in the audio display. mute call [on] 2
The display indicates when the pairing is
successful. (mute call off | un-mute call) 2
The system may prompt you with

questions such as setting the current cell (turn ringer on | silent mode off)
phone as the primary cell phone or
downloading your phonebook. (turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
[text] (messages | message) 3
Cell Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when help
prompted say:
E142599 ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
Voice Command group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone) 1
See Dial table below.
Then say any of the following: 2
These commands are only valid while in
call (___) a phone call.
3
See the text message table below.
call ___ at home
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work) Dial Commands
call ___ on (cell | mobile) Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
call ___ on other
Pound This will add a # symbol to the number or name.

Number 0 (zero) to 9 (nine)
Asterisk or Star This will add a * symbol to the number or name.
clear Deletes all entered digits
300
(delete | correct) Deletes the last set of entered digits.

Plus This will add a + symbol to the number or name.
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or any button on the audio unit.
To end the call, press the end call button

Phonebook Hints on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display and press OK.
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name, browse phonebook, select a contact Receiving a Call
and press:
When receiving a call, you can:
Menu Item • Answer the call by pressing the accept
call button on the steering wheel or by
Hear it selecting the accept call option in the
audio display and pressing the OK
Making a Call button.
Press the voice button and when prompted • Reject the call by pressing the reject
say either: call button on the steering wheel or by
selecting the reject call option in the
audio display and pressing the OK
Voice
Action and Description button.
Command
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
call [[a] SYNC prompts you to say
name] the name you wish to dial. Cell Phone Options During an
Active Call
dial [[a] SYNC prompts you to say
number] the numbers that you wish During an active call, you have extra menu
to dial. After you say the features which become available, for
numbers, the system example putting a call on hold.
confirms it. To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
When the system has stated the audio display or select the option for more.
number, you say any of the following:
Voice
Action and Description
Command
(dial | This initiates the call.

send)
(delete | To erase the last spoken
correct) digit.
clear To erase all spoken digits.
301
Menu Item Action and Description
Mic. off Turn your vehicle's microphone off. To turn the microphone
on, select the option again.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your
cell phone for a more private conversation. When selected,
the audio display will indicate the call is private.
Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
will indicate the call is on hold.
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system numeric keypad, for
example numbers for passwords.
Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of
three callers on a multi-party or conference call.
1. Select the option for more.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the option for more.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.

2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call history Access your call history log.

2. Scroll to the option until call history appears. Press the
OK button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
302
Accessing Features Through the The system attempts to automatically

Cell Phone Menu re-download your phonebook and call
history each time your cell phone connects
You can access your call history, to the system. You must turn on the auto
phonebook, sent text messages as well as download feature if your cell phone
access cell phone and system settings. supports it.
You can also access advanced features
such as emergency assistance. Note: This is a cell phone dependent
feature.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
cell phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
Dial a number Dial a number using the audio system numeric keypad.
Redial Redial the last number called (if available). Press the OK
button to select.
Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to quickly access
an alphabetical category. You can also use the letters on
the keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
Call history Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.

1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select either incoming calls, outgoing calls or
missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection.
Speed Dial Select one of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and press and hold one of the numbers
on the audio system numeric keypad.
Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages.
BT Devices Access the following option for Bluetooth device menu list-
ings:
Add
303
Delete
Conn.
Discon.
Master
Phone settings View various settings and features on your cell phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature

Text Messaging and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 5 km/h or less.
The system allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The When a new message arrives, an audible
system can also read incoming text tone sounds and the audio display
messages to you so that you do not have indicates you have a new message.
to take your eyes off the road.
To hear the message you can say:
Note: This is a cell phone dependent
feature. Voice command Action and Descrip-
tion
Receiving a Text Message
(listen to | read) Select this option
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. ([text] message) to have the system
Your phone must support downloading text read the message
messages using Bluetooth to receive to you.
incoming text messages.
Using the screen, you also have the following options:

Menu Action and Description
Item
Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
304
Menu Action and Description

Item
Reply to Press the OK button to access, and then scroll

sender through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Forward Press the OK button to forward the message to
msg. anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and

Sending, Downloading and Deleting then press the OK button.
Your Text Messages
Choose from the following:
New When you select the option to send a text message, a list of
pre-defined messages appear in the audio display. Allows
you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set
of 15 messages.
View Allows you to read the full message and in addition provides
the option to have the message read out to you by the system.
To go to the next message select the more option. This allows
you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the
message.
Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system
(not your cell phone). The audio display indicates when all
your text messages have been deleted.
More... Allows you to delete all messages or to manually trigger a
download of all unread messages from your cell phone.
2. Select the confirmation option when

Sending a Text Message the contact appears and press the OK
1. Select the send option when the button again to confirm when the
desired selection is highlighted in the system asks if you would like to send
audio display. the message. Each text message is
sent with a pre-defined signature.
305
Note: You can send text messages two Accessing Your Cell Phone
ways. You can chose a contact from your Settings
phonebook, call history or by entering a
phone number and selecting the text option These are cell phone dependent features.
from the audio display. You can also reply Your cell phone settings allow you to
to a received message in the inbox. access and adjust features such as your
ringtone, text message notification, modify
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text your phonebook and set up automatic
message. download.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, then press the OK button.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
Set as master If this option is checked, the system will use this cell phone
as the master when there is more than one cell phone paired
to the system. This option can be changed for all paired cell
phones (not only for the active one) using the Bluetooth
devices menu.
Phone status See the cell phone name, provider name, cell phone number,
signal level and battery level. When done, press the left arrow
button to return to the cell phone status menu.
Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's or your cell phone's). If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone's ringtone sounds
when you choose the cell phone ringtone option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when
a text message arrives. Press the OK button to turn the
audible tone on or off.
Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook, such as add, delete,
or download. Press the OK button to select and scroll
between the options in the table below.
To modify the phone book preferences,

choose from the following:
306
Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cell phone. Refer to your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current
phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to
the menu for phone settings.
Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook
to the system.
Auto-download When automatic download is switched on, any changes,
additions or deletions saved in the system since your last
download are deleted.
When automatic download is switched off, your phonebook
will not be downloaded when your cell phone connects to
the system.
Your phonebook, call history and text messages can only be
accessed when your paired cell phone is connected to the
system.
Check or uncheck this option to automatically download your
phonebook each time your cell phone connects to the system.
Downloading times are cell phone dependent and quantity
dependent.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options

Bluetooth Devices
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth devices. Use the arrow buttons 2. Scroll until the Bluetooth device option
to scroll through the menu options. It appears, then press the OK button.
allows you to add, connect and delete 3. Scroll to select from the following
devices and set a cell phone as primary. options:
Add Pair additional cell phones to the system.

1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your cell phone. Refer to your
device's manual if necessary.
3. Select SYNC on your cell phone.
307
4. Wait until the PIN appears on the phone display. Compare

the PIN on the phone with the PIN shown in the audio
display and accept the request on the phones and the
vehicles display. The display indicates when the pairing
*
is successful.
5. When the option to set the cell phone as the primary cell
phone appears, select either yes or no.
6. Depending on the functionality of your cell phone, the
system may ask you extra questions (for example, if you
would like to download your phonebook). Select either
yes or no to confirm your response.
Delete After deleting a cell phone from the list, the cell phone can
only be connected again by repeating the full pairing process.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks
to delete the selected device.
Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cell phone
every time you switch the ignition on. When a cell phone is
selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked
with an asterisk.
Set a previously paired cell phone as your primary cell phone.
Select the master option to confirm the primary cell phone.
Conn. Connect a previously paired cell phone. You can only have
one cell phone connected at a time to use the cell phone
functionality. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous cell phone will be disconnected from the telephone
services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth
devices for the cell phone functionality and the Bluetooth
audio music playback feature at the same time.
Discon. Disconnects the selected cell phone. Select this option and
confirm when asked to. After disconnecting a cell phone, it
can be connected again without repeating the full pairing
process.
*
In some cases, the phone will request to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN provided by
the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and

System Settings then press the OK button.
1. Press the MENU button. 3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
308
Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to turn the Bluetooth interface

of the system on or off. Select this option then press the OK
button to change the option's status.
Set defaults This selection does not erase your indexed information
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices).
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. Return to the factory default settings.
Master reset Completely erase all information stored on the system
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices)
and return to the factory default settings.
display. The display indicates when complete and the system
takes you back to the previous menu.
Install on SYNC Install applications or software updates you have down-
loaded.
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB thumb drive in order to finish an
installation successfully.
System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number.
Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 296).
Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up or down arrows
to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right
arrows to enter and leave a folder. Media content can be
directly selected for playback from this menu.
Press the MENU button to enter the

system menu.
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
A list of available applications appears.
Each application may have its own specific
settings.
309
Message Description and Action
SYNC-Apps Scroll to this option, and then press OK.
If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the

SYNC Emergency Assistance (If fuel pump shut off, the system may
Equipped) contact emergency services through a
paired and connected cell phone. For more
WARNINGS information about the system and
For this feature to work, your mobile Emergency Assistance, visit the regional
phone must be Bluetooth-enabled Ford website.
and compatible with the system. Note: Before selecting this feature, you
Always place your phone in a secure must read the Emergency Assistance privacy
location in your vehicle so it does not notice later in this section for important
become a projectile or get damaged information.
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause Note: When you switch this feature on or
serious injury to someone or damage the off, that setting applies for all paired cell
phone which could prevent Emergency phones. If you have turned this feature off
Assistance from working properly. and a previously paired phone connects
Unless the Emergency Assistance when you switch on the ignition, either a
setting is on prior to a collision, the voice message plays, a display message or
system does not attempt to place icon is shown, or both.
an emergency call. This could delay the Note: Every cell phone operates differently.
response time, increasing the risk of serious While this feature works with most cell
injury or death. phones, some cell phones may experience
Do not wait for Emergency difficulties using this feature.
Assistance to make an emergency Note: Make sure you are familiar with the
call if you can do it yourself. Dial information about airbag deployment. See
emergency services immediately to avoid Supplementary Restraints System (page
a delayed response time. If you do not hear 25).
Emergency Assistance within five seconds
of the crash, the system or cell phone may Switching Emergency Assistance On
be damaged or non-functional. and Off
Press the MENU button then select:
Message Action
SYNC-Apps Press OK.

Emerg. assist Press OK. Select the option you require and press OK.
310
Display Options • A connected cell phone must have

adequate network coverage, battery
If you switch on this feature, a confirmation
power and signal strength.
message appears in the display.
• Your vehicle must have battery power.
If you switch off this feature, a dialog will
appear in the display, which allows you to Note: This feature only works in countries
set a voice reminder. or regions where SYNC Emergency
Assistance can call the local emergency
Off with voice reminder provides a display services. Visit the regional Ford website for
and voice reminder when your cell phone details.
connects and your vehicle starts.
Off without voice reminder provides a In the Event of a Crash
display reminder only without a voice Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or
reminder when your cell phone connects. triggers the fuel pump shut off (which may
To make sure that Emergency Assistance turn on Emergency Assistance). However,
works correctly: if Emergency Assistance is triggered the
• The system must have power and be system tries to contact the emergency
working correctly at the time of the services. If a connected cell phone sustains
crash and during feature activation and damage or loses connection to the system,
use. it searches for and tries to connect to any
available previously paired cell phone. The
• You must switch on the feature before system attempts to make an emergency
a crash. call.
• You must have a cell phone connected Before making a call:
to the system.
• If you do not cancel the call and SYNC
• In certain countries, it may be makes a successful call, an
necessary to have a valid and introductory message plays for the
registered SIM card with credit in order emergency operator. After this
to place and maintain an emergency message, there is hands-free
call. communication between your vehicle's
• For India only, if you are using a cell occupants and the operator.
phone equipped with multiple SIMs, • The system provides a short time
make sure that there is a default SIM window (approximately 10 seconds)
selected in the outbound call settings to cancel the call. If you do not cancel
of your phone. If not, an emergency call the call, the system attempts to make
may not be initiated during an an emergency call.
Emergency Assistance event, without
user interaction. Refer to your cell • The system plays a message letting
phone user manual to understand you know when it attempts to make an
more about outbound call settings. emergency call. You can cancel the call
by selecting the relevant function
• A connected cell phone must have the button or by pressing the end call
ability to make and maintain an button on the steering wheel.
outgoing call at the time of the crash.
311
During a call: Note: The emergency operator may also

• Emergency Assistance uses your receive information from the cellular
vehicle GPS or cellular network network such as cell phone number, cell
information when available to phone location and cell phone carrier name
determine the most appropriate independent from SYNC Emergency
language to use. It alerts the Assistance.
emergency operator of the crash and Emergency Assistance may not work if:
delivers the introductory message. This
• Your cell phone or Emergency
may include your vehicle GPS
Assistance hardware sustains damage
coordinates.
in the crash.
• The language the system uses to
• The vehicle battery or the system has
interact with the occupants of your
no power.
vehicle may differ from the language
used to deliver information to the • A crash ejects your cell phone from
emergency operator. your vehicle.
• After the delivery of the introductory • You do not have a valid and registered
message the voice line opens so that SIM card with credit in your cell phone.
you can speak hands-free with the • You are in a country or region where
emergency operator. the SYNC Emergency Assistance
• When the line is connected, you must cannot place the call. Visit the regional
be prepared to provide your name, Ford website for details.
phone number and location
information immediately. Important Information about the
Emergency Assistance Feature
Note: While the system provides
information to the emergency operator, the Emergency Assistance does not currently
system plays a message letting you know call emergency services in some countries.
it is sending important information. It then Visit the regional Ford website for the
lets you know when the line is open to start latest details.
hands-free communication.
Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice
Note: During an Emergency Assistance call,
an emergency priority screen appears which When you switch on Emergency
contains vehicle GPS coordinates when Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
available. services that your vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
Note: It is possible that GPS location
airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut
information is not available at the time of
off. This feature has the capability to
the crash; in this case, Emergency
disclose your location information to the
Assistance will still attempt to place an
emergency operator or other details about
emergency call.
your vehicle or crash to provide the most
Note: It is possible that the emergency appropriate emergency services.
services will not receive the GPS
If you do not want to disclose this
coordinates; in this case, hands-free
information, do not switch on the feature.
communication with an emergency operator
is available.
312
SYNC AppLink Note: Make sure you have an active account

for the app that you have downloaded.
The system enables voice and manual Some apps will work automatically with no
control of SYNC AppLink enabled setup. Other apps will want you to configure
smartphone apps. Once an app is running your personal settings and personalize your
through AppLink, you can control main experience by creating stations or favorites.
features of the app through voice We recommend you do this at home or
commands and manual controls. outside of your vehicle.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Note: iPhone users need to connect the Scroll through the list of available
phone to the USB port. applications and press OK to select an
app. Once an app is running through SYNC,
Note: Android users need to connect the press the right arrow button to access the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. app menu. You can access various app
Note: For information on available apps, features from here, for example thumbs
supported smartphone devices and up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford button to exit the app menu.
website. Press the MENU button then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps Scroll to this option, and then press OK.
Find new Apps Select this option if the app required is not listed.
Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app cannot be found, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Command Description and Action
mobile (apps | applica- Say the name of the application after the tone. The applica-
tions) tion will start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app.
The following voice commands are always

available:
313
Command Description and Action
[main menu] help Use this command to hear a list of available voice commands.
mobile (apps | applica- The system will prompt you to say the name of the app to
tions) start it.
list [mobile] (apps | The system will list all of the currently available mobile apps.
applications)
find [new] [mobile] The system will search your connected mobile device for
(apps | applications) SYNC compatible apps.
(quit | exit | close) Use this command followed by the name of the app.
You can also say the name of any SYNC Enabling and Disabling Push
compitable app to start it on SYNC. To see Notifications
a list of the available voice commands for
Some apps can send push notifications. A
an app, say the name of an app followed
push notification is an alert from an app
by help. For example you could say
running in the background and is delivered
"Spotify help".
by voice, pop up or both. This may be
particularly useful for news or location
based apps.
Press the MENU button then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
SYNC-Settings
All Apps If push notifications are supported, this setting will be listed.
Select to enable or disable the feature as required.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
To use the system you must consent to
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
send and receive app authorization
usage statistics and debugging
information and updates, using the data
information. Updates may take place
plan associated with the connected device.
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
314
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford App Status

is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider, You can view the current status of an app
when your vehicle sends or receives data in the settings menu. There are three
through the connected device. This includes possible statuses:
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Update needed The system has detected a new app requiring authorization
or a general permissions update is required.
Up-to-date No update is required.
Updating... The system is trying to receive an update.
Options in the settings menu:
Request Update If an update is required and you want to manually request

the update, for example when you are in a Wi-Fi hotspot.
Disable Updates Select this option to disable automatic updates.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the

App Permissions system may ask you to grant certain
Permissions are divided by groups. You can permissions, for example:
grant these group permissions individually. • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
You can change a permission group status information to the app including, but
any time when not driving, by using the not limited to: Fuel level, fuel
settings menu. consumption, engine speed, battery
voltage, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, ambient temperature, date
and time.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information, including,
but not limited to: MyKey, seatbelt
status, engine speeds, braking events,
brake pedal switch, acceleration,
accelerator pedal position, clutch pedal
switch, trip length, trip time, trip cost,
percent engine on time, and percent of
time at speed.
315
• To allow your vehicle to provide Confirm that the USB device has been
location information, including: GPS formatted correctly and has the following
and speed. specifications:
• To allow the app to send push • USB 2.0.
notifications using the vehicle display • File format must be FAT16/32.
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Note: NTFS file format is not supported.
Note: You will only need to grant The format of the audio files on the USB
permissions the first time you use an app device must be:
with SYNC. • MP3.
Note: We are not responsible or liable for • Non DRM protected WMA.
any damages or loss of privacy relating to • WAV.
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve us to provide • AAC.
to an app.
Connecting Your Media Player to
the USB Port
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
Note: If your media player has a power
MEDIA PLAYER switch, make sure you switch on the device.
You can access and play music from your To Connect Using Voice Commands
media player through your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
menu or voice commands. You can also port.
sort and play your music by specific 2. Press the voice button and when
categories, for example artist or albums. prompted say:
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
media player including: iPod, Zune, Plays
from device players, and most USB drives.
SYNC also supports audio formats, for
example MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Voice Command Description and Action
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands. Refer to the media voice commands.
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player])
appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
2. Press the Media button (next to the

To Connect Using the System Menu audio display) until an initializing
message appears in the display.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
316
Menu Item Description and Action
Browse USB Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the screen returns to the playback menu.
Choose from the following:
Menu Item
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Reset USB
Exit
What's Playing? Media Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when
At any time during playback, you can press
prompted say:
the voice button and ask the system what E142599
is playing. The system reads the metadata
tags of the current track, if populated.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays
this (what's or what is) playing.
317
pause Pauses device playback.

play Resumes device playback.
play [album] ___
play all Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | Plays the next track on the current media.
chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | Plays the previous track on current media.
podcast | chapter | episode]
[play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a play list of similar genre to the one
currently playing.
play [song | track | title | file]
repeat off
repeat one [on] Repeats the current track.
shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current play list in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle off
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | At any time during playback, you can press
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what the voice button and ask the system what is
| which) (song | track | artist) is this | playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what (if populated) of the current track.
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it Examples of USB Commands

could be the name of anything, such as a
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
group, artist or song. For example you
ways to find and play a song using voice.
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
318
• Play song "Penny Lane".

• Play "Penny Lane". Voice Command
If we wanted to play the entire album, we pause
can say:
play
• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
• Play "Magical Mystery Tour". next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
Bluetooth Audio
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast
The system is also capable of playing | chapter | episode]
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth. Media Menu Features
To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the
MEDIA button (next to the audio display) The media menu allows you to select how
or Source button, or press the voice button to play your music, for example by artist,
and when prompted say: genre, shuffle or repeat, and to find similar
music or reset the index of your USB
devices.
Voice Command
Press AUX to select USB playback.
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
Options This will enter the media menu.
Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
319
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice

recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Reset SYNC USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press MEDIA button (next to the audio

Accessing Your USB Song Library display) to select USB playback.
port.
Browse USB This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist and track or even to browse what
is on your USB device.
If there are no media files to access, the

display indicates there is no media. If there
are media files, you have the following
options to scroll through and select:
Play all Play all indexed media files from your playing device one at
*
a time in numerical order.
1. Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the
display.
Playlists Access your playlists from formats, ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
*
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press OK.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press OK.
320
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. Once selected, the
system lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetic-
*
ally.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press OK.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by albums.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired albums, and then press OK.
Genres Sort indexed music by genre type.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press OK.
Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC; other saved files are not
visible.
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on your flash drive,
and then press OK.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the numeric keypad to jump
in the list.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the

Accessing Your USB Song Library audio display) to select USB playback.
port.
Browse USB This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
321
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media.
If there are media files, you have the following options:

Play all Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*
in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*
or MTP).
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
*
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by album.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
322
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and

then press the OK button.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
Line In Audio
Using Voice Commands
To access the Line in audio source and
You can access and view your USB songs
when prompted say:
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB Voice Command
port.
((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio
Press the voice button and when video)
prompted, say any of the following
commands: USB 2 (If Equipped)
Voice Command Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
(browse | search | show) all (album | at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
albums) the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
vehicle's center console.
artists)
You can plug in an additional USB device
(browse | search | show) all (genre | into the second USB port.
genres)
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
(browse | search | show) all (playlist | iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
playlists) one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs but does not support playback from it.
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
Bluetooth Devices and System
(browse | search | show) album ___
Settings
(browse | search | show) artist ___
You can access these menus using the
(browse | search | show) genre ___ audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 298).
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
323
Voice Commands for Audio Radio Voice Commands

Sources
If you are listening to the radio,
Your voice system allows you to press the voice button, and then
change audio sources with a E142599 say any of the commands in the
E142599 simple voice command. following table.
Press the voice button and when If you are not listening to the radio,
prompted say: press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:
Voice Command
Voice Command
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Radio
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use. You can then say any of the following
commands.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
[tune [to]] AM 2 autoset)
Bluetooth (audio | stereo) [tune [to]] AM 2
(disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM preset ___
[tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | [tune [to]] FM
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio autoset)
video)
[tune [to]] FM 2
Radio
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | autoset) preset ___
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this | [tune [to]] FM 1
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this) [tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
help
324
Voice Command Voice Command
[tune [to]] preset ___ [play | change to] track [number] ___
Tune repeat (track | song) [on] *
help repeat folder [on]
CD Voice Commands repeat off
If you are listening to a CD, press (shuffle | random | mix) [on | *
the voice button, and then say (tracks | songs) [on]]

E142599 any of the commands in the
following table. (shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
If you are not listening to a CD, press (shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
the voice button and, after the tone,
say: shuffle off
*
Voice Command You need to indicate to the system which
track or folder to repeat or shuffle when
(disc | CD [player]) play using these commands.
You can then say any of the following
commands. SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
pause Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
play should questions arise, please refer to the
tables below.
[play] next track To check your cell phone's compatibility,
[play] previous track visit the regional Ford website.
Cell phone issues
Issue Possible cause Possible solution
A lot of back- The audio control

ground noise settings on your cell Refer to your device's manual about audio
during a phone phone may be affecting adjustments.
call. SYNC performance.
During a call, I Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
can hear the it or removing the battery, then trying again.
Possible cell phone
other person
malfunction. Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
but they cannot
hear me. is not set to off.
325
Cell phone issues
This is a cell phone-

Check your cell phone's compatibility.
dependent feature.
Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
SYNC is not it or removing the battery, then trying again.
able to down-
load my phone- Possible cell phone Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
book. SYNC by selecting the option to add.
malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC.
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
SYNC by selecting the option to add.
The system
says "Phone- If the missing contacts are stored on your
book down- SIM card, try moving them to your cell
loaded" but my Limitations on your cell phone's memory.
SYNC phone- phone's capability. Remove any pictures or special ring tones
book is empty or associated with the missing contact.
is missing
contacts. You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC.
dependent feature.
Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
it or removing the battery, then trying again.
I am having Try deleting your device from SYNC and
trouble deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
connecting my again.
cell phone to Possible cell phone
SYNC. malfunction. Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch off the auto download setting.
Text messaging This is a cell phone-
is not working dependent feature.
on SYNC.
326
Cell phone issues
Possible cell phone Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
malfunction. it or removing the battery, then trying again.
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Make sure the connection status shows
Not Connected.
• Press the blue circle to enter the next
menu.
• Turn on Show Notifications.
• Turn on Sync Contacts.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward

incoming text messages to SYNC.
Repeat these steps for every other Sync
vehicle you are connected to.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text
messages to SYNC if it is unlocked.
Replying to text messages using SYNC is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
This is a cell phone- Access the text messaging menu of SYNC
dependent feature. to see if your cell phone supports the
Audible text feature. Press the PHONE button and then
messages do scroll and select the option for text
not work on my messaging, then press OK.
cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
tion. differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
327
USB and media issues
Try switching off the device, resetting it or

removing the battery, then trying again.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
I am having cable.
trouble Possible device malfunc- Make sure you correctly insert the USB
connecting my tion. cable in to the device and your vehicle's
device. USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
SYNC does not
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
recognize my
This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
device when I
temperatures.
start my vehicle.
This is a device-
Bluetooth audio dependent feature.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
does not
The device is not and press play on your device.
stream.
connected.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popu-
song title, album or genre lated.
SYNC does not information.
recognize music
The file may be Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
that is on my
corrupted. version.
device.
The song may have Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
328
USB and media issues
When I connect From the iPhone or iPod Touch music now

my iPhone or playing screen, select the audio device
iPod Touch airplay icon at the very bottom of your
through the iPhone or iPod Touch screen.
USB and
This is a device limitation. To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
Bluetooth Audio
at the same through Bluetooth Audio, select SYNC.
time, I some- To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
times do not through USB, select Dock Connector.
hear any sound.
Voice command issues
SYNC does not Review the cell phone voice commands

understand and the media voice commands at the
what I am You may be using the beginning of their respective sections.
saying. wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
You may be speaking too The microphone for the system is either in
soon or at the wrong your rear view mirror or in the headliner just
time. above the windshield.
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist exactly as the system
saved it. If you say, "Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music by Prince and
SYNC does not the Revolution or Prince and the New
understand the Power Generation.
name of a song You may not be saying
or artist. the name exactly as the Make sure you are saying the complete title
system saved it. such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If the song titles are in capital letters, you
have to spell them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
329
The system may not be

reading the name the Do not use special characters in the title,
same way you are saying as the system does not recognize them.
it.
Review the cell phone voice commands at
the beginning of the cell phone section.
You may be using the You can also use the cell phone and media
wrong voice commands. suggestion lists to get a list of possible
suggestions when the system cannot fully
understand you. See Using Voice Recog-
nition (page 296).
Make sure you are saying the name exactly
SYNC does not as the system saved it. For example, if the
understand or is You may not be saying contact name is Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe
calling the the name exactly as the Wilson".
wrong contact system saved it. The system works better if you list full
when I want to names such as "Joe Wilson" rather than
make a call. "Joe".
Contacts in your phone-
book may be very short Do not use special characters such as 123
and similar or they may or ICE as the system does not recognize
contain special charac- them.
ters.
Your phonebook If the contacts are in capital letters, you
contacts may be in have to spell them. JAKE requires you to
capital letters. say "Call J-A-K-E".
SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
The SYNC voice contact names stored on your cell phone.
control system
You may be saying the Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
is having trouble
foreign names using the manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
recognizing
currently selected for phonebook and then contact name.
foreign names
language for SYNC. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
stored on my
cell phone. will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
330
The SYNC voice

control system
is having trouble SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
recognizing rules of the selected language to the names
You may be saying the
foreign tracks, stored on your media player or USB flash
foreign names using the
artists, albums, drive. It is able to make some exceptions
currently selected
genres and for very popular artist names (for example,
language for SYNC.
playlist names U2) such that you can always use the
from my media English pronunciation for these artists.
player or USB
flash drive.
SYNC uses a synthetically generated voice
The system rather than pre-recorded human voice.
generates voice SYNC offers several new voice control
prompts and features for a wide range of languages.
SYNC uses text-to-
the pronunci- Dialing a contact name directly from the
speech voice prompt
ation of some phonebook without pre-recording (for
technology.
words may not example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
be accurate for track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
my language. from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
My previous
Bluetooth voice
SYNC offers significant capability beyond
control system
the previous system such as dialing a
allowed me to
The focus of SYNC is to contact name directly from the phonebook
control the
control your mobile without pre-recording (for example, “call
radio, CD, and
devices and the content John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist,
climate control
stored on them. album, genre or playlist directly from your
systems. Why
media player (for example, "play artist
can I not control
Madonna").
these systems
with SYNC?
331
General
SYNC only supports four languages in a

The language single module for text display, voice control
selected for the and voice prompts. The country where you
instrument bought your vehicle dictates the four
cluster and languages based on the most popular
information and SYNC does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
entertainment the currently selected is not available, SYNC remains in the
display does not language for the instru- current active language.
match the ment cluster and inform- SYNC offers several new voice control
SYNC language ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
(phone, USB, display. Dialing a contact name directly from the
Bluetooth phonebook without pre-recording (for
audio, voice example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
control and track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
voice prompts). from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
332
AppLink issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile An AppLink capable Ensure you have a compatible smartphone;

Applications: phone is not connected an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an
When I select to SYNC. iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
"Find New Additionally, ensure your phone is paired
Apps", SYNC and connected to SYNC in order to find
does not find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
any applica- iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's
tions. USB port with an Apple USB cable.
My phone is AppLink-enabled apps Ensure you have downloaded and installed
connected, but are not installed and the latest version of the app from your
I still cannot find running on your mobile phone's app store. Ensure the app is running
any apps. device. on your phone. Some apps require you to
register or login on the app on the phone
before using them with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check
the app's settings menu on the phone.
My phone is Sometime apps do not Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
connected, my properly close and re- find the application if you cannot discover
app(s) are open their connection to it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
running, but I SYNC, over ignition if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, select
still cannot find cycles, for example. that and then restart the app. If the app
any apps. does not have that option, you can also
manually "Force Close" the app by going
to the phone's settings menu, selecting
'Apps.' then finding the particular app and
choosing 'Force stop'. Don't forget to restart
the app afterwards, then select "Find New
Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile
App's Menu.
333
AppLink issues
My Android There is a Bluetooth bug Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by

phone is on some older versions turning it off and then turning Bluetooth
connected, my of the Android OS that back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC
app(s) are may cause apps that should be able to automatically re-connect
running, I were found on your to your phone if you press the "Phone"
restarted them, previous vehicle drive to button.
but I still cannot not be found again if you
find any apps. have not turned off
Bluetooth.
My iPhone is The USB connection to Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
connected, my SYNC may need to be a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
app is running, I reset. to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
restarted the should appear in SYNC's Mobile Apps
app but I still Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
cannot find it on and restart it.
SYNC.
I have an The Bluetooth volume on Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the
Android phone. the phone may be low. device by using the device's volume control
I found and buttons which are most often found on the
started my side of the device.
media app on
SYNC, but there
is no sound or
the sound is
very low.
I can only see Some Android devices Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
some of the have a limited number of want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford
AppLink apps Bluetooth ports apps can SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
running on my use to connect. If you app's settings menu on the phone.
phone listed in have more AppLink apps
SYNC's Mobile on your phone than the
Apps Menu. number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
334
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION Using the Touchscreen
WARNING
voice-operated systems when possible. E224960

local laws that may affect the use of A Status bar.
B Home screen. See Home
Screen (page 339).
About SYNC
C Clock. See Settings (page 364).
The system allows you to interact with the D Outside air temperature.
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle E Feature bar.
using voice commands and a touchscreen.
The system provides easy interaction with Status Bar
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings.
Note: You can switch the system on and
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to E224961
when your vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h.

A Left-hand side temperature.
B Heated steering wheel on.
C Right-hand side temperature.
D Cell phone microphone muted.
E Audio system muted.
F Software update installed.
G Wi-Fi connected.
335
H Wi-Fi networks available. Emergency Assistance

I Cell phone roaming. WARNINGS
J Text message received. Unless the Emergency Assistance
setting is on prior to a collision, the
K Emergency Assistance off. system does not attempt to place
L Bluetooth connection active. an emergency call. This could delay the
response time, increasing the risk of serious
M Cell phone network signal injury or death.
strength.
Do not wait for Emergency
Note: Messages also appear in the status Assistance to make an emergency
bar. Select the message to use the call if you can do it yourself. Dial
associated feature. emergency services immediately to avoid
a delayed response time. If you do not hear
Emergency Assistance within five seconds
Feature Bar
of the crash, the system or cell phone may
Select to use the radio, the CD be damaged or non-functional.
player, a USB, a media player or Always place your phone in a secure
a Bluetooth device. See location in your vehicle so it does not
Entertainment (page 346). become a projectile or get damaged
Select to use the climate in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
controls. serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent Emergency
Note: Not available through the system on Assistance from working properly.
all models.
Select to make calls and access Note: The SYNC Emergency Assistance
the phonebook on your cell feature must be set on before the incident.
phone. See Phone (page 355). Note: The SYNC Emergency Assistance
feature only operates in territories that are
Select to use the navigation supporting the feature.
system. See Navigation (page
360). Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the Emergency
Select to search for and use Assistance Privacy Notice later in this
compatible apps on your iOS or section for important information.
Android device. See Apps (page
363). Note: If any user sets Emergency Assistance
to on or off, that setting applies for all paired
Select to adjust system settings. phones. If Emergency Assistance is switched
See Settings (page 364). off and the phone is connected to SYNC, an
icon displays on the status bar.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC Emergency Assistance works
See Cleaning the Interior (page 234). with most cellular phones, some may have
trouble using this feature.
336
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding In the Event of a Crash

knee airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts
[if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
be able to contact emergency services by triggers for Emergency Assistance). If a
dialing Emergency number through a connected cell phone sustains damage or
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled loses its connection to SYNC during a
phone. You can learn more about the crash, SYNC will search for and try to
Emergency Assistance feature, by visiting: connect to a previously paired cell phone;
SYNC will then attempt to call the
emergency services.
Website
Before making the call:
www.fordsync.com • SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
For important information about airbag If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off attempts to dial Emergency.
please see the Supplementary Restrains
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
your owner manual.
Emergency, to cancel the call, press
To switch Emergency Assistance on and Cancel on your screen or press and
off please view the settings information. hold the phone button on your steering
See Settings (page 364). wheel."
To make sure that Emergency Assistance If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
works correctly: makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
• SYNC must be powered and working message plays for the Emergency operator,
properly at the time of the incident and and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle
throughout feature activation and use. is able to talk with the operator. Be
prepared to provide your name, phone
• The Emergency Assistance feature number and location immediately, because
must be set on before the incident. not all Emergency systems are capable of
• You must pair and connect a receiving this information electronically.
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC. Emergency Assistance May Not Work
If
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and • Your cellular phone or Emergency
maintain an outgoing call at the time Assistance hardware sustains damage
of the incident. in a crash.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone • The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
must have adequate network coverage, system has no power.
battery power and signal strength.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
• The vehicle must have battery power are the ones paired and connected to
and be located in a territory where the system.
Emergency Assistance is supported.
337
Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice • Do not attempt to service or repair the

system. Have an authorized dealer
When you switch on Emergency check your vehicle.
Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
services that your vehicle has been in a • Do not operate playing devices if the
crash involving the deployment of an power cords or cables are broken, split
airbag or activation of the fuel pump or damaged. Place cords and cables
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to out of the way, so they do not interfere
Emergency Assistance may also be with the operation of pedals, seats,
capable of electronically or verbally compartments or safe driving abilities.
disclosing to Emergency operators your • Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle location or other details about your vehicle during extreme conditions as it
vehicle or crash to assist Emergency could cause them damage. See your
operators to provide the most appropriate device's user guide for further
emergency services. If you do not want to information.
disclose this information, do not switch the
feature on. Updating the System
Safety Information Updating the System Using a USB Drive
WARNING Downloading an Update

Driving while distracted can result in 1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
loss of vehicle control, crash and regional Ford website.
injury. We strongly recommend that 2. Download the update.
device that may take your focus off the Note: The website notifies you if an update
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe is available.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend 3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
against the use of any hand-held device Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
while driving and encourage the use of meet the minimum requirements detailed
voice-operated systems when possible. on the website.
local laws that may affect the use of 4. Follow the instructions provided to
electronic devices while driving. download the update to the USB drive.
Installing an Update
Note: You can use the system when an
installation is in progress.
1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
the USB ports.
2. Connect the USB drive with the update
to a USB port.
Note: Installation starts automatically
within 10 minutes.
338
Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi Privacy Information

Network Connection
When you connect a cellular phone to the
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network system, it creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone.
Select the settings option on the This profile helps in offering you more
feature bar. cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
Select System Wi-Fi. may contain data about your cellular
Select Available Wi-Fi Networks. phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
Select an available Wi-Fi network. of calls when your cell phone was not
Note: Enter the network password to connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect to a secure network. connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
Switching Automatic System Updates media content. The system also records a
On short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
Select the settings option on the
log profile and other system data may be
feature bar.
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
Select General. The cellular profile, media device index,
Select Automatic System Updates. and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
Switch automatic system updates on. accessible only in your vehicle when the
The system is now set to check for and cellular phone or media player is
receive system updates when it is connected.
connected to a Wi-Fi network. If you no longer plan to use the system or
Note: You can use the system when a your vehicle, we recommend you perform
download is in progress. a master reset to erase all stored
information. See Settings (page 364).
Note: If the system is disconnected from System data cannot be accessed without
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in special equipment and access to your
progress, the download continues the next vehicle's module. Ford Motor Company
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi does not access the system data for any
network. purpose other than as described absent
consent, a court order, or where required
Additional Information and
by law enforcement, other government
Assistance authorities, or other third parties acting
For additional information and assistance, with lawful authority. Other parties may
we recommend that you contact an seek to access the information
authorized dealer or refer to the regional independently of Ford Motor Company.
Ford website.
HOME SCREEN
339
E224134
Item Tile Home screen display
A Audio Shows the active media source.

If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
compass.
B Phone The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The
status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal
strength, battery charge, Emergency Assistance setting state
(On or Off), new text messages and roaming.
C Navigation * This map displays your current location or current route in real
time.
When you have navigation active you can see the next turn on
your route.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
audio information.
* If equipped.
340
You can touch any of the feature displays You can access each feature controlled by
to access that feature. SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
Anytime you select the home button, the To activate the SYNC 3 voice
system returns you to this screen. commands push the voice
E142599 button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice be the name of anything, such as artist, the
commands, to control features like audio name of contact or number. The context
and climate controls. By using voice and the description of the command tell
commands, you can keep your hands on you what to say for this dynamic option.
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Main Menu Brings you to the main menu.

Go back Returns you to the previous screen.
Cancel Ends the voice session.
List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands.
___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands (if equipped)
Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Included here are some of the most Audio Voice Commands

popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be a radio
frequency number, or the name of an artist,
album, song or a genre.
341
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command Description
AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM

frequency such as "88.7 FM" or "1580 AM".
FM ___
Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-
connected device.
USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
Play Playlist ___ selection. Your system must finish indexing
Play Artist ___ before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Play Album ___ Penny Lane".
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

Climate Voice Commands (If Equipped) climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
You can control the temperature of the setting.
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:

Climate Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 15°C-30°C.

Climate Help
342
Phone Voice Commands You can use voice commands to connect

your Bluetooth-enabled phone to the
Pairing a Phone system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Pair Phone Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing

process. See Settings (page 364).
Making Calls
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.
Please make sure that you are saying the

contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command Description
<0-9> If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.
Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.
Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.
343
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Text Messages
Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Reply to Message

Navigation Voice Commands (If navigation voice commands it can be a POI
Equipped) category or an address.
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality.

Find a ___ State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
such as "Find restaurants".
Find POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.
Find Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.
Destination Nearest State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
___ nearby such as "Destination nearest restaurants".
Destination Previous Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Destination
Destination Home Allows you to route to your home address.
344
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:

Cancel Route Cancels the current route.

Detour Allows you to select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt.
Show Route Displays the active route.
Where Am I Provides current location.
Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map.
Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map.
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)

The following voice commands are always available:
Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.
Find New Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
<App Name> At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
<App Name> Help SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
345
Voice Settings Commands

You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.
Standard
Interaction Mode Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.
Advanced
Phone Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.
Phone Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call.
Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
You can use the volume control to adjust To disable this automatic fan speed
the volume of the system voice prompts. reduction feature during voice sessions,
While prompt is active, adjust the volume press and hold the climate control AC and
control up or down to your desired setting. Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
Note: Depending on the current climate 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
control settings, the fan speed may the above sequence.
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
ENTERTAINMENT
346
E224963
Item Message Description
A Sources This displays your selected media source.

B Presets This allows you to select the preset bank you
want to view.
C Preset This shows you the stations that you have saved
as presets.
The available options may change

You can access these options using the
depending on the source that you select.
touchscreen or voice commands.
These options may include:
347
Message and description
Direct Tune A popup appears, allowing you to type in the frequency of

a station.
Traffic (TA) Allows you to switch Traffic Announcements on and off.
Stations A list of all available radio stations appears.
You can select a station by pressing any list entry on the
touchscreen. For more entries, you can scroll down using
the up and down arrows, the slider or by swiping down the
list.
Sources DAB+/AM/FM/ Radio

Note: DAB+ Radio may not be available in
Press this button to select the source of
all markets.
media you want to listen to.
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen, select:

Menu item
Direct Tune A pop up appears, allowing you to type in the frequency

of a station.
Station List A list of all available radio stations appears. You can select
a station by pressing any list entry on the touchscreen. For
a longer list, you can scroll up and down using the up and
down arrows, the slider or by swiping up or down the list.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in

the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
348
and then press and hold one of the

Once you have entered the station's memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
call numbers, you can select: briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
Menu item Action and descrip-
tion There are two preset banks available for
AM, three banks for FM and three banks
Enter Press to begin for DAB (if equipped). To access additional
playing the station presets, tap the preset button. The
you have entered. indicator on the preset button shows which
bank of presets you are currently viewing.
Cancel Press to exit
without changing CD
the station.
Once you select this option, the system
Presets returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
To set a new preset, tune to the station
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:

Button Function
Browse You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or Bluetooth Stereo or USB
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
349
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:

Button Function
Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Shuffle Play the tracks in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
play buttons to control the audio playback. provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
To get more information about the buttons allow you to skip forward or
currently playing track, press the cover art backward within a track.
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button Function
Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the

Now Playing playlist.
New Search This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audiobooks
350
Button Function
Composers
A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,

USB Ports exFAT, and NTFS.
The USB ports are in the center console or SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
behind a small access door in the from your USB device by metadata tags.
instrument panel. Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
This feature allows you to plug in USB media files, provide information about the
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives file.
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature. If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
Select this option to play audio from your tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
USB device. metadata tags as unknown.
Apps SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
The system supports the use of certain devices.
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
CLIMATE
options depending on the app's content.
Climate is optional for your vehicle.
See Apps (page 363).
Touch the climate button on the
Supported Media Players, Formats touchscreen to access your climate control
and Metadata Information features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
The system is capable of hosting nearly may look different from one of the screens
any digital media player, including iPod, shown below. Your screen may not contain
iPhone, and most USB drives. all of the features shown.
Supported audio formats include MP3, Note: You can switch temperature units
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Supported audio file extensions include Settings (page 364).
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
351
E243778
Callout Item Description
A AUTO Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select

the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or
cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.
DUAL This button lights up when the passenger controls are active.
To switch the dual zone operation off and link the passenger
temperature to the driver temperature, touch the DUAL button
to switch it off.
B Power Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching
off the climate control system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.
352
C Right-hand Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.

front seat
temper-
ature:
D Fan speed Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air
circulated in your vehicle.
E Rear A pop up appears on the screen to display the rear control
options.
Touch the power icon to switch the rear climate control func-
tions off and on.
Touch Rear Control to allow the rear seat passengers to
adjust the rear climate settings. Touch it again to prevent the
rear seat passengers from adjusting the settings. Rear Control
automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust
the rear climate settings
If your vehicle has automatic climate controls, select Auto to
connect the rear climate settings to the Auto settings of the
driver.
Touch the up and down arrows to adjust the temperature.
A/C A popup appears on the screen to display the air conditioning
options.
MAX Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air.
A/C Touch again for normal A/C operation. MAX A/C
distributes air through instrument panel vents and
may help reduce odors from entering your vehicle.
MAX A/C is more economical and efficient than
normal A/C mode.
A/C Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use
A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency. A/C engages automat-
ically in MAX A/C, defrost and footwell/defrost
353
Recircu- Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off which

lated may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down
air: the interior and help reduce odors from reaching the
interior. Recirculated air also engages automatically
when you select MAX A/C. You can engage this
manually in any airflow mode except defrost. It may
also turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to
reduce fog potential.
F Manual Panel Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
airflow
distribution Floor Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents
controls and rear seat floor vents.
G Defrost A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.

Select these controls individually or together to direct the air
flow to the desired area.
MAX Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Outside
Defrost: air flows through the windshield vents, the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the
temperature dial returns to the full heat position.
You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin
covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear
window also automatically turns on when you select
MAX Defrost. Touch this button again to return to
the previous airflow selection.
Defrost Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice.
Touch again to return to the previous airflow selec-
tion. When on, defrost provides outside air to reduce
window fogging and distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and demister vents. Touch
again to return to the pervious airflow selection.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when Defrost is on.
H Left-hand Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.
front seat
temperature
354
PHONE 2. A prompt alerts you to search for your

vehicle model on your phone.
WARNING 3. Select your vehicle model as it displays
on your phone.
loss of vehicle control, crash and 4. Confirm that the six-digit number
injury. We strongly recommend that appearing on your phone matches the
you use extreme caution when using any six-digit number on the touchscreen.
device that may take your focus off the 5. The touchscreen indicates when the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
electronic devices while driving. Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Hands-free calling is one of the main Menu Item

features of SYNC 3. Once you pair your cell
Add a Bluetooth Device
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While Then select:
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cell phone’s Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
functionality.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time 2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with 3. Confirm that the six-digit number
the system before using the functions in appearing on your phone matches the
hands-free mode. six-digit number on the touchscreen.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to 4. The touchscreen indicates when the
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if pairing is successful.
necessary.
To add a phone, select: the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
Menu Item compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Add a This is on the phone
Bluetooth feature screen or you can At a minimum, most cell phones with
Device use the voice command. Bluetooth wireless technology support the
See Using Voice Recogni- following functions:
tion (page 341). • Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. • Dialing a number.
355
• Call waiting notification. To check your phone’s compatibility, see

• Caller identification. your phone’s manual or visit the regional
ford website.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook Phone Menu
download, are phone-dependent features.
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
E224136
Item Menu Item Action and Description
A Recent Call Displays your recent calls.

List You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
All Incoming Outgoing Missed
B Contacts All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
356
Item Menu Item Action and Description
A-Z Jump Selecting this button allows

you to choose a specific letter
to view.
C Phone Settings Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Phone (page 355).
D Text Messages Displays all recent text messages.
E Phone Keypad Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call Press this button to begin a
call.
F Do Not Disturb Touch this button to let SYNC automatically reject your incoming
calls. New text message notifications are not displayed on the
screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Users with phones having voice services

may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 341). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
357
To call a number in your contacts, To accept the call, select:

select:
Menu Item
Accept
Contacts You can then select the Note: You can also accept the call by
name of the contact you pressing the phone button on the steering
want to call. Any numbers wheel.
stored for that contact
display. You can then To reject the call, select:
select the number that you
want to call. The system Menu Item
begins the call.
Reject
To call a number from your recent calls, Note: You can also reject the call by
select: pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
Recent Call You can then select an logs it as a missed call.
List entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call. During a Phone Call
To call a number that is not stored in During a phone call, the contacts name
your phone, select: and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
Menu Item Action and Description The phone status items are also visible:
Phone Select the digits of the • Signal Strength.
Keypad number you wish to call. • Battery.
Call The system begins the call. You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
358
Item
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
End Call Immediately end a the cell phone or
phone call. You can back to SYNC 3.
also press the
button on the Text Messaging
steering wheel.
Note: Downloading and sending text
Keypad Press this to access messages using Bluetooth are cell
the phone keypad. phone-dependent features.
Mute You can switch the Note: Certain features in text messaging
microphone off so are speed-dependent and not available
the caller does not when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
hear you. 5 km/h.
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the sender name, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View View the text on the touchscreen.
Call To call the sender.
Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Close To exit the screen.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) some SYNC 3 features.
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
and Android Auto to access your phone. features use mobile data.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Apple CarPlay
Auto, you can:
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
• Make calls. newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
• Send and receive messages. the latest iOS version is recommended.
• Listen to music. 1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
• Use your phone's voice assistant. USB Port (page 292).
359
2. Follow the prompts on the

touchscreen. To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple Menu Item
CarPlay.
Android Auto Preferences
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when Your device is listed if SYNC detects
plugged into a USB port. Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select: Disable
Menu Item
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
Apple CarPlay Preferences screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your To return to SYNC 3, select the
device and select: speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
Disable touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
app.
Android Auto Your navigation system is comprised of

two main features, destination mode and
Android Auto is compatible with most map mode.
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
Map Mode
1. Download the Android Auto app to
your device from a leading Android app Map mode shows advanced viewing
store to prepare your device (this may comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
require mobile data usage). and 3D city models (when available). 2D
Note: The Android Auto App may not be city maps show detailed outlines of
available within your current market. buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
2. Plug your device into a USB Port. See infrastructure for the most essential cities
USB Port (page 292). around the globe.
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen. 3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
4. Follow the prompts that appear on objects that are typically recognizable and
your device. have a certain tourism value.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device. This may
require mobile data usage.
360
3D city models are complete 3D models 3D map mode provides an

of entire city areas including navigable elevated perspective of the map.
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings. Adjust this viewing angle and
3D landmarks and city models appear in E251637 rotate the map 180 degrees by
3D map mode only. Coverage of these touching the map twice, and
varies and improves with updated map then dragging your finger along the shaded
releases. bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
Select the zoom in icon to see a Motorway Services Select the
closer view of the map. icon to see service stations near
you. If your vehicle is low on fuel,
E251643 E251639 station icons automatically
Select the zoom out icon to see display on the map.
a farther away view of the map.
Parking Destinations Select
You can adjust the view in preset this icon to see parking facilities
E251642 increments. You can also pinch near you.
to zoom in or out of the map. E251640
The information bar tells you the names Destination Menu This icon
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover appears when you are near a
over them with the crosshair curser. destination. You can check the
You can change your view of the map by E251638 trip summary, find places near
tapping on the location indicator icon on you, save the current location, or
the right hand side of the screen. You can pause navigation.
choose from the following options:
Navigation Menu
2D This always shows the
direction of forward travel to be Navigation Menu Select this
upward on the screen. icon to open the Navigation
E251635 Menu.
2D north up always shows the E251641
northern direction to be upward
on the screen.
E251636
361
Navigation Menu Options

Icon Function
New Route Select your destination by entering an address or its coordinate, or by

selecting a Place, a Saved Location, or a Saved Route. You can also
look up your recent destinations from History.
Multipoint Build your route from one or more route points. You can also plan a
Route route independently of your current GPS position by setting a new
starting point.
Useful Informa- Access additional options and check navigation-related information.
tion
Combined You can use the Search in All function to search all destination types
Search in a certain location.
Address You can enter a partial or whole address to find a destination.
Places You can search for Places of Interest in the Places menu.
Saved Route Displays your previously saved routes.
Coordinates You can search for a destination by entering coordinates.
Location Tap the location on the map to select your destination.
Settings Customise the way the navigation software works.
The following are available during your planned route:

Menu Item Function
Add Waypoint Add an intermediate destination to your route.

Detours and See route alternatives to avoid parts of the route, or to avoid a specific
Alternatives road from your planned route.
Route Summary View the route in its full length on the map and check route parameters
and route alternatives.
Delete Route Delete your route.
Delete Delete the next waypoint or the whole route. This is displayed if there
Waypoint is a multipoint route.
362
Navigation Map Updates 3. If there are any updates, a window

appears where you can download the
You can update your navigation system necessary files to your flash drive.
using a computer with an internet
connection, the Naviextras toolbox and a 4. Turn on your navigation system and
flash drive larger than 2GB. plug the flash drive into your system.
The updates begin automatically.
Download and install the Naviextras
Toolbox from the following website: APPS
Website
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
https://www.naviextras.com and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smart phone apps. When
Before updating, retrieve your Vehicle an app is running through AppLink, you can
Identification Number (VIN) and Electronic control main features of the app through
Serial Number (ESN) from the SYNC 3 voice commands and steering wheel
Settings menu. controls.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
Settings vary by market.
Menu Item Note: You must pair and connect your
smart phone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
General access AppLink.
Then select: Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
About SYNC
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smart phone devices and
To update your navigation system: troubleshooting tips please visit the regional
1. Plug a 2GB or larger flash drive into Ford website.
your computer.
Note: Make sure you have an active
2. Enter the required Vehicle Identification account for the app that you have
Number (VIN) and the Electronic Serial downloaded. Some apps will work
Number (ESN) in the Naviextras automatically with no setup. Other apps will
Toolbox. want you to configure your personal settings
and personalize your experience by creating
stations or favorites. We recommend you
do this at home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smart phone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the App needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
363
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app App Permissions

is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile The system organizes the App permissions
device. into groups. You can individually grant
these group permissions. You can change
a permission group status any time when
Menu Item Action and Descrip- not driving, by using the settings menu.
tion While in the settings menu, you can also
Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search see the data included in each group.
and connect to When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
compatible app(s) the system may ask you to grant certain
running on your permissions, for example Vehicle
mobile device. information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 The settings menu offers individual group
requires user consent to send and receive permission control.
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the Note: You are only prompted to grant
connected device. permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is Note: If you disable group permissions,
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3 apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
module number, anonymous usage 3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
statistics and debugging information. settings menu.
Updates may automatically take place.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for SETTINGS
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system. Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is features. To access additional settings,
not responsible for any extra charges you swipe the screen left or right.
incur from your service provider, when your
vehicle sends or receives data through the Sound
connected device. This includes any
additional charges you incur due to driving Pressing this button allows you to adjust
out of range of your home network. the following:
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 364).
364
Sound Settings
Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.
Treble Adjusts the high frequency level.
Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level.
Bass Adjusts the low frequency level.
Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.
Speed Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
Compensated or turns the feature off.
Vol.
Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings Stereo
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Podcast Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Gracenote® Switches on an off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
Management such as genre, artist, album.
365
Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Informa- This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
tion media device.
Update Media Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.
Index
You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Clock Format Select how time displays.

Reset Clock to When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any Bluetooth

updates you make to the settings.
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
Menu Item Action
Bluetooth Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Phone

Bluetooth-enabled device.
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth the system before using the functions in
device is the same as pairing a phone. See hands-free mode.
To add a phone in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
366

To add a phone, select: 2. Select your phone's name when it
Menu Item appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
Add Phone appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the pairing is successful.
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model the system permission to access
as it displays on your phone. information. To check your phone’s
4. Confirm that the six-digit number compatibility, see your phone’s manual
appearing on your phone matches the or visit the website.
six-digit number on the touchscreen. Other features, such as text messaging
5. The touchscreen indicates when the using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
pairing is successful. download, are phone-dependent features.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give To check your phone’s compatibility, see
the system permission to access your phone’s manual or visit the regional
information. To check your phone’s Ford website.
compatibility, see your phone’s manual Once you have paired a device you can
or visit your regional Ford website. adjust the following options.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
Device the previous table.
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Connect Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
367
Disconnect
Make Favorite Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.
Delete Removes the selected device from the system.
Pressing the info icon next to the device

name allows you to see phone and device
information.
Manage Contacts
Auto Phonebook Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
Download phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name Last Name
Re-download Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.
Phonebook
Delete Phone- Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
book in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Set Phone Ringtone

No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.
Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
368
Text Message Notification

No Alert No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
You can enable and disable the following options as well:

Mute Audio in When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
Privacy duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Roaming When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
Warning you attempt to place a call.
Low Battery When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
Notification is running low.
Select this button to modify the on or off

Emergency Assistance (If Equipped) setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
Note: The SYNC Emergency Assistance you can adjust the following option:
feature only operates in territories that are
supporting the feature.
Set Emergency You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-
Contacts book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the Emer-
gency Assistance call process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
369
FM HD Radio Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broad-

casts.
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio source,
if equipped and avail-
able)
Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media
source. Activate this feature to have the system display radio
text.
Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your
current location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned
source.
News Announcements
Regional
Alternate frequency
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Navigation (If Equipped)

You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
370
POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
Once this feature is activated you can select Select POIs
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
Incident Map This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
Icons to have displayed on the navigation map.
Route Preferences
Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Route Preferences
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest Fastest Eco
Always Use ___ Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
Route calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Automatically The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
Find Parking you approach your destination.
Eco Time Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
Penalty setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Avoid Traffic You can select the following to have the system:
Problems
Avoid Freeways Avoid Toll Roads Avoid Ferries/Car Trains
Navigation Preferences
Navigation Preferences
Guidance You can adjust how the system provides prompts.
Prompts
371
Voice and Tones

Voice Only
Tones Only
Note: All Mobile Apps may not be

Mobile Apps (If Equipped) compatible with the system.
You can enable the control of compatible Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or is not responsible for any additional charges
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable you may receive from your service provider,
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent when your vehicle sends or receives data
to send and receive app authorization through the connected device. This includes
information and updates using the data any additional charges incurred due to
plan associated with the connected device. driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.
Mobile Apps Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.

Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile This provides information on the current state of available app
Apps updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps…
The system has No update is The system is trying to receive
detected a new app required. an update.
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
372
Request Update Select this button if an

update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
Request Update
All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.
There may also Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
be SYNC 3 sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
enabled apps can see which signals are included in each group.
listed under
these options.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for General

any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any You can adjust the following:
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Menu Item
Language Select to have the touchscreen display in one of the

selectable languages.
Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Touch Screen Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatic-
ally updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.
About SYNC Information pertaining to the system and its software.
Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system.
Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
373
Wi-Fi You can adjust the following:
Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
View Available This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
Wi-Fi Available The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
Notifications network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.
Tap a color once to switch on ambient
lighting. This sets the color to the highest Vehicle
intensity.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
You can drag the colors up and down to these features.
increase or decrease the intensity.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:

Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Rear Camera You can enable or disable this option using the slider.
Delay
(if equipped)
374
Enhanced Park Aids

(if equipped)
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Display Off The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the
screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode You can select:
Auto The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Night The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Auto Dim Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
375
Menu Item
Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts

and confirmations.
Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contact's
name with you before making a call.
Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen

Valet Mode PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the To unlock the system, enter the same pin
system is unlocked with the correct PIN. number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
When you select valet mode a pop-up again.
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
you to input the code. However, should questions arise, please
Note: If the system is locked and you refer to the tables below.
cannot remember the PIN, please contact To check your cell phone's compatibility,
the Customer Relationship Center. refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
website.
Cell phone issues
There is back- The audio control

ground noise settings on your cell Refer to your device's manual about audio
during a phone phone may be affecting adjustments.
call. SYNC 3 performance.
During a call, I Try switching your cell phone off, resetting

can hear the it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
other person Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
malfunction.
but they cannot 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
hear me. icon on the phone screen.
376
Cell phone issues
During a call, I To restart your system, shut down the

cannot hear the engine, open and close the door, and then
The system may need to
other person lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
be restarted.
and they cannot Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
hear me. and the lighted USB port is off.
dependent feature.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
SYNC 3 is not contacts from your phone. Refer to your
able to down- cell manual.
load my phone- Possible cell phone You must switch on your cell phone and
book. malfunction. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
The system contacts from your phone. Refer to your
says "Phone- cell manual.
book down-
If the missing contacts are stored on your
loaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
memory.
book is empty or
is missing You must switch on your cell phone and
contacts. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
dependent feature.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
I am having
trouble Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
connecting my deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
cell phone to Possible cell phone again.
SYNC 3. malfunction.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
377
Cell phone issues
Switch the auto download setting off.

dependent feature.
Possible cell phone Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
malfunction. it or removing the battery, then try again.
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
Text messaging • Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
is not working from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
on SYNC 3. settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward

incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
dependent feature.
Audible text
messages do Because each cell phone is different, refer
not work on my to your device's manual for the specific cell
cell phone. This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
tion. differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
378
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try

switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
I am having Possible device malfunc- cable.
trouble tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
connecting my
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
device.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my temperatures.
vehicle.
This is a device-
dependent feature. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
Bluetooth audio The device is not player on your device.
does not connected.
stream.
The device is in a bad Try switching your device off, resetting it or
state. removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popu-
song title, album or genre lated.
SYNC 3 does information.
not recognize
The file may be Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
music that is on
corrupted. version.
my device.
The song may have Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
379
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
The file format is not Convert the file to a supported format. See
supported by SYNC 3. Entertainment (page 346).
The device needs to be Update media index. See Settings (page
re-indexed. 364).
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
When I connect to SYNC 3.
my device, I
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
sometimes do This is a device limitation.
select AirPlay from the devices Control
not hear any
Center, then select Dock Connector.
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
The device or media Connect a compatible device or media
song informa-
player is incompatible. player.
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.
Wi-Fi Issues
Failed connec- Password error. Verify password.

tion.
Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.
Multiple Access points Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
within range with the the default name unless it contains a
same SSID. unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.
380
Wi-Fi Issues
Disconnecting Weak signal probably Position the vehicle close to the hotspot
after successful due to distance from the with the front of the vehicle facing the
connection. hotspot, obstruction or hotspot direction and remove obstacles if
high interference. possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave
and cordless phones may cause interfer-
ence.
Poor signal seen There may be an If the vehicle is equipped with heated
by SYNC 3 obstruction between windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
despite being SYNC 3 and the hotspot. that the windshield is not facing the
near a hotspot. hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the windows in the
direction of the hotspot if that is feasible.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.
A hotspot is not The hotspot was defined Please set the network to visible and try
listed in the list as a hidden network. again.
of available
networks.
381
Wi-Fi Issues
SYNC 3 is not SYNC 3 does not SYNC 3 currently does not provide a
seen when currently provide a hotspot.
searching for hotspot.
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.
Software down- Poor signal strength, too Check the signal quality (under network
load takes too far from the hotspot, details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excel-
long. hotspot is supporting lent, test with another high-speed equipped
multiple connections, hotspot where the environment is more
slow Internet connection predictable.
or other problems.
SYNC 3 seems It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if
to connect with no new software. The the hotspot requires a subscription, you
a hotspot and connected hotspot may may contact the service provider.
the signal be a managed one and it
strength is requires either a
excellent but subscription or agreeing
the software is to the terms and condi-
not being tions.
updated.
382
AppLink issues
AppLink Mobile Make sure you have a compatible smart-

Applications: phone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
When I select an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
You did not connect an
"Find Mobile higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
Applink Compatible
Apps," SYNC 3 connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
phone to SYNC 3.
does not find find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
any applica- iPhone users must also connect to a USB
tions. port with an Apple USB cable.
Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
My phone is AppLink-enabled apps
is running on your phone. Some apps
connected, but I are not installed and
require you to register or login to the app
still cannot find running on your mobile
on the phone before using them with
any apps. device.
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
My phone is
Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
connected, my the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
properly close and re-
app(s) are
open their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
running, but I then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
SYNC 3, over ignition
still cannot find
cycles, for example. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
any apps.
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.
383
AppLink issues
My Android There is a Bluetooth issue Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
phone is on some older versions it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
connected, my of the Android operating SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-
app(s) are system that may cause connect to your phone if you press the
running, I apps that were found on "Phone" button.
restarted them, your previous vehicle
but I still cannot drive to not be found
find any apps. again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.
My iPhone is Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
connected, my a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
app is running, I You may need to reset to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
restarted the the USB connection to should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
app but I still SYNC 3. Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
cannot find it on and restart it.
SYNC 3.
I have an Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
Android phone. device by using the device's volume control
I found and buttons which are most often found on the
started my side of the device.
media app on The Bluetooth volume on
SYNC 3, but the phone may be low.
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.
Some Android devices Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
have a limited number of want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see
Bluetooth ports that SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
some of the
apps can use to connect. app's settings menu on the phone.
AppLink apps
If you have more AppLink
running on my
apps on your phone than
phone listed in
the number of available
the SYNC 3
Bluetooth ports, you will
Mobile Apps
not see all of your apps
Menu.
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
384
Review the cell phone voice commands

and the media voice commands at the
You may be using the beginning of their respective sections.
SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active
not understand
voice session to find a list of voice
what I am
commands there.
saying.
You may be speaking too Wait for the system to prompt you before
soon or at the wrong you state your command.
time.
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
Make sure you are saying the complete title
SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
not understand appears on your device.
Nettles".
the name of a
song or artist. If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
The song or artist name
may have some special Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
characters that are not and playlists names do not have any special
being recognized by characters like *, - or +.
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does exactly as it appears on your phone. For
the name exactly as it
not understand example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
appears on your phone-
or is calling the say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
book.
wrong contact is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
when I want to The contact name may
make a call. Make sure that your contact names do not
contain special charac-
have any special characters like *, - or +.
ters.
385
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation

The SYNC 3 rules of the selected language to the
voice control contact names stored on your cell phone.
system is having You may not be saying Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
trouble recog- the name exactly as it manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
nizing foreign appears on your phone- for phonebook and then contact name.
names stored book. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
on my cell 3 will read the contact name to you, giving
phone. you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
trouble recog- rules of the selected language to the names
You may be saying the
nizing foreign stored on your media player or USB flash
foreign names using the
tracks, artists, drive. It is able to make some exceptions
currently selected
albums, genres for very popular artist names (for example,
language for SYNC 3.
and playlist U2) such that you can always use the
names from my English pronunciation for these artists.
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
The system voice.
generates voice
prompts and SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3 uses text-to- features for a wide range of languages.
the pronunci-
speech voice prompt Dialing a contact name directly from the
ation of some
technology. phonebook without pre-recording (for
words may not
be accurate for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
my language. track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
386
Personal Profiles
Issue Possible cause and solution
Personal Profiles have not been set up.

An invalid profile name was entered.
A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
I cannot create a profile.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
The keyfob selected was already associ-
ated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.
I cannot link a keyfob. A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.
A different Personal Profile is active than
My personalized settings do not save.
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
My profile will not recall. The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.
387
Personal Profiles
Issue Possible cause and solution
The keyfob being used is not linked to a

profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
My preset positions recall but my profile Personal Profiles is turned off.
does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not. The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
I lost a keyfob. Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
I lost all profiles. a new keyfob to replace lost one.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.
388
General
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a

The language single module for text display, voice control
selected for the and voice prompts. The country where you
instrument bought your vehicle dictates the four
cluster and languages based on the most popular
information and
SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
entertainment is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
the currently selected
display does not
language for the instru- current active language.
match the
ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3
ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
language
display. Dialing a contact name directly from the
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth phonebook without pre-recording (for
audio, voice example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
control and track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
voice prompts). from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3

troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
389
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC Note: We test and certify your vehicle to

meet electromagnetic compatibility
COMPATIBILITY legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
WARNINGS responsibility to make sure that any
Do not place objects or mount equipment an authorized dealer installs on
equipment on or near the airbag your vehicle complies with applicable local
cover, on the side of the seatbacks legislation and other requirements.
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
that may come into contact with a equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
instructions may increase the risk of must keep to the parameters in the
personal injury in the event of a crash. following table. We do not provide special
Do not fasten antenna cables to provisions or conditions for installations or
original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and use.
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 10 cm from any electronic
modules and airbags.
Car
E239120
390
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
391
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-88 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
Note: After the installation of radio

frequency transmitters, check for END USER LICENSE
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
AGREEMENT
standby and transmit modes.
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
Check all electrical equipment: LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• With the ignition ON.
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
• With the engine running. have acquired a vehicle having several
• During a road test at various speeds. devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
Check that electromagnetic fields include software licensed or owned by
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
transmitter installed do not exceed ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
applicable human exposure requirements. software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
392
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") liable for any damages arising out of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY errors in the speech recognition
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE process. It is your responsibility to
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT monitor any speech recognition
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, functions included in the system.
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF Decompilation and Disassembly:
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). You may not reverse engineer,
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This decompile, translate, disassemble or
EULA grants you the following license: attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• You may use the SOFTWARE as SOFTWARE nor permit others to
installed on the DEVICES and as reverse engineer, decompile or
otherwise interfacing with systems disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and/or services provide by or through and only to the extent that such activity
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third is expressly permitted by applicable
party software and service providers. law notwithstanding this limitation or
Description of Other Rights and to the extent as may be permitted by
Limitations the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
• Speech Recognition: If the with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE includes speech • Limitations on Distributing,
recognition component(s), you should Copying, Modifying and Creating
understand that speech recognition is Derivative Works: You may not
an inherently statistical process and distribute, copy, make modifications
that recognition errors are inherent in to or create derivative works based on
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
393
Appendices
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may charges from your wireless service

permanently transfer your rights under provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
this EULA only as part of a sale or or third party software and services
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you suppliers provide or make available to
retain no copies, you transfer all of the you Supplemental Components and
SOFTWARE (including all component no other EULA terms are provided
parts, the media and printed materials, along with the Supplemental
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Components, then the terms of this
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
recipient agrees to the terms of this COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, designated agent reserve the right to
any transfer must include all prior discontinue without liability any
versions of the SOFTWARE. Internet-based services provided to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any you or made available to you through
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY the use of the SOFTWARE.
may terminate this EULA if you fail to • Links to Third Party Sites: The
comply with the terms and conditions SOFTWARE may provide you with the
of this EULA. ability to link to third party sites. The
• Internet-Based Services third party sites are not under the
Components: The SOFTWARE may control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
contain components that enable and its affiliates and/or its designated
facilitate the use of certain agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
Internet-based services. You COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
acknowledge and agree that FORD designated agent are responsible for
MOTOR COMPANY, third party (I) the contents of any third party sites,
software and service suppliers, its any links contained in third party sites,
affiliates and/or its designated agent or any changes or updates to third
may automatically check the version party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
of the SOFTWARE and/or its other form of transmission received
components that you are utilizing and from any third party sites. If the
may provide upgrades or supplements SOFTWARE provides links to third
to the SOFTWARE that may be party sites, those links are provided to
automatically downloaded to your you only as a convenience, and the
DEVICES. inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
• Additional Software/Services: The FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR and/or its designated agent.
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or • Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
its designated agent to provide or make You recognize your obligation to drive
available to you SOFTWARE updates, responsibly and keep attention on the
supplements, add-on components, or road. You will read and abide with the
Internet-based services components DEVICES operating instructions
of the SOFTWARE after the date you particularly as they pertain to safety
obtain your initial copy of the and you agree to assume any risk
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental associated with the use of the
Components".) SOFTWARE updates DEVICES.
may cause you to incur additional
394
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You

If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the subject to U.S. and European Union export
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or applicable international and national laws
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
replacement copy for the existing other governments.
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
this EULA, including any additional EULA you any rights in connection with any
terms accompanying the upgrade trademarks or service marks of FORD
SOFTWARE. MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: party software and service providers.
All title and intellectual property rights in PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
limited to any images, photographs, provided in the documentation for the
animations, video, audio, music, text and DEVICES product support, such as the
"applets" incorporated into the vehicle owner guide.
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the Should you have any questions concerning
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may please refer to the address provided in the
not copy the printed materials documentation for the DEVICES.
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title No Liability for Certain Damages:
and intellectual property rights in and to EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
the content which may be accessed MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
through use of the SOFTWARE is the SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
property of the respective content owner AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
and may be protected by applicable LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
copyright or other intellectual property CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
rights to use such content outside its CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
intended use. All rights not specifically PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
granted under this EULA are reserved by LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
and third party software and service PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
services which may be accessed through EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the VEHICLE.
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
395
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation

Information Read and follow features may require manual
instructions: (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
• Before using your SYNC® system, read while driving can distract your attention
and follow all instructions and safety and could cause an accident or other
information provided in this end user serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not and legal manner before attempting
following precautions found in the these operations.
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries. • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
General Operation as an aid. Make your driving decisions
• Voice Command Control: Certain based on your observations of local
functions within the SYNC® system conditions and existing traffic
may be accomplished using voice regulations. Any such feature is not a
commands. Using voice commands substitute for your personal judgment.
while driving helps you to operate the Any route suggestions made by this
system without removing your hands system should never replace any local
from the wheel or eyes from the road. traffic regulations or your personal
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not judgment or knowledge of safe driving
access any function requiring a practices.
prolonged view of the screen while you • Route Safety: Do not follow the route
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal suggestions if doing so would result in
manner before attempting to access a an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
function of the system requiring would be placed in an unsafe situation,
prolonged attention. or if you would be directed into an area
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the that you consider unsafe. The driver is
volume excessively. Keep the volume ultimately responsible for the safe
at a level where you can still hear operation of the vehicle and therefore,
outside traffic and emergency signals must evaluate whether it is safe to
while driving. Driving while unable to follow the suggested directions.
hear these sounds could cause an • Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
accident. used by this system may be inaccurate
• Navigation Features: Any navigation because of changes in roads, traffic
features included in the system are controls or driving conditions. Always
intended to provide turn by turn use good judgment and common sense
instructions to get you to a desired when following the suggested routes.
destination. Please make certain all • Emergency Services: Do not rely on
persons using this system carefully any navigation features included in the
read and follow instructions and safety system to route you to emergency
information fully. services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
396
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Disclaimer of Warranty

Risk
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
• You agree to each of the following:(a) AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
Any use of the SOFTWARE while SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
driving an automobile or other vehicle THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
in violation of applicable law or SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
presents a significant risk of distracted ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
driving and should not be attempted TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
under any circumstances;(b) Use of BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
poses a significant risk of hearing THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
damage and should not be attempted "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
under any circumstances;(c) The FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
SOFTWARE may not be compatible ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
with new or different versions of an HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
operating system, third party software, AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
or third party services, and the THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
critical failure of an operating system, SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
third party software, or third party STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
service.(d) Any third party service LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
accessed by or third party software AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
charge an additional fee for access, (ii) QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
may not work correctly, on an ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
may change streaming formats or NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
adult, profane or offensive content; and NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
misleading traffic, weather, financial OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
or safety information or other content; SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
cause you to incur additional charges SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
from your wireless service provider WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
(WSP) and any data or minute THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
calculators that may be included in the SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
software program are for reference OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
only, are not warranted in any way and UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
should not be relied upon in anyway. OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
to be responsible for and assume the THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
entire risk to the items set forth in CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
Section (a) – (e) above. INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
397
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE Binding Arbitration and Class Action

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, Waiver
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE (a) Application. This Section applies to
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR controversy between You and FORD
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING exceptions listed above, concerning the
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE legal or equitable basis.
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
• The laws of the State of Michigan which is a written statement of the name,
govern this EULA and Your use of the address, and contact information of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to dispute, and the relief requested. You and
other local, state, national, or FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
international laws. Any litigation arising resolve any dispute through informal
out of or related to this EULA shall be negotiation within 60 days from the date
brought and maintained exclusively in the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
a court of the State of Michigan You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
located in Wayne County or in the commence arbitration.
United States District Court for the (c) Small claims court. You may also
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby litigate any dispute in small claims court
consent to submit to the personal in your county of residence or FORD
jurisdiction of a court in the State of MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
Michigan located in Wayne County and business, if the dispute meets all
the United States District Court for the requirements to be heard in the small
Eastern District of Michigan for any claims court. You may litigate in small
dispute arising out of or relating to this claims court whether or not You
EULA. negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
398
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a may award the same damages to You
party or class member) all disputes in court individually as a court could. The arbitrator
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes may award declaratory or injunctive relief
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, only to You individually, and only to the
whose decision will be final except for a extent required to satisfy Your individual
limited right of appeal under the Federal claim.
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award. • I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
forum will be conducted solely on an
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
COMPANY’S last written settlement
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
offer made before the arbitrator was
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
appointed (“last written offer”), your
attorney general action, or in any other
dispute goes all the way to an
proceeding in which any party acts or
arbitrator’s decision (called an
proposes to act in a representative
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
you more than the last written offer,
be combined with another without the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
prior written consent of all parties to all
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
arbitration will be conducted by the (3) reimburse any expenses (including
American Arbitration Association (the expert witness fees and costs) that
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration your attorney reasonably accrues for
Rules. If You are an individual and use the investigating, preparing, and pursuing
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or will determine the amounts.
less whether or not You are an individual • ii. Disputes involving more than
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA $75,000. The AAA rules will govern
Supplementary Procedures for payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
Consumer-Related Disputes will also and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for • iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may any arbitration you commence, FORD
request a telephonic or in-person hearing MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
good cause to hold an in-person hearing or brought for an improper purpose. In
instead. For more information, see adr.org any arbitration FORD MOTOR
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to COMPANY commences, it will pay all
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
399
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and 1. Safe and Lawful Use
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any You acknowledge that devoting attention
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
counted in determining how much a of injury or death to you and others in
dispute involves. situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed agree to comply with the following when
within one year. To the extent permitted using the TeleNav Software:
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
be filed within one year in small claims drive safely;
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section (b) use your own personal judgment while
d). The one-year period begins when the driving. If you feel that a route suggested
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
a claim or dispute is not filed within one perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
year, it is permanently barred. places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver you into an area that you consider to be
(Section e) is found to be illegal or unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
dispute, then that portion of Section e will manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
not apply to those parts. Instead, those your vehicle is stationary and parked;
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
or in any manner inconsistent with this
unenforceable, that provision will be
Agreement;
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect. (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software End User License TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
Agreement your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
Please read these terms and conditions
operation of any safety device (such as an
carefully before you use the TeleNav
airbag).
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
terms and conditions. If you do not accept harmless against all claims resulting from
these terms and conditions, do not break any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
the seal of the package, launch, or use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
otherwise use the TeleNav Software. vehicle, including as a result of your failure
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and to comply with the directions above.
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
400
Appendices
2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise

transfer the TeleNav Software to
You agree: (a) when registering the others, except as part of your
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with permanent transfer of the TeleNav
true, accurate, current, and complete Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
information about yourself, and (b) to Software in any manner that
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true, I. infringes the intellectual property or
accurate, current and complete. proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
3. Software License
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
• Subject to your compliance with the regulation, including but not limited to laws
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav and regulations related to spamming,
hereby grants to you a personal, privacy, consumer and child protection,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license obscenity or defamation, or
(except as expressly permitted below iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
in connection with your permanent harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
transfer of the TeleNav Software obscene, libelous, or otherwise
license), without the right to objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
sublicense, to use the TeleNav otherwise permit unauthorized access by
Software (in object code form only) in third parties to the TeleNav Software
order to access and use the TeleNav without advanced written permission of
Software. This license shall terminate TeleNav.
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will 4. Disclaimers
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, • To the fullest extent permissible
and not to provide commercial pursuant to applicable law, in no event
navigation services to other parties. will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
3.1 License Limitations foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile, else in reliance on the information
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
provided by the TeleNav Software.
or otherwise change the TeleNav
TeleNav also does not warrant the
Software or any part thereof; (b)
accuracy of the map or other data used
attempt to derive the source code,
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
audio library or structure of the
may not always reflect reality due to,
TeleNav Software without the prior
among other things, road closures,
express written consent of TeleNav;
construction, weather, new roads and
(c) remove from the TeleNav
other changing conditions. You are
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
responsible for the entire risk arising
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
out of your use of the TeleNav
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
Software. For example but without
other notices or markings; (d)
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
401
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

navigation, as the maps or functionality WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
of the TeleNav Software are not REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
intended to support such high risk DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
applications, especially in more remote CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
geographical areas. NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT 6. Arbitration and Governing Law
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV • You agree that any dispute, claim or
SOFTWARE. controversy arising out of or relating to
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the this Agreement or the TeleNav
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this Software shall be settled by
limitation may not apply to you. independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
5. Limitation of Liability the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER The arbitrator shall apply the
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV American Arbitration Association, and
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS the judgment upon the award rendered
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD by the arbitrator may be entered by any
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, court having jurisdiction. Note that
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES proceeding and the decision of the
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT arbitrator shall be binding upon both
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE parties. You expressly agree to waive
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, and performance hereunder will be
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF governed by and construed in
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION accordance with the laws of the State
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE of California, without giving effect to
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE its conflict of law provisions. To the
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF extent judicial action is necessary in
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE connection with the binding arbitration,
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. both TeleNav and you agree to submit
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
402
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the conferred by implication, statute,

courts of the County of Santa Clara, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
California. The United Nations TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
Convention on Contracts for the hereby reserve all of their respective rights
International Sale of Goods shall not other than the licenses explicitly granted
apply. in this Agreement.
7. Assignment 8.3
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer By using the TeleNav Software, you
this Agreement or any of your rights or consent to receive from TeleNav all
obligations, except in totality, in communications, including notices,
connection with your permanent agreements, legally required disclosures
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and or other information in connection with the
expressly conditioned upon the new TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing electronically. TeleNav may provide such
to be bound by the terms and Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
conditions of this Agreement. Any such Website or by downloading such Notices
sale, assignment or transfer that is not to your wireless device. If you desire to
expressly permitted under this withdraw your consent to receive Notices
paragraph will result in immediate electronically, you must discontinue your
termination of this Agreement, without use of the TeleNav Software.
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately 8.4
cease all use of the TeleNav Software. TeleNav's or your failure to require
Notwithstanding the foregoing, performance of any provision shall not
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to affect that party's right to require
any other party at any time without performance at any time thereafter, nor
notice, provided the assignee remains shall a waiver of any breach or default of
bound by this Agreement. this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
8. Miscellaneous subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.1
8.5
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with If any provision herein is held
respect to the subject matter hereof. unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
8.2 parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
Except for the limited licenses expressly effect.
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
403
Appendices
8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from

the United States Postal Service® to
The headings in this Agreement are for
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, ©United States Postal Service® 2014.
and will not be referred to in connection Prices are not established, controlled or
with the construction or interpretation of approved by the United States Postal
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, Service®. The following trademarks and
the words "include" and "including" and registrations are owned by the USPS:
variations thereof, will not be deemed to United States Postal Service, USPS, and
be terms of limitation, but rather will be ZIP+4
deemed to be followed by the words The Data for Mexico includes certain data
"without limitation". from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions Geografía.
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
other data licensed to Telenav by third (Shanghai) Co., Ltd
party vendors for the benefit of you and The data (“Data”) is provided for your
other end users. This Agreement personal, internal use only and not for
includes end-user terms applicable to resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
these companies (included at the end subject to the following terms and
of this Agreement), and thus your use conditions which are agreed to by you, on
of the Telenav Software is also subject the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
to such terms. You agree to comply Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
with the following additional terms and their licensors and suppliers) on the other
conditions, which are applicable to hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
Terms and Conditions
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
The data (“Data”) is provided for your for the internal business and personal
personal, internal use only and not for purposes for which you were licensed, and
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is not for service bureau, time-sharing or
subject to the following terms and other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
conditions which are agreed to by you, on subject to the restrictions set forth in the
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and following paragraphs, you agree not to
its licensors (including their licensors and otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
suppliers) on the other hand. decompile, disassemble, create any
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
The Data for areas of Canada includes or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
information taken with permission from except to the extent permitted by
Canadian authorities, including: © Her mandatory laws.
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
404
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
and without limiting the preceding Territories and Countries do not allow
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) certain warranty exclusions, so to that
with any products, systems, or applications extent the above exclusion may not apply
installed or otherwise connected to or in to you.
communication with vehicles, capable of Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
real time route guidance, fleet LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
management or similar applications; or (b) BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
with or in communication with any CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
positioning devices or any mobile or IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
wireless-connected electronic or computer CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
devices, including without limitation ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
computers, pagers, and personal digital MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
assistants or PDAs. POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
Warning. The Data may contain FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
inaccurate or incomplete information due CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
to the passage of time, changing OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
circumstances, sources used and the SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
nature of collecting comprehensive ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
geographic data, any of which may lead to INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
incorrect results. ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
guarantees, representations or warranties LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
of any kind, express or implied, arising by POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
law or otherwise, including but not limited States, Territories and Countries do not
to, content, quality, accuracy, allow certain liability exclusions or
completeness, effectiveness, reliability, damages limitations, so to that extent the
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, above may not apply to you.
use or results to be obtained from this Export Control. You shall not export from
Data, or that the Data or server will be anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
uninterrupted or error-free. product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
required under, applicable export laws,
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
rules and regulations, including but not
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
administered by the Office of Foreign
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
405
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

HERE from complying with any of its NOTICE OF USE
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
excused and shall not constitute a breach SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
of this Agreement.
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
Entire Agreement. These terms and SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
conditions constitute the entire agreement West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
between Telenav (and its licensors, 60606
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, This Data is a commercial item as
and supersedes in their entirety any and defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
all written or oral agreements previously these End-User Terms under which this
existing between us with respect to such Data was provided.
subject matter.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws If the Contracting Officer, federal
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” government agency, or any federal official
where European HERE Data is used], refuses to use the legend provided herein,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of the Contracting Officer, federal
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations government agency, or any federal official
Convention for Contracts for the must notify HERE prior to seeking
International Sale of Goods, which is additional or alternative rights in the Data.
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European I. US/Canada Territory
HERE Data is used] for any and all A. United States Data. The End-User
disputes, claims and actions arising from Terms for any Application containing
or in connection with the Data provided to Data for the United States shall contain
you hereunder. the following notices:
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the “HERE holds a non-exclusive license
United States government or any other from the United States Postal
entity seeking or applying rights similar to Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
those customarily claimed by the United information.”
States government, this Data is a “©United States Postal Service®
“commercial item” as that term is defined 20XX. Prices are not established,
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in controlled or approved by the United
accordance with these End-User Terms, States Postal Service®. The following
and each copy of Data delivered or trademarks and registrations are
otherwise furnished shall be marked and owned by the USPS: United States
embedded as appropriate with the Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
406
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with

B. Canada Data. The following provi- each copy of all or any portion of the
sions apply to the Data for Canada, Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
which may include or reflect data from shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
third party licensors (“Third Party following copyright notice on at least
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen one of: (i) the label for the storage
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada for the copy; or (iii) other materials
Post”) and the Department of Natural packaged with the copy, such as user
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client taken with permission from Canadian
agrees that its use of the Third Party authorities, including © Her Majesty
Data is subject to the following provi- the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
sions: Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The Department of Natural Resources
licensors of such data, including Her Canada. All rights reserved.”
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, 3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
make no guarantees, representa- wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tions or warranties respecting such tion with the provision of any portion
data, either express or implied, of the Data for the Territory of Canada
arising by law or otherwise, including to End-Users as may be authorized
but not limited to, effectiveness, under the Agreement, Client shall
completeness, accuracy or fitness provide such End-Users, in a reason-
for a particular purpose. ably conspicuous manner, with terms
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third (set forth with other end user terms
Party Data licensors, including Her required to be provided under the
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Agreement, or as otherwise may be
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of provided, by Client) which shall include
any claim, demand or action, irre- the following provisions on behalf of
spective of the nature of the cause the Third Party Data licensors,
of the claim, demand or action including Her Majesty, Canada Post
alleging any loss, injury or damages, and NRCan:
direct or indirect, which may result The Data may include or reflect
from the use or possession of such data of licensors, including Her
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of Majesty the Queen in the Right of
revenues or contracts, or any other Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
consequential loss of any kind Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
resulting from any defect in the and the Department of Natural
Data. Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
407
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not II. Mexico. The following provision applies
limited to, effectiveness, complete- to the Data for Mexico, which includes
ness, accuracy or fitness for a certain data from the Instituto Nacional
particular purpose. The licensors, de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
respect of any claim, demand or packaging containing Data for Mexico
action, irrespective of the nature of shall contain the following notice:
the cause of the claim, demand or “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
action alleging any loss, injury or Estadística y Geografía)”
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses- III. Latin America Territory
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty, A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not of the Data and/or packaging relating
be liable in any way for loss of thereto shall include the respective Third
revenues or contracts, or any other Party Notices set forth below and used
consequential loss of any kind as described below corresponding to
resulting from any defect in the data the Territory (or portion thereof)
or the Data. included in such copy:
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her Territory Notice
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Argen- IGN “INSTITUTO
and their officers, employees and tina GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
agents from and against any claim, ARGENTINO”
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim, Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
demand or action, alleging loss, MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
costs, expenses, damages or injuries AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
(including injuries resulting in death) 2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
arising out of the use or possession ENERO DE 2011”
of the data or the Data. “source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi- Guade-
tion to all of the rights and obligations loupe,
of the parties under the Agreement. French
To the extent that any of the provi- Guiana
sions of this Section are inconsistent and
with, or conflict with, any other provi- Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
sions of the Agreement, the provisions nique Nacional de Estadística y
of this Section shall prevail. Mexico Geografía)”
IV. Middle East Territory
408
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

of the Data and/or packaging relating V. Europe Territory
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
as described below corresponding to 1. General Restrictions Applicable to
the Territory (or portion thereof) Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
included in such copy: and agrees that in certain countries of
Country Notice the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
Jordan “© Royal Jordanian party RDS-TMC code providers to
Geographic Centre”. The receive and use the Traffic Codes in
foregoing notice requirement the Data and to deliver to End-Users
for Jordan Data is a material Transactions in any way derived from
term of the Agreement. If or based on such Traffic Codes. For
Client or any of its permitted such countries, HERE shall deliver the
sublicensees (if any) fail to Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
meet such requirement, Client only after receiving certification
HERE shall have the right to from Client of its having obtained such
terminate Client’s license rights.
with respect to the Jordan
Data. 2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted each Transaction that uses Traffic
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from Codes for Belgium, provide the
licensing and/or otherwise distributing following notice to the End-User:
HERE’s database for the country of “Traffic Codes for Belgium are
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter- provided by the Ministerie van de
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. Transports.”
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
restricted from using the Jordan Data in license granted to Client relating to
Enterprise Applications if such party is making, selling or distributing paper
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a paper-like medium): (a) such license
Jordan-based customer. For purposes with respect to Data for the Territory of
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica- Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic- entering into and complying with a
ations, GIS applications, mobile business separate written agreement with the
asset management applications, call Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
center applications, telematics applica- sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
tions, public organization Internet OS any and all applicable paper map
applications or for providing geocoding royalties, and Client’s complying with
services. the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
409
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich-

written consent from Kartografie a.s.; und Vermessungswesen”
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of Croatia
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s Cyprus,
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Estonia,
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Latvia,
Client is restricted from using Data for Lithuania,
the Territory of France to create paper Moldova,
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and Poland,
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted Slovenia
from using any Data to create, sell or and/or
distribute paper maps that are the same Ukraine “© EuroGeographics”
or substantially similar, in terms of data France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD
content and specific use of color, TOPO ®”
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national Germany “Die Grundlagendaten
mapping agencies, including without wurden mit Genehmigung
limitation, Landervermessungämter of der zuständigen Behörden
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the entnommen”
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Landestopografie of Switzerland, Survey data © Crown
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung- copyright and database
swesen of Austria, and the National right 2010 Contains Royal
Land Survey of Sweden. Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting right 2010”
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Client acknowledges and agrees that Ltd.”
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top-
a direct action against Client to enforce Map Ltd.”
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
map requirements (see Section IV(B) stata prodotta usando
above) contained in this Agreement. quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies al tratto prodotta e fornita
of the Data and/or packaging relating dalla Regione Toscana.”
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used Norway “Copyright © 2000;
as described below corresponding to Norwegian Mapping
the Territory (or portion thereof) Authority”
included in such copy:
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Country(ies) Notice
410
Appendices
Spain “Información geográfica Product incorporates data which is ©

propiedad del CNIG” 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Sweden “Based upon electronic Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.” B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Switzerland “Topografische Terms for any Application containing
Grundlage: © Bundesamt RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
für Landestopographie. shall contain the following notice:
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client “Product incorporates traffic location
acknowledges that HERE has not codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
received approvals to distribute map tion Limited and its licensors.”
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus, AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. Telematics Disclosure
HERE may update such list from time to
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
time. The license rights granted to Client
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
under this TL with respect to the Data
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
for such countries are contingent upon
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
Client’s compliance with all applicable
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
laws and regulations, including, without
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
limitation, any required licenses or
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
approvals to distribute the Application
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
incorporating such Data in such
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
respective countries.
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
VI. Australia Territory CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
of the Data and/or packaging relating PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
thereto shall include the respective Third AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
Party Notices set forth below and used UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
as described below corresponding to UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
the Territory (or portion thereof) UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
included in such copy: EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
Copyright. Based on data provided KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
under license from PSMA Australia REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
Limited (www.psma.com.au). ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
411
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR

HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
DEVICE. TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE CARRIER.
SERVICES
VII. China Territory
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL Personal Use Only
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END You agree to use this Data together with
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE [insert name of Client Application] for the
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT solely personal, non-commercial purposes
GUARANTEE ANY END USER for which you were licensed, and not for
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR service bureau, time-sharing or other
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS to the restrictions set forth in the following
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER as necessary for your personal use to (i)
412
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you rigCustomer Remedies
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
and may not transfer or distribute it in any the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
form, for any purpose, except to the extent Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
permitted by mandatory laws. with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
Restrictions resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
Except where you have been specifically be warranted for the remainder of the
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
not (a) use this Data with any products, nor any product support services offered
systems, or applications installed or by NAV2 are available without proof of
otherwise connected to or in purchase from an authorized international
communication with vehicles, capable of source.
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet No Other Warranty:
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
positioning devices or any mobile or SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
wireless-connected electronic or computer PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
devices, including without limitation AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
computers, pagers, and personal digital ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
using this Data if you fail to comply with MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
these terms and conditions. PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
Limited Warranty exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will exclusion may not apply to you.
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a Limited Liability:
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
described in applicable written materials LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
support engineers will make commercially BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
reasonable efforts to solve any problem CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
issues. IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
413
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, Governing Law.

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, The above terms and conditions shall be
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES governed by the laws of the People’s
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Republic of China, without giving effect to
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR United Nations Convention for Contracts
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR for the International Sale of Goods, which
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A from or in connection with the Data
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS provided to you hereunder shall be
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE submitted to the Shanghai International
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER Economic and Trade Arbitration
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR Commission for arbitration.
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER Gracenote® Copyright
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under CD and music-related data from
applicable law, so to that extent the above Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
exclusion may not apply to you.
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Export Control Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
You agree not to export to anywhere any practice one or more of the following U.S.
part of the Data provided to you or any Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
direct product thereof except in 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
compliance with, and with all licenses and 6,330,593 and other patents issued or
approvals required under, applicable pending. Some services supplied under
export laws, rules and regulations. license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
IP Protection
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
suppliers and are protected by applicable logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
copyright and other intellectual property Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
law and treaties. The Data are provided Gracenote.
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
Entire Agreement
This device contains software from
These terms and conditions constitute the Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
entire agreement between NAV2(and its Emeryville, California 94608
licensors, including their licensors and ("Gracenote").
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their The software from Gracenote (the
entirety any and all written or oral "Gracenote Software") enables this device
agreements previously existing between to do disc and music file identification and
us with respect to such subject matter. obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
414
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform including any copyrighted material or

other functions. You may use Gracenote music file information. You agree that
Data only by means of the intended End Gracenote may enforce its respective
User functions of this device. This device rights, collectively or separately, under this
may contain content belonging to agreement against you, directly in each
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the company's own name.
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
queries for statistical purposes. The
content and such content providers shall
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
be entitled to all of the benefits and
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
protections set forth herein that are
queries without knowing anything about
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
who you are. For more information, see the
will use the content from Gracenote
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
non-commercial use only. You agree not OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
associated with a music file) to any third WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
HEREIN. TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
Gracenote Servers.
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
Gracenote Content, including all ownership OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
rights. Under no circumstances will either ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
Gracenote become liable for any payment THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
to you for any information that you provide, PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
415
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Taiwan Territory

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Note: In accordance with the management
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
approach of low-power radio wave
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
radiation motors:
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE Article 12: For approved and certified
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY low-power radiation motor models,
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL companies, firms or users must not alter
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY the frequency, increase the power or
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL change the characteristics and functions
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS of the original design without authorization.
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON Article 14: The usage of low-power
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. radio-frequency motors must not affect
Radio Frequency Statement aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L be detected, immediately stop using the
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
This device complies with Part 15 of the interference. For the legal
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry telecommunication and wireless
Canada. Operation is subject to the telecommunication of the telco, the
following two conditions: low-power radio frequency motor must be
(1) This device may not cause harmful able to tolerate legal limits of interference
interference, and from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
interference that may cause undesired AND CONDITIONS
operation.
By activating, using and/or accessing the
WARNING SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
Changes or modifications not other content or material provided by
expressively approved by the party Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
responsible for compliance could and/or Services), you must accept
void the user's authority to operate the certain terms and conditions. The following
equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio is a brief summary of the terms and
certification number only signifies that conditions that apply to you. To view the
Industry Canada technical specifications full terms and conditions relevant to your
were met. use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
The antenna used for this transmitter must
Website
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
transmitter. ditions/
1. Acceptance
416
Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services, 5. Service Continuity and Reception of

you will be deemed to have accepted and the SUNA Traffic Channel
agreed to be bound by the terms and
We will use reasonable endeavours to
conditions fully detailed at:
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Website Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
maintenance. We will try to perform
ditions/
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
2. Intellectual Property SUNA Products and/or Services at any
SUNA Products and/or Services are for time.
your personal use. You may not record, or Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
retransmit the content, nor use the content reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
in association with any other traffic RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You 6. Limitation of Liability
obtain no right of ownership in any Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
Intellectual Property Rights (including the manufacturer of your device (the
copyright) in the data that is used to “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services. any third party for any damages either
3. Appropriate Use direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
SUNA Products and/or Services are inability to use SUNA Products and/or
intended as an aid to personal motoring Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
and travel planning, and do not provide has been advised of the possibility of such
comprehensive or accurate information on damages. You also acknowledge that the
all occasions. On occasions, you may neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
experience additional delay as a result of guarantees nor make any warranties that
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You relate to the availability, accuracy or
acknowledge that it is not intended, or completeness of SUNA Products and/or
suitable, for use in applications where time Services, and to the extent which it is
of arrival or driving directions may impact lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
the safety of the public or yourself. Supplier excludes any warranties which
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services might otherwise be implied by any State
while driving or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or 7. Please Note
Services are available or installed and Great care has been taken in preparing this
active, remain at all times responsible for manual. Constant product development
observing all relevant laws and codes of may mean that some information is not
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only entirely up-to-date. The information in this
actively operate SUNA Products and/or document is subject to change without
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete notice.
stop and it is safe to do so.
417
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s) E253824
Ghana
E253823
E207816 Jordan
Argentina
E253822
Malaysia
E253812
E197509
Brazil
E253813
Mexico
E207818
European Union EU
E197811
418
Appendices
Moldova
E197844
E207821 Serbia
Morocco
E253820
E253817
Singapore
Oman
E198002
E198001 South Africa

Philippines
E253819
E253816
South Korea
Russia
419
Appendices

Logos for Mid Range Radar
E203679
Taiwan
E269659
Argentina
E253818
Ukraine
E269662
E207817 Ghana
United Arab Emirates
E269660
Jordan
420
Appendices

Logos for Passive Anti-Theft
System
E269661
Morocco
E274065
Argentina
E269664
South Africa
E269675
Brazil
E269663
E274068
Djibouti
421
Appendices
E269674 E269673
Ghana Malaysia
E274067 E269670
Jamaica Morocco
E269666 E274066
Jordan Paraguay
422
Appendices
E275754 E269667
Pakistan South Africa
E269672 E269671
Serbia Ukraine
E269676 E269668
Singapore United Arab Emirates
423
Appendices
E269677 E272194
Vietnam Jordan

Logos for Radio Transceiver
Module
E269683
Morocco
E272192
Djibouti
E269684
Pakistan
E272193
Jamaica
424
Appendices
E272195 E269682
Paraguay Ukraine
E269681 E272196
Serbia United Arab Emirates

Logos for Blind Spot Information
System
E269685
South Africa
E269695
Ghana
425
Appendices
E269697 E269693
Malaysia Vietnam

Logos for Wireless Charging
E269696
South Africa
E272903
E269694

E273475
South Korea
426
Appendices

Logos for SYNC 3
E252722
Brazil
427
428
Index
4 Front and Rear Park Aid....................................69

Headlamps On......................................................68
4WD Key in Ignition........................................................68
See: Four-Wheel Drive.......................................131 Lane Departure Warning...................................68
Parking Brake On.................................................68
A Seatbelt Reminder..............................................68
Audio Control...................................................43
A/C Audio Input Jack............................................291
See: Climate Control..........................................94 Audio System................................................279
About This Manual...........................................7 General Information..........................................279
ABS Audio Troubleshooting..............................292
See: Brakes...........................................................136 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/Aux
ABS driving hints In/USB/Bluetooth...................................280
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Clock........................................................................281
Brakes.................................................................137 Display Screen.....................................................281
Accessories Function Buttons................................................281
See: Replacement Parts Media......................................................................282
Recommendation............................................10 Menu.......................................................................282
ACC Mute........................................................................282
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............157 Number Block......................................................281
Active Park Assist.........................................148 OK and Cursor Arrows.....................................282
Automatic Steering into Parking Phone.....................................................................282
Space.................................................................150 Radio.......................................................................281
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature...........151 Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse..................282
Troubleshooting the System...........................151 Sound.....................................................................282
Using Active Park Assist...................................149 TA.............................................................................282
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................43 Tune........................................................................282
Air Conditioning Volume and Power............................................282
See: Climate Control..........................................94 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Alarm SYNC/Touchscreen Display.................285
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................41 CD Eject.................................................................286
Ambient Lighting............................................54 CD Slot..................................................................286
Adjusting the Intensity.......................................54 Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.................286
Changing the Color..............................................54 Tune........................................................................286
Switching Ambient Lighting Off.....................54 Volume and Power...........................................286
Switching Ambient Lighting On......................54 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................41 SYNC.............................................................282
Alarm System.........................................................41 Answer or Make a Phone Call.......................284
Arming the Alarm.................................................42 CD............................................................................283
Disarming the Alarm...........................................42 CD Eject.................................................................284
Full and Reduced Guard....................................42 CD Slot..................................................................284
Triggering the Alarm............................................42 Clock.......................................................................284
Appendices...................................................390 Display Screen....................................................284
Apps.................................................................363 End Phone Call...................................................284
..................................................................................363 Function Buttons...............................................284
At a Glance........................................................12 Media.....................................................................285
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............68 Menu.......................................................................285
Door Ajar.................................................................68 Mute.......................................................................284
429
Index
Number Block.....................................................284 Using Auto-Start-Stop......................................116

OK and Cursor Arrows.....................................284 Auto-Start-Stop - Manual
Phone.....................................................................285 Transmission.................................................117
Play/Pause...........................................................284 Principle of Operation........................................117
Radio......................................................................285 Replacing the Battery........................................118
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.................284 Switching the System On and Off................118
Sound.....................................................................284 Using Auto-Start-Stop......................................118
TA............................................................................284 Autowipers.......................................................46
Tune........................................................................284 Auxiliary Power Points...............................109
Volume and Power............................................285 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................109
Autolamps........................................................49 230 Volt AC Power Point.................................109
Windshield Wiper Activated Location.................................................................109
Headlamps........................................................49
Automatic Climate Control........................95
A/C.............................................................................97
B
Auto...........................................................................97 Battery
Defrost......................................................................97 See: Changing the 12V Battery......................225
Fan Speed Control..............................................96 Battery Charging
Heated Rear Window..........................................97 See: Charging the 12V Battery.......................225
Heated Seats..........................................................97 Bonnet Lock
Heated Windshield..............................................97 See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........216
Left-hand Temperature Control....................96 Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................223
Max A/C...................................................................97 Brakes...............................................................136
Max Defrost............................................................97 General Information..........................................136
Power........................................................................97 Breaking-In.......................................................191
Recirculated Air.....................................................97 Brakes and Clutch...............................................191
Right-hand Temperature Control..................96 Engine......................................................................191
Automatic High Beam Control.................50 Tires..........................................................................191
Automatic High Beam Indicator.....................52 Bulb Specification Chart...........................276
Switching the System On and Off..................51
Automatic Transmission............................125
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
C
Learning............................................................130 Cabin Air Filter...............................................100
Emergency Park Position Release Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
Lever...................................................................128 TDCi Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS)
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or (YN) ..............................................................269
Snow..................................................................130 Capacities............................................................269
Progressive Range Selection - 10 Speed Specifications.....................................................270
only......................................................................128 Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
SelectShift™ Automatic TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS)
Transmission....................................................127 (YM)...............................................................267
Transmission Selector Lever Positions - 6 Capacities.............................................................267
Speed.................................................................126 Specifications.....................................................268
Auto-Start-Stop - Automatic Capacities and Specifications - 2.2L
Transmission................................................116 Diesel..............................................................271
Principle of Operation........................................116 Capacities.............................................................272
Replacing the Battery.........................................117 Specifications......................................................272
Switching the System On and Off.................117
430
Index
Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L Cleaning the Interior...................................234

Diesel.............................................................274 Fabric, Carpets, Cloth Seats, Headliners
Capacities.............................................................274 and Floor Mats...............................................234
Specifications......................................................275 Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens
Capacities and Specifications................257 and Radio Screens.......................................235
Cargo Lamps....................................................55 Leather Interior...................................................235
Car Wash Rear Windows.....................................................235
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................233 Seatbelts...............................................................234
Center Console................................................111 Storage Compartments and Cup
Changing a Bulb...........................................228 Holders..............................................................235
Approach Lamp and Side Direction Suede Micro Fiber Fabric................................235
Indicator...........................................................229 Cleaning the Wheels..................................236
Front Fog Lamps...............................................230 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
License Plate Lamp............................................231 Blades...........................................................234
Rear Lamps..........................................................230 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................35
Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs...................228 Climate.............................................................351
Side Repeater......................................................229 Climate Control..............................................94
Changing a Fuse............................................214 Cold Weather Precautions.........................191
Fuses.......................................................................214 Compact Disc Player - Vehicles With:
Changing a Road Wheel...........................248 AM/FM/Aux In/USB/Bluetooth...........287
Installing a Road Wheel..................................254 CD Text Display Options.................................290
Jacking and Lifting Points...............................253 Compact Disc Playback..................................287
Locking Wheel Nuts.........................................248 Compact Disc Track Scanning.....................288
Removing a Road Wheel................................254 Ending Compact Disc Playback....................291
Spare Wheel........................................................252 Fast Forward and Reverse..............................287
Stowing the Flat Tire........................................255 MP3 Display Options.......................................290
Vehicle Jack.........................................................248 MP3 File Playback.............................................288
Changing the 12V Battery.........................225 Repeat Compact Disc Tracks.......................288
Remove and Reinstall the Battery..............226 Shuffle and Random........................................287
Changing the Wiper Blades......................227 Track Selection...................................................287
Changing the Windshield Wiper Coolant Check
Blades................................................................227 See: Engine Coolant Check............................222
Charging the 12V Battery...........................225 Cool Box............................................................112
Battery Management System.......................225 Creating a MyKey............................................34
Checking MyKey System Status...............36 Programming/Changing Configurable
Checking the Wiper Blades......................227 Settings...............................................................34
Child Restraint Positioning..........................18 Cruise Control..................................................44
Child Safety.......................................................15 Principle of Operation.......................................156
Child Safety Locks...........................................21 Cruise control
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................235 See: Using Cruise Control................................156
Cleaning the Exterior..................................233
Cleaning the Headlamps................................233
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................233
D
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................233 Data Recording..................................................9
Stripes or Graphics............................................233 Daytime Running Lamps............................50
Underbody...........................................................234 Direction Indicators.......................................53
Under Hood..........................................................234 Doors and Locks.............................................38
431
Index
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 2.0L Sources.................................................................348

TDCi Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) Supported Media Players, Formats and
(YN) /2.0L TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 Metadata Information..................................351
PS) (YM)......................................................223 USB Ports..............................................................351
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 2.2L Event Data Recording
Diesel/3.2L Diesel.....................................224 See: Data Recording..............................................9
Driver Alert.......................................................167 Exterior Mirrors................................................59
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................167 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................59
USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................168 Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................60
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................25 Power Exterior Mirrors........................................59
Driving Aids.....................................................163 Power-Folding Mirrors.......................................60
Driving Hints....................................................191 Puddle Lamps ......................................................60
Driving Through Water................................193 Signal Indicator Mirrors.....................................60
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................50 F
E Fastening the Seatbelts...............................22
Flat Tire
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............390 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................248
Electronic Locking Differential.................135 Floor Mats.......................................................194
End User License Agreement..................392 Fog Lamps - Front
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................52
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................392 Fog Lamps - Rear
Engine Coolant Check................................222 See: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................52
Adding Coolant...................................................222 Four-Wheel Drive...........................................131
Engine Immobilizer Principle of Operation........................................131
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................41 Front Fog Lamps............................................52
Engine Oil Check...........................................221 Front Parking Aid...........................................147
Adding Oil..............................................................221 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................148
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L TDCi Bi-Turbo Fuel and Refueling........................................119
Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN) /2.0L Fuel Consumption........................................123
TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS) Advertised Capacity...........................................123
(YM)................................................................221 Calculating Fuel Economy..............................124
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Diesel/3.2L Filling the Fuel Tank...........................................124
Diesel..............................................................221 Fuel Quality......................................................119
Engine Specifications - 2.0L TDCi Biodiesel Usage...................................................120
Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN) Long-Term Storage............................................120
.........................................................................258 Winter Driving......................................................120
Engine Specifications - 2.0L TDCi Diesel Fuel Shutoff....................................................197
(132 kW/180 PS) (YM)...........................257 Fuse Box Locations......................................201
Engine Specifications - 2.2L Diesel.......259 Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................201
Engine Specifications - 3.2L High Current Fuse Box.....................................202
Diesel............................................................260 Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...........202
Entertainment..............................................346 Pre-fuse Box.........................................................201
Apps.........................................................................351 Fuses.................................................................201
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................349 Fuse Specification Chart..........................202
CD............................................................................349 Battery Mounted Fuse Link.............................210
DAB+/AM/FM/ Radio......................................348 Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................202
432
Index
High Current Fuse Box........................................211 Recommended Settings for Heating...........99

Passenger Compartment Fuse Box..............211 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................137
G Home Screen................................................339
Hood Lock
Gauges...............................................................62 See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........216
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............63
Fuel Gauge.............................................................64
Information Display.............................................63
I
M0 and M1 Cluster...............................................62 Ignition Switch................................................114
M2 Cluster...............................................................63 Starting the Engine.............................................114
Gearbox Switching the Ignition Off.................................114
See: Transmission...............................................125 Switching the Ignition On.................................114
General Information on Radio Switching the Ignition to Accessory
Frequencies...................................................28 Mode....................................................................114
Glove Box...........................................................111 Information Display Control......................44
Glove Box with Lock.............................................111 Information Displays.....................................70
General Information............................................70
H Information Messages..................................82
Active Park..............................................................83
Handbrake Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................83
See: Parking Brake..............................................137 Airbag.......................................................................84
Hazard Flashers............................................196 Alarm........................................................................84
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................50 Auto-Start-Stop...................................................84
Headlamp Leveling........................................52 Battery and Charging System.........................85
Headlamp Removal Doors and Locks...................................................86
See: Removing a Headlamp..........................228 Driver Alert..............................................................86
Headrest Four-Wheel Drive.................................................86
See: Head Restraints.........................................102 Fuel............................................................................87
Head Restraints............................................102 Hill Descent Control............................................87
Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................100 Hill Start Assist......................................................87
Heated Rear Window.................................100 Keys and Starting.................................................88
Heating Lane Keeping System........................................89
See: Climate Control..........................................94 Maintenance..........................................................89
Hill Descent Control....................................144 Parking Aid.............................................................90
Principle of Operation.......................................144 Parking Brake........................................................90
Hill Start Assist..............................................137 Power Steering.......................................................91
Enable and Disable the System....................138 Powertrain...............................................................91
Switching the System On and Off...............138 Starting System ....................................................91
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................92
Hints on Controlling the Interior Traction Control....................................................92
Climate...........................................................98 Trailer........................................................................93
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Transmission..........................................................93
Weather............................................................100 Installing Child Restraints............................15
General Hints.........................................................98 Attaching a Child Restraint with Top
Quickly Cooling the Interior..............................99 Tethers.................................................................18
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................98 Booster Seats.........................................................16
Recommended Settings for Cooling............99 Child Seats for Different Mass Groups..........15
433
Index
ISOFIX Anchor Points...........................................17 Tie Down Points..................................................182

Top Tether Anchor Points (If Locking and Unlocking.................................38
Equipped)............................................................17 Autolock..................................................................39
Instrument Cluster.........................................62 Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................49 Key........................................................................39
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps.....................50 Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps..............50 Key - Vehicles with Central Locking.........40
Instrument Panel Overview.........................12 Power Door Locks................................................38
Left-hand drive.......................................................13 Remote Control....................................................38
Right-hand drive....................................................12 Using Passive Entry.............................................38
Interior Lamps.................................................53 Luggage Covers.............................................179
Courtesy lamp.......................................................53 Locking and unlocking into position............179
Reading lamps.......................................................53 Operation...............................................................179
Interior Mirror...................................................60 Lug Nuts
Automatic Dimming Mirror..............................60 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................248
Manual Dimming Mirror....................................60
Introduction.........................................................7 M
J Maintenance..................................................216
General Information..........................................216
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................197 Manual Climate Control..............................94
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................198 A/C.............................................................................95
Jump Starting......................................................198 Air Distribution Control......................................95
Preparing Your Vehicle......................................197 Fan Speed Control...............................................95
Removing the Jumper Cables........................199 Heated Rear Window.........................................95
MAX A/C..................................................................95
K MAX Defrost...........................................................95
Power........................................................................95
Keyless Starting..............................................113 Recirculated Air.....................................................94
Ignition Modes......................................................113 Temperature Control..........................................95
Keys and Remote Controls.........................28 Manual Seats.................................................103
L Seat....................................................................104
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.....................104
Lane Keeping System.................................169 Folding the Seat Backrest - Super
Switching the System On and Off................170 Cab......................................................................105
Lighting Control..............................................48 Moving the Seat Backward and
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............49 Forward.............................................................103
Headlamp High Beam.......................................48 Recline Adjustment...........................................104
Lighting..............................................................48 Manual Tailgate............................................186
General Information...........................................48 Lowering the Tailgate.......................................186
Limited Slip Differential.............................135 Manual Transmission..................................125
Load Carriers General Information..........................................125
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers..............181 Shifting Into Reverse Gear...............................125
Load Carrying.................................................179 Media Hub......................................................292
General Information...........................................179 Message Center
Load Retaining Fixtures..............................182 See: Information Displays.................................70
Load Rest..............................................................184
434
Index
Mirrors Measure units........................................................82

See: Windows and Mirrors................................56 MyKey.......................................................................82
Mobile Communications Equipment........11 Temperature units...............................................82
MyKey Troubleshooting................................37 Tone deactivation................................................82
MyKey™.............................................................33 Phone...............................................................355
Principle of Operation.........................................33 During a Phone Call..........................................358
Making Calls.........................................................357
N Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................355
Navigation......................................................360 Phone Menu........................................................356
Map Mode............................................................360 Receiving Calls...................................................358
Navigation Map Updates................................363 Smartphone Connectivity..............................359
Navigation Menu.................................................361 Text Messaging...................................................359
Power Door Locks
O See: Locking and Unlocking.............................38
Power Seats...................................................105
Off-Road Driving............................................191 Adjusting the Height of the Driver
After Off-Road Driving......................................193 Seat....................................................................106
Basic Off-road Driving Techniques..............192 Moving the Seat Backward and
Crossing Obstacles............................................192 Forward.............................................................105
Hill Climbing.........................................................193 Recline Adjustment...........................................106
Water Wading......................................................193 Tilting the Seat....................................................106
Oil Check Power Steering Fluid Check.....................223
See: Engine Oil Check........................................221 Power Windows.............................................56
Opening and Closing the Hood...............216 Bounce-Back.........................................................58
Closing the Hood.................................................217 Driver’s Door Switches (Double Cab)..........56
Opening the Hood..............................................216 Driver’s Door Switches (Single and Stretch
Overhead Console..........................................111 Cab)......................................................................57
Front and Rear Passengers’ Door
P Switches..............................................................57
Opening and Closing Other Windows
Parking Aids....................................................146 Automatically....................................................57
Principle of Operation.......................................146 Opening and Closing the Driver Side
Parking Brake..................................................137 Window Automatically..................................57
All Vehicles............................................................137 Resetting the Memory of the Electric
Vehicles With Automatic Windows - Vehicle with One Touch
Transmission....................................................137 Up/Down on Driver Side only.....................58
Vehicles With Manual Transmission............137 Safety Mode...........................................................58
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................41 Safety Switch for the Rear Windows............57
Arming the Engine Immobilizer.......................41 Pre-Collision Assist......................................175
Coded Keys..............................................................41 Using the Pre-Collision Assist
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer..................41 System...............................................................175
Principle of Operation.........................................41 Puncture
Passive Key Backup Position.....................32 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................248
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................41
Personalized Settings...................................81
Languages...............................................................81
435
Index
R Running Out of Fuel....................................120

Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................120
Radio.................................................................287 Fuel Run Dry Protection Feature..................120
Antenna.................................................................287
Rear Axle..........................................................135 S
Rear Fog Lamps..............................................52
Rear Parking Aid...........................................146 Safety Precautions........................................119
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................147 Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................23
Rear Seat Armrest.......................................108 Seatbelt Reminder.........................................24
Rear Seats.......................................................106 Turning the Seatbelt Reminder Off...............24
Folding the Seat Backrest..............................108 Seatbelts...........................................................22
Folding the Seat Cushion.................................107 Principle of Operation.........................................22
Unfolding the Seat Backrest..........................108 Seats.................................................................102
Unfolding the Seat Cushion............................107 Security...............................................................41
Rear View Camera........................................152 Settings...........................................................364
Camera guidelines.............................................153 Ambient Lighting................................................374
Manual Zoom.......................................................155 Bluetooth..............................................................366
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................154 Clock......................................................................366
Rear Camera Delay............................................155 Display....................................................................375
Using the Rear View Camera System.........153 Emergency Assistance....................................369
Rear View Camera General...................................................................373
See: Rear View Camera....................................152 Media Player........................................................365
Recommended Towing Weights............188 Mobile Apps..........................................................372
Reduced Engine Performance..................191 Navigation............................................................370
Refueling...........................................................121 Phone.....................................................................366
Refueling System Overview.............................121 Radio......................................................................369
Refueling System Warning..............................123 Sound....................................................................364
Refueling Your Vehicle.......................................121 Valet Mode...........................................................376
Remote Control..............................................28 Vehicle....................................................................374
Car Finder................................................................32 Voice Control.......................................................375
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................28 Wi-Fi........................................................................374
Intelligent Access Key.........................................29 Side Airbags.....................................................26
Replacing the Battery.........................................29 Side Curtain Airbags......................................27
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................32 Sitting in the Correct Position..................102
Removing a Headlamp..............................228 Snow Chains
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............236 See: Using Snow Chains.................................244
Replacement Parts Spare Wheel
Recommendation........................................10 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................248
Collision Repairs....................................................10 Special Notices................................................10
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Speed Control
Repairs.................................................................10 See: Cruise Control............................................156
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................10 Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Cruise Control.............................................165
Control.............................................................32 Principle of Operation.......................................165
Roadside Emergencies..............................196 Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter ............166
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................181 Using the Speed Limiter..................................165
Running-In
See: Breaking-In...................................................191
436
Index
Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Cruise Changing Wheels With a Tire Pressure
Control...........................................................163 Monitoring System.......................................245
Principle of Operation.......................................163 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter ............164 Procedure........................................................248
Using the Speed Limiter..................................163 Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Stability Control.............................................141 Monitoring System ......................................246
Principle of Operation........................................141 Tires
Starter Switch See: Wheels and Tires.....................................239
See: Ignition Switch............................................114 Towing a Trailer..............................................187
Starting a Diesel Engine..............................115 Towing Points...............................................200
Cold or Hot Engine..............................................115 Towing the Vehicle on Four
Failure to Start......................................................115 Wheels..........................................................190
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........113 All Vehicles...........................................................190
General Information...........................................113 Vehicles With Automatic
Steering.............................................................174 Transmission...................................................190
Electric Power Steering.....................................174 Towing...............................................................187
Steering Wheel Lock....................................114 Traction Control............................................140
Unlocking the Steering Wheel........................114 Principle of Operation......................................140
Steering Wheel...............................................43 Traffic Sign Recognition.............................173
Storage Compartments...............................111 Principle of Operation.......................................173
Sun Visors..........................................................61 Using Traffic Sign Recognition.......................174
Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................61 Trailer Sway Control.....................................187
Supplementary Restraints System.........25 Transmission..................................................125
Principle of Operation.........................................25 Transporting the Vehicle...........................199
Switching Off the Engine............................115 Trip Computer..................................................81
Vehicles With a Turbocharger.........................115 Average Fuel Consumption...............................81
Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Average Speed.......................................................81
SYNC™ 3........................................................335 Digital Speedometer............................................81
General Information.........................................335 Distance to Empty................................................81
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................376 Instantaneous fuel consumption...................81
SYNC™ Applications and Odometer.................................................................81
Services........................................................309 Outside Air Temperature....................................81
SYNC AppLink......................................................313 Resetting the trip computer..............................81
SYNC Emergency Assistance........................310 Trip Odometer........................................................81
SYNC™...........................................................294 Type Approvals.............................................418
General Information.........................................294 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................325 Blind Spot Information System...............425
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Mid
T Range Radar...................................................420
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Tailgate.............................................................186 Passive Anti-Theft System........................421
Technical Specifications Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
See: Capacities and Specifications.............257 Radio Transceiver Module.........................424
Tire Care..........................................................239 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........244 SYNC 3..............................................................427
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Tire
Monitoring System.......................................245 Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)................418
437
Index
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Using Snow Chains.....................................244

Wireless Charging.........................................426 Vehicles with Stability Control.....................244
Using Stability Control................................142
U 2-wheel drive vehicles......................................142
4-wheel drive vehicles......................................142
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L TDCi Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN) Player.............................................................316
/2.0L TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS) Accessing Your USB Song Library...............320
(YM)................................................................217 Bluetooth Devices and System
Under Hood Overview - 2.2L Diesel.......218 Settings.............................................................323
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Diesel.......219 Connecting Your Media Player to the USB
Under Seat Storage......................................112 Port.....................................................................316
Super Cab...............................................................112 Line In Audio........................................................323
Unique Driving Characteristics.................116 Media Menu Features.......................................319
USB Port..........................................................292 Media Voice Commands..................................317
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................157 USB 2......................................................................323
Automatic Cancellation..................................160 Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........324
Blocked Sensor....................................................161 What's Playing?...................................................317
Canceling the Set Speed................................160 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............298
Changing the Set Speed.................................160 Accessing Features Through the Cell Phone
Detection Issues.................................................160 Menu..................................................................303
Following a Vehicle............................................158 Accessing Your Cell Phone Settings..........306
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................160 Bluetooth Devices.............................................307
Overriding the Set Speed................................159 Cell Phone Options During an Active
Resuming the Set Speed................................160 Call......................................................................301
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............158 Cell Phone Voice Commands......................300
Setting the Gap Distance................................159 Making a Call........................................................301
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Pairing a Cell Phone For the First
Off.......................................................................160 Time..................................................................298
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................299
On.........................................................................157 Receiving a Call...................................................301
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............162 Text Messaging..................................................304
System Not Available........................................161 Using Traction Control...............................140
Using Cruise Control....................................156 Using Voice Recognition...........................296
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................156 Audio Voice Commands..................................341
Switching Cruise Control On..........................156 Climate Voice Commands.............................342
Using Four-Wheel Drive..............................131 Initiating a Voice Session................................296
Driving in Special Conditions With Mobile App Voice Commands......................345
Four-Wheel Drive...........................................132 Navigation Voice Commands.......................344
Four-Wheel Drive, High Range - 4H..............131 Phone Voice Commands................................343
Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range - 4L...............131 System Interaction and Feedback..............297
Shifting Between 2H and 4H...........................131 Voice Settings Commands............................346
Shifting Between 2H and 4L............................131
Shifting Between 4H and 4L..........................132
Two-Wheel Drive, High Range - 2H..............131
V
Using Hill Descent Control........................144 Vehicle Care...................................................233
HDC Operation....................................................144
Selecting HDC......................................................144
438
Index
Vehicle Dimensions - Double Cab/Single Front Airbag Warning Lamp............................66

Cab/Super Cab..........................................261 Front Fog Lamps Indicator...............................66
Double cab...........................................................264 Frost Warning Lamp...........................................66
Single cab..............................................................261 Glow Plug Indicator.............................................66
Super cab..............................................................262 High Beam Indicator...........................................66
Vehicle Dimensions - Short Wheelbase, Hill Descent Control............................................66
Chassis Cab................................................265 Hood Ajar Warning Lamp.................................66
Dimensions - Chassis Cab.............................265 Lane Keeping Aid Indicator..............................66
Vehicle Identification Number...............266 Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp.......................66
Vehicle Identification Plate.....................266 Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................67
Vehicle Storage.............................................237 Low Washer Fluid.................................................67
Battery....................................................................237 Over Speed Warning...........................................67
Body........................................................................237 Parking Lamps Indicator....................................67
Brakes....................................................................238 Powertrain Fault....................................................67
Cooling system....................................................237 Rear Fog Lamps Indicator.................................67
Engine.....................................................................237 Service Engine Soon............................................67
Fuel system..........................................................237 Shift Indicator........................................................67
General...................................................................237 Speed Limiter........................................................68
Miscellaneous.....................................................238 Stability Control Off Indicator.........................68
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................238 Stability Control Warning Lamp....................68
Tires........................................................................238 Traffic Sign Recognition Road Condition
Ventilation Indicator.............................................................68
See: Climate Control..........................................94 Traffic Sign Recognition Speed Limit
VIN Indicator.............................................................68
See: Vehicle Identification Number............266 Water-In-Fuel Warning Lamp.........................68
Voice Control...................................................44 Warning Triangle..........................................196
Double cab............................................................196
W Single cab..............................................................196
Super cab..............................................................196
Warning Lamps and Indicators................64 Washer Fluid Check....................................223
Adaptive Cruise Control Lamp.......................64 Washers
Anti-Lock Braking System Warning See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................233
Lamp....................................................................64 Wheel Nuts
Automatic High Beam Lamp...........................64 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................248
Auto Start-Stop Lamp.......................................64 Wheels and Tires.........................................239
Battery Warning Lamp.......................................65 General Information.........................................239
Blind Spot Monitor Indicator............................65 Technical Specifications.................................255
Brake System Warning Lamp..........................65 Windows and Mirrors...................................56
Cruise Control Indicator.....................................65 Windshield Washers......................................47
Direction Indicator...............................................65 Windshield Wipers........................................46
Door Ajar Indicator...............................................65 Intermittent Wipe................................................46
Electronic Locking Differential........................65 Speed Dependent Wipers................................46
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Wiper Blades
Lamp....................................................................65 See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................227
Engine Oil Warning Lamp.................................65 Wipers and Washers.....................................46
Fasten Rear Seatbelt Warning Lamp............67
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp.....................66
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators............................66
439

P375_Ranger_English_2018_TKD_OM_ASEAN_JB3B19A321CKA.v1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

P375_Ranger_English_2018_TKD_OM_ASEAN_JB3B19A321CKA.v1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P375_Ranger_English_2018_TKD_OM_ASEAN_JB3B19A321CKA.v1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FORD RANGER Owner's Manual

All rights reserved.

Ambient Lighting ...........................................54 Storage Compartments

Electronic Locking Differential ................135 Traffic Sign Recognition ............................173

Stability Control Towing

Maintenance Wheels and Tires

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Note: This manual describes product

manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

Brake system Explosive gas

Cabin air filter Fan warning

Check engine Fasten seatbelt

Check fuel cap Front airbag

Child safety door lock Front fog lamps

Child safety door unlock Fuse compartment

Child seat lower anchor Hazard flashers

Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window

Cruise control Heated windshield

Do not open when hot Windshield defroster

Electronic power steering Interior luggage compartment

Engine air filter Jack

Engine coolant Lighting control

Engine coolant temperature Lock rear window

Engine oil Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level DATA RECORDING

When using the vehicle, situations may Collision Repairs

Scheduled Maintenance and

Using mobile communications equipment

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

A Air vents. F Cruise control switches. See

K Steering wheel adjustment lever. L Horn.

A Air vents. E Instrument cluster. See

J Ignition switch. See Ignition

INSTALLING CHILD WARNINGS

E161855 Note: Mandatory use of child seats varies

Child Seats for Different Mass

Baby Safety Seat

Child Safety Seat WARNING

See Head Restraints (page 102).

We recommend that you use a booster

Booster Cushion (Group 3)

Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that

Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX

There are two child restraint anchor points

See Head Restraints (page 102).

Mass Group Categories

0–10 kg 0–13 kg 9–18 kg 15–25 kg 22–36 kg

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

Note: When using a child restraint on a

ISOFIX Child Restraints

Mass Group Categories

Rear center seat Size class

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

The childproof locks are on the rear edge

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Status After a Crash

Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt

To adjust the shoulder belt height:

SEATBELT REMINDER (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may have a seatbelt